Green Lights Program: Lighting Upgrade Manual


United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA 430-R-94-001
Seventh Edition
June 1995
Green Lights Program
       HTI
 U
    AltJAL
              reen

-------

-------
PLANNING

-------
Program

-------
 United  States
 Environmental Protection
 Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA430-B-95-001B
January 1995
GREEN  LIGHTS
PROGRAM
                                                    reen
                                                 Lights
   As Green Lights encourages the widespread use of
   energy-efficient lighting, the program is proving that
   government and industry can work together to create
   a cost-efficient and environmentally aware America.
   This document provides a brief overview of the Green
   Lights program and highlights its extensive participant
   support services.
   SUMMARY

   •  Organizations join Green Lights by signing a
      Memorandum of Understanding with EPA.

   •  EPA offers the following Participant Support
      Programs.

     *  Information Hotlines

     *  Energy Star Fax-Line System

     *  National Lighting Product Information Program

     *  Light Briefs

     *  Lighting Upgrade Manual

     *  Lighting Upgrade Workshops

     *  Green Lights Financing Directory

     *  Lighting Waste Disposal Information

     *  ProjectKalc Analysis Tool

     *  Decision Support System

     *  ReportKalc Analysis Tool

     *  Directories of Green Lights Allies

     *  Implementation Planning Assistance

     *  Communications Assistance
            CONTENTS

            SUMMARY	
            GENERAL
            INFORMATION..
          .1
                                                        PARTICIPANT SUPPORT
                                                        PROGRAMS	3
            GENERAL

            INFORMATION

            Overview

            Launched in January of 1991, EPA's Green Lights is a
            voluntary program.  It reduces pollution by
            encouraging organizations across the country to install
            profitable lighting upgrade projects that (1) maximize
            energy savings and (2) maintain or improve lighting
            quality.  More than 1,600 corporations, hospitals,
            schools,  utilities, and state and local governments
            (among others) have signed agreements with EPA.
            They have committed to survey and upgrade their
            lighting systems within five years.

            Lighting accounts for 20-25 percent of all electricity
            sold in the United States.  EPA estimates that if
            efficient lighting were used everywhere profitable
            throughout the country, the nation's demand for
            electricity would be cut by more than 10 percent. This
            could save nearly $17 billion in ratepayer bills and
            result in the following annual pollution reductions.

            «•  202 million metric tons of carbon dioxide — the
               equivalent of taking 44 million cars off the road

            <*•  over 13 million metric tons of sulfur dioxide (which
               contributes to acid rain)

            «•  600,000 metric tons of nitrogen oxides (which
               contribute to smog)
          Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995

-------
WHAT ARE
GREEN LIGHTS
COMMITMENTS?
PARTNER ALLY
SURVEYOR
ALLY
ENDORSER
Survey domestic facilities S •/

Upgrade lighting where profitable -s S

Complete upgrade within 5 years ^ •/

Install demonstration upgrade within
180 days s S

Hold kickoff meeting s •/

Assign an Implementation Director s S

Report upgrade progress to EPA •/ •/

Help EPA promote the benefits of
energy-efficient lighting ^ S

Educate industry about the benefits
of energy-efficient lighting /"

Work with EPA to encourage
development and use of new technologies •
-------
"Endorsers" are professional, educational, and trade
associations that agree to promote the idea of energy-
efficient lighting to their members.
PARTICIPANT

SUPPORT

PROGRAMS

The success of the Green Lights program depends on
the actions taken by Partners and Allies to implement
energy-efficient lighting upgrade projects, ultimately
resulting in sustained pollution prevention. EPA's
participant support programs provide planning and
implementation guidance for successful lighting upgrade
projects.

EPA offers four types of participant support programs.

<*• information
:9~ analysis
t9~ planning
^ communications

Information

One obstacle to implementation is the scarcity of
objective information on which to base lighting upgrade
decisions. The Green Lights program has developed the
following information resources for use by program par-
ticipants.

Green Lights Information
Hotline

The Green Lights program operates a consolidated
hotline to provide convenient and responsive assistance
to participants. Call or fax the hotline for the following
services:

• Green Lights materials
• technical support
• public relations support
• software support
• workshop registration
• Energy Star programs information
Green Lights Information Hotline

» (202) 775-6650
Fax (202) 775-6680
In addition to the Green Lights
Information Hotline, a separate hotline
is available for Green Lights Allies. For
all questions regarding Green Lights
Allies and the Ally program, please call
or fax:
Green Lights Ally Information

S (202) 293-4527
Fax (202) 223-9534
Energy Star Fax-Line
System

You can now request delivery of Green Lights and other
Energy Star program information by pressing a few
buttons on your telephone or fax machine, 24 hours a
day. EPA's Fax-Line System will automatically send you
the requested information via high-quality fax
transmission. All you need to do is call (202) 233-9659
and follow the recorded instructions. You may request in-
formation by pressing the four-digit
numbers that correspond to
subjects that interest you. In
addition, you can request that other
materials be mailed to you when
using the Fax-Line System. A
partial listing of the types of
information you can conveniently
retrieve follows.

• general information about Green Lights and other
voluntary pollution prevention programs

• sample MOD and other marketing tools

• specific industry information

• media materials

• lighting upgrade information
To begin using the Fax-Line System, call (202) 233-9659
and request a menu. If you encounter any difficulty, call
the Green Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650.
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
National Lighting Product Information
Program (NLPIP)

EPA cosponsors this program, which publishes objective
information about lighting upgrade products. Two types
of publications are offered.
Specifier Reports provide
background information about the
technology as well as
independent performance test
results for name-brand lighting
upgrade products.
^ Lighting Answers provide informative text about
the performance characteristics of specific lighting
technologies but do not include comparative
performance test results.

Specifier Reports published to date have addressed a
variety of technologies including electronic ballasts,
power reducers, specular reflectors, parking lot
luminaires, occupancy sensors, compact fluorescent
lamps, heater-cutout ballasts, exit signs, compact
fluorescent luminaires, and an update on electronic
ballasts. New and updated Specifier Reports are being
developed.

Lighting Answers published to date have addressed T8
fluorescent systems, .polarizing panels for fluorescent
luminaires, task lighting, and HID dimming systems.
Additional Lighting Answers are planned.

The Green Lights program will distribute one copy of
Specifier Reports and Lighting Answers to current Green
Lights Implementation Directors upon publication. You
can purchase additional copies from the Lighting
Research Center. Just request an order form from the
Energy Star Fax-Line system and fax your order to the
Lighting Research Center, Rensselaer Polytechnic
Institute at (518) 276-2999 (fax).

Light Briefs

EPA publishes 2-page Light Briefs on various
implementation issues. These publications address
technical and financial issues affecting lighting upgrade
decisions. Four Light Briefs focus on technologies:
occupancy sensors, electronic ballasts, specular
reflectors, and efficient fluorescent lamps. Four other
releases cover rolling financing strategies, financing
options, measuring lighting upgrade profitability, and
waste disposal. Future editions will address other issues
raised by program participants. Current copies have
been mailed out to all Green Lights Implementation
Directors.
For additional information, please contact Green Lights
Customer Service at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202) 775-
6680.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

This document is a practical reference for every phase
of the lighting upgrade process: organizing staff, setting
goals, surveying facilities, evaluating lighting systems,
financing upgrades, planning projects, requesting bids,
disposing lamps and ballasts, maintaining lighting
systems, and reporting project results. It provides com-
prehensive technical information about lighting tec-
hnologies and controls, and is organized as follows.

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success
• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey

In addition, there are three appendices to the Lighting
Upgrade Manual.

• Requesting Proposals
• Green Lights for Federal Participants
• Upgrading Tenant Spaces

Participants may request a copy of the individual
sections or appendices, or the entire Manual by calling
the Green Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650
or fax (202) 775-6680.
Lighting Upgrade
Workshops

EPA holds 21/2-day workshops
in major cities across the
country. Workshops are free
and open to the public, but
space is limited and reserved
for pre-registrants on a first-
come, first-served basis. All
existing and prospective Green Lights participants are
strongly encouraged to attend.
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Conducted by Green Lights technical staff, participants
receive practical training in all aspects of lighting:

• lighting upgrade technologies and applications
• upgrade project planning and management

- financial analysis
- lighting evaluations
lighting maintenance
- lamp and ballast disposal
- progress reporting

• Green Lights analysis tools

- , ProjectKalc
- Decision Support System

The agenda features two full days of instruction,
including slide and video presentations and software
training and demonstrations. The workshop concludes
after the examination on the morning of the third day.
Passing this 100-question exam is a prerequisite for
participating as a Surveyor Ally.

To preregister or obtain more information about
upcoming workshops, call the Green Lights Information
Hotline at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202) 775-6680.
Green Lights
Financing Directory

This computerized directory consists of two indexed
databases distributed on a single floppy diskette. The
Utility Financing Database contains recently updated
information on utility incentive programs (such as
rebates, direct assistance, and loans) for installing
energy-efficient lighting technologies. The Non-Utility
Financing Database contains information on companies
that provide financing services. These organizations are
financing companies or lighting/energy management
companies that coordinate with banks, leasing firms, or
investor groups. Financing options offered by these
firms include conventional loans, guaranteed savings
insurance, capital leases, and shared savings. The
software requires an IBM-compatible PC, DOS version
2.0 or higher, 2 megabytes available hard disk space,
512K RAM, and a floppy disk drive.

To request a diskette or to provide updated, information
for the next release, contact Green Lights at (202) 775-
6650 or fax (202) 775-6680.
Lighting Waste
Disposal Information

Keeping up to date on the regulations and procedures for
properly disposing of used mercury-containing lamps
and PCB-containing ballasts can be quite a challenge!
Green Lights has published Lighting Waste Disposal, the
section of the Lighting Upgrade Manual that outlines the
Federal and State disposal requirements and guidelines.
In addition, Lighting Waste Disposal contains a
comprehensive directory of information resources. It
provides contact information for EPA regional offices,
state solid and hazardous waste agencies, lamp and
ballast recyclers, hazardous waste incinerators and
landfills, and information hotlines.

To obtain a copy of Lighting Waste Disposal, please
contact Green Lights Customer Service at (202) 775-
6650 or fax (202) 775^6680.

Analysis

Selecting energy-
efficient lighting
technologies is a
difficult task, which is
complicated by the
objectives of superior
upgrade designs.
These objectives in-
clude the following:
selecting appropriate
light levels, improving
visual comfort,
maximizing source and
luminaire efficiency, applying automatic controls,
developing maintenance strategies, and conducting a
rigorous financial analysis. EPA has developed tools
and programs to help Partners and Allies rapidly analyze
lighting systems and select appropriate upgrade
solutions.
ProjectKalc

ProjectKalc is a flexible tool that allows users to analyze
their own lighting upgrade solutions and aggregate
results into projects involving multiple fixture upgrades.
In addition, users may use ProjectKalc to perform room-
specific light level calculations.

ProjectKalc will rapidly calculate the following results on
both a fixture-specific and project-wide basis: upgrade
cost, energy and demand savings, maintenance savings,
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
internal rate of return (IRR) and net present value (NPV).
In addition, ProjectKalc will determine the relative light
output of each fixture upgrade as a percentage of the
existing fixture's output.

ProjectKalc is designed to be easy to use. Users can set
their own system defaults for equipment costs,
installation times, and financial assumptions, while
modifying these user-defined defaults as needed for
specific projects or analyses. Users can also develop
their own libraries of fixture definitions and upgrade
solutions for use in multiple projects.

Recent enhancements allow users to define their own
technology performance values, and results can be
exported for use in ReportKalc, the progress reporting
software.

Training on the use of ProjectKalc is provided at the
Lighting Upgrade Workshops. To receive a copy of
ProjectKalc, either attend a Lighting Upgrade Workshop,
or call the Green Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-
6650 or fax (202) 775-6680.
Decision Support System

EPA has developed an innovative software
package to help Partners and Allies survey
facilities, identify applicable lighting
upgrade technologies, and quantify costs
and benefits. The Green Lights Decision Support
System (GUDSS) recommends lighting upgrade
packages that maximize energy savings and maintain or
improve lighting quality. In combination with other
support provided by Green Lights, the GUDSS educates
users, enables participants to use in-house resources for
making upgrade decisions, and facilitates informed
interaction with industry. Additionally, it simplifies
project planning by producing reports that clearly show
product types, quantities, locations, and minimum
performance requirements.

You can use the GUDSS to survey office areas
(including rest rooms, stairwells, conference rooms,
hallways), warehouses, and retail spaces. Based on
user-entered lighting survey data, the GUDSS assesses
existing lighting conditions and selects appropriate
upgrade technologies that meet user-defined illumination
targets. The system chooses upgrade technologies from
large databases that include performance and cost data.

The software works with most PCs in use today;
however, certain minimum hardware requirements must
be met.
H IBM PC or compatible
B DOS version 3.30 or higher (not 4.0)
H 512KRAMfree
S hard disk with at least 10 megabytes free

For general information about the GUDSS, please refer
to The Lighting Survey, a section of the Lighting Upgrade
Manual. To obtain the software, either attend a Lighting
Upgrade Workshop or contact the Green Lights
Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202) 775-
6680.
ReportKalc

Participants can comply with the reporting requirement
by submitting the standard one-page Implementation
Report form for each facility, or they can submit an
electronic progress report using ReportKalc. ReportKalc
utilizes the same equipment and activity codes as the
paper report, and the computer screens follow the paper
report's format. To further simplify the reporting
process, ReportKalc provides picklists for
data entry and will calculate system wattages
and lighting savings. Users can either use
these calculated values or enter their own
values for submission to EPA. Prior to
submission, ReportKalc checks the report for
incomplete or inconsistent data, thus
minimizing "proof-reading" time for the
participant and EPA.

ReportKalc is sent to every participant on their Green
Lights anniversary date. To obtain a copy before the
anniversary date, call your Account Manager or call the
Green Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650 or
fax (202) 775-6680.
Directories of Green Lights A/lies

Selecting the optimum mix of technologies to maximize
energy savings while maintaining or improving lighting
quality requires extensive knowledge of lighting
technologies, performance and applications. Many
Partners do not have this kind of expertise in-house
when they join the program. Gaining the expertise or
selecting an outside professional can present a
significant challenge. Green Lights Partners can use the
following directories to identify individuals or companies
who can help in the lighting upgrade process. Please
note that EPA does not endorse any Ally's products or
services.
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Directory of Surveyor Allies lists individuals who
understand how to develop and manage projects that
meet the terms of the Memorandum of Understanding
(MOU). These individuals have attended a Lighting
Upgrade Workshop, passed the workshop examination,
and have signed a Surveyor Ally MOU with EPA.
Surveyor Allies agree to apply the principles of lighting
quality and maximizing energy savings in their
specifications for Green Lights clients.

Directory of Green Lights Ally Organizations lists the
following types of companies that have signed an MOU
with EPA. They are committed to helping EPA promote
and support the Green Lights program.

• lighting equipment manufacturers
• lighting equipment distributors
• lighting management companies
• electric utilities

To request copies of these directories, call the Green
Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202)
775-6680.

For additional information about the Green Lights Ally
programs, please contact the Green Lights Ally Hotline
at (202) 293-4527 or fax (202) 223-9534.
Planning
The commitment to upgrade all of a
corporation's facilities can alter the
way management addresses several
areas: facilities, environmental
protection, employee productivity,
and maintenance practices. For
some corporations, this change will
require significant planning and
coordination among several diverse sectors of the
organization.
Implementation
Planning Guidebook

Implementing upgrades in large or complex
organizations can be a difficult task. This guidebook
helps to simplify the planning effort by suggesting a
sequence of specific action steps. A time line and
checklist are included to help guide participants through
the planning process. In addition, the Guidebook's
convenient forms help organize the information needed
for setting priorities and tracking upgrade projects.
This guidebook is included in the Lighting Upgrade
Manual. To request a separate copy of the Guidebook,
please contact the Green Lights Information Hotline at
(202) 775-6650 or fax (202) 775-6680.
Implementation
Planning Meetings
Shortly after joining the Green Lights
program, participants should hold an
implementation planning meeting
with assistance from Green Lights
technical staff. Middle and senior
level staff should attend this meeting,
as well as representatives from the
various divisions or regions within the
company.
The objectives of this meeting are to announce
participation in Green Lights and to raise general
awareness of the program's goals and commitments. In
addition, Green Lights' participant support programs may
be reviewed. This meeting may also be the proper
forum for discussing involvement by specific individuals
on the organization's Green Lights implementation team.
The team consists of the Green Lights Implementation
Director (GLID), regional/divisional coordinators, facility
staff, financial analyst, public relations, environmental
affairs, and senior staff.

The project implementation team should also discuss the
following issues related to project planning and
implementation.

«" establishing communication and coordination within
the team

«• establishing leadership and project management
roles

«• identifying financing needs and resources

^ setting goals and developing a 5-year action plan

«• determining an approach to use in specifying lighting
upgrades

For participants who have already begun the
implementation process, Green Lights' representatives
may visit and help address specific implementation
barriers. Such barriers can include organizing staff,
project financing, surveying techniques, evaluation of
trial installations, and reporting. Green Lights technical
staff may also conduct a brief technical review of
completed surveys on specific facilities. In addition,
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
8
preliminary surveys may be conducted or trial installation
projects defined for immediate implementation. On
occasion, Green Lights technical staff will visit upgraded
facilities to gather information for case studies or to
provide direction for maximizing energy savings.

For additional information, please contact the Green
Lights Information Hotline at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202)
775-6680.
Telephone Follow-Up

EPA assigns every Green Lights
participant an Account Manager,
who works closely with the
participant to provide assistance
throughout the lighting upgrade
process. The Account Manager
will periodically follow up with
participants to discuss projects,
methodologies, difficulties, and
answer technical or program questions. The objective is
to ensure that Partners and Allies make progress in
implementing and reporting successful lighting upgrade
projects.
Communications

Saving energy and preventing pollution is good news for
US business and the public, and Green Lights can help
participants communicate their activity within their
organization and the business community.

Green Lights has developed a variety of
communications materials and publications designed to
recognize participants for their commitment to the
program.

• Green Lights Update, the program's monthly
newsletter

• Green Lights videos

• Public service advertisements

Green Lights communications materials...

«- educate employees about their organization's
participation in Green Lights and the benefits of
energy-efficient lighting

&• help Green Lights participants in the development
and production of written materials that incorporate
the Green Lights logo
•*• help Green Lights participants announce their
participation in Green Lights to clients and
constituents

<*• help recruit other companies into the Green Lights
program

•*• promote energy-efficient lighting

Videos

Green Lights currently offers two videos to help
participants communicate the message of pollution
prevention and maximizing savings.

Energy, Environment and Economics: EPA Green
Lights Environmental Showcase

This 12-minute video presents the highlights of a 30-
minute sponsored public affairs broadcast of
Environmental Showcase, originally aired on CNBC, in
which several Green Lights Implementation Directors
speak about the benefits of their participation. Hosted
by Dennis Weaver, the program provides insights into
the current problems associated with energy-related
pollution. It also highlights the impacts of Green Lights
in reducing power plant emissions.

Occupancy Sensors: A Common $ense Approach to
Protecting the Environment

This 10-minute video explains the economic benefits
and applications of occupancy sensors. Several
Partners — American Express, Boeing, Columbia
University, and the State of Maryland — relate their
sensor upgrade experiences.
The table on the following page lists the Participant
Support Programs and how you can access them.

For additional information, please contact the
appropriate hotline based on whether you are a Partner
or an Ally.

Partners

Green Lights Information Hotline
(202)775-6650 8
(202)775-6680 fax

Allies

Green Lights Ally Hotline
(202)293-4527 9
(202)223-9534 fax
.Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
PARTICIPANT SUPPORT PROGRAMS
reen
Lights

Specifier Reports
Lighting Answers
Light Briefs
Lighting Upgrade Manual
Lighting Upgrade Workshops
GL Financing Directory
Waste Disposal Information
ProjectKalc
Decision Support System
ReportKalc
GL Ally Directories
Planning Assistance
Implementation Reporting
Communications
Videos
Surveyor Ally Program
Information/ Customer
Service
(202) 775-6650 phone
(202) 775-6680 fax
information
information
information/order
information/order
preregister and information
technical support /information/order
information/order
technical support/information/order
technical support/information/order
technical support/information/order
order
information
technical support and information
information
order

Information
Faxline
(202) 233-9659 phone

information by fax

information by fax
information by fax
information by fax

Ally Hotline
(202) 293-4527 phone
(202) 223-9534 fax

\
information/update

information

information
NLPIP
Publications
(51 8) 276-2999 fax
order
order

-------
10
NOTES:
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11

NOTES:
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

Green Lights is an exciting and innovative program
sponsored by the US Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) that encourages major US corporations
and other organizations to install energy-efficient
lighting technologies.

Organizations that make the commitment to Green
Lights will profit by lowering their electricity bills,
improving lighting quality, and increasing worker
productivity. They will also reduce the air pollution
caused by electricity generation.

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Green Lights Program is one of a series of documents
known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade Manual.
Other documents in the Manual are Listed below.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline
(for program, technical, and software support)

a (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202)775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
EPA
Iff Green
Lights
Green Lights Program • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Guidebook
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EMENTATiON
PLANNING
EPA 430-8-95-002
January 1995
reen
Lights
Now that your company has decided to participate in
Green Lights, the most important tasks are to plan and
initiate lighting upgrades. The planning process should
begin once your organization signs and returns the
Green Lights Memorandum of Understanding (MOU).
This guidebook outlines key steps to guide you in
initiating a successful Green Lights program,
improving lighting efficiency, and preventing pollution.
ACTION CHECKLIST

Address staffing and communication needs

identify financing needs and resources

Select a technical approach

Develop an implementation management plan
ADDRESS YOUR
STAFFING AND
COMMUNICATION NEEDS

Assemble a Green
Lights Task Force

The first step in organizing the Green Lights program
in your facilities is to assemble a Green Lights Task
Force. The Task Force oversees-the program by
setting program goals, establishing timetables, and
assigning responsibilities. It typically includes the
following members: the Green Lights Implementation
Director (GLID), facility manager(s), financial analyst,
purchasing specialist, decision maker,
communications director, and regional or division
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLIST.
ADDRESS YOUR STAFFING
AND COMMUNICATION NEEDS.
.1
IDENTIFY YOUR FINANCING NEEDS
AND RESOURCES 6

SELECT YOUR TECHNICAL APPROACH 6

DEVELOP AN IMPLEMENTATION
MANAGEMENT PLAN , 8
coordinators. The team may also include health and
safety staff and environmental staff.

Green Lights Implementation Director

The GLID is the most
important person on the
Task Force and serves as
"champion," ensuring that
your organization
successfully fulfills the
lighting upgrade
commitments established in the MOU. This role
requires a motivated person who can engage
voluntary participation, using either direct authority or
personal influence. The GLID is the primary point of
contact between EPA and your organization, and re-
ceives new technical material, such as the Specifier
Reports and other support materials.

The GLID conducts the kickoff meeting, coordinates
Task Force activities, and establishes and oversees
your Green Lights implementation Management Plan.
The GLID often directs your company's lighting
upgrades. In addition, the GLID submits progress
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EPA Support

EPA currently provides participants
with the following implementation
support materials and services.

* Information Hotlines
* Green Lights Electronic Bulletin
Board
* Energy Star Fax-Line System
* National Lighting Product
Information Program
* Light Briefs
* Lighting Upgrade Manual
* Lighting Upgrade Workshops
* Green Lights Financing
Directory
* Lighting Waste Disposal
Information
* Decision Support System
* Quika/c Analysis Tool
* IRRkalc Analysis Tool
* Directories of Green Lights
Allies
* Implementation Planning
Assistance
* Corporate Communications
Assistance
Financial Analyst
reports on surveys and upgrades, or
coordinates the submission of
reports by facility managers.

Sometimes the GLID position must
be reassigned. Organizations
should consider this action if the
GLID is not happy with the
responsibility, and someone else
could do a better job. If you do
appoint a new GLID, please notify
EPA in writing within two weeks of
any change.

Facility Managers

Facility Managers are the primary
contacts for each of your company's
facilities and should be the main
contact for specific upgrade projects.
These managers provide facility-
specific data for lighting analysis and
coordinate your building survey
effort. They oversee the lighting
upgrade installations and
subsequent maintenance.
The Financial
Analyst decides
how to secure
funding for
upgrade projects
and identifies the
most
advantageous
financing option. This analyst
performs a variety of financial tasks,
such as projecting cash flows and
calculating after-tax IRRs for lighting
upgrades. The analyst also
evaluates financing sources for
supporting Green Lights upgrades
and produces in-house documents
for use in project approval and
procurement.

Purchasing Specialist

The Purchasing
Specialist
researches and
identifies the
most cost-
effective
purchasing
options. This
person explores
purchasing standards to help in
meeting your company's profit
hurdle rate for lighting investments
(i.e., twenty percent). The specialist
may also negotiate national
purchasing agreements to provide a
means of reducing costs and im-
proving service, and ultimately in-
creasing your profit. Using these
national agreements, your company
can streamline the purchase of
lighting equipment and ensure
competitive prices.

Decision Makers

Upgrade projects
and decisions
require approval
from various
Decision Makers
at many levels
(e.g., building owners, executives,
legal department, comptroller). At
least one team member needs to
understand your company's approval
process for Creep Lights
investments. Some research should
precede the Green Lights kickoff
meeting, to enable the Task Force
members to suggest ways to get the
approval process moving. For
instance, the team member may
discover that pre-approved funds
are available if you submit the
appropriate paperwork.

Communications Director

The Communications Director
focuses your
company's
communications
efforts to ensure
that your
achievements in
protecting the
environment
through Green Lights are
recognized. For example, this
person coordinates effective uses of
the Green Lights logo in advertising,
newsletters, and public areas, and
develops media tools such as press
releases. The Communications
Director also works with EPA to
publish case studies of upgrades in
trade journals or the general media,
in addition to educating employees,
stockholders, and customers about
the program.

Regional or Division
Coordinators

For large firms with many facilities,
Regional or Division Coordinators
can play a significant role.
Sometimes, coordinators may serve
the role of facility manager
described above, providing building-
specific information and overseeing
lighting surveys and upgrades. In
other cases, an organization will
select a team leader to coordinate
the upgrade activities for a group of
facility managers in a region or
division. Use the Staffing Exercise
to help you identify the appropriate
staff for the Task Force.
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
STAFFING EXERCISE
X Who is the GLID currently?
X
X
Is this the most appropriate
person?
) Yes ( ) No
If not, who would better fulfill
the GLID function?
Who are the Facility Manager
candidates?
X Who are the Financial Analyst
candidates?
X Who are the Purchasing
Specialist candidates?
X
X
X
Who are the Decision Maker
Approval candidates?
Who are the Communications
Director candidates?
If your firm has multiple
facilities, who are the Regional
or Division Coordinator
candidates?

Develop an Internal
Communication Plan

Once you have assembled the Task
Force, project work begins. To
successfully initiate Green Lights,
you need to develop an internal plan
to regularly communicate and
distribute information. The
cornerstone of this plan is the kickoff
meeting conducted in cooperation
with EPA. On-going planning
meetings and employee
involvement and education also
ensure an effective program.

Kickoff Meeting and
On-Going Planning
Meetings

The kickoff meeting is the first
organization-wide introduction to
Green Lights. It is critical to
ensuring success, because it
invigorates staff and shapes the
activities of the months and years
that follow. Current Green Lights
Partners have affirmed that visible
support and participation from senior
management is essential to a
successful kickoff meeting, so be
sure to include senior management.
For example, you could ask the
MOU signatory to provide
introductory remarks. Generally, the
meeting runs from three to six hours,
and is attended by the Task Force,
as well as facilities engineers from
the various divisions or regions
within the company. EPA can
provide support at these meetings,
and occasionally can help in running
them.

Before the meeting, the GLID should
establish the meeting's objectives.
In general, the meeting should do
the following.

<*• affirm your commitment to
maximizing energy savings
••*• explain the Green Lights
program and EPA's Participant
Support services

<*- promote discussion on the
responsibilities of specific task
force members

&~ identify options for the
demonstration upgrade

«• create and confirm a six-month
action plan

*• initiate an outline and discussion
of a five-year plan

&" identify potential implementation
barriers

A well-developed agenda ensures a
successful kickoff meeting, because
it shapes what you will accomplish
during the meeting and thereafter.
The agenda should outline the key
topics you will cover, such as
identifying project management staff
or establishing regular
communications. For example, you
should plan to discuss how you will
communicate (e.g., by modem, fax,
phone), and you should develop an
0 Conduct Quick Start
activities

You agree in the MOU to
complete several Quick
Start activities within 180
days of joining the program.

£7 Conduct a kickoff
meeting in cooperation
with EPA
n Compile a list of
facilities to be surveyed
and/or upgraded
£7 Specify and install a
5,000-15,000 ft2
demonstration lighting
upgrade
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
internal communication plan. The
agenda can also highlight relevant
training opportunities (e.g., Lighting
Upgrade Workshop, use of Green
Lights financial and analytical tools),
and can serve as a planning
springboard for employee awareness
and lighting activities. A sample
agenda is presented on the next
page.

On-going planning meetings should
follow the kickoff meeting, and the
GLID or regional coordinators run
them. These meetings are used to
set goals, measure and
communicate successes, address
obstacles, and develop the Green
Lights Implementation Plan.

Employee Education

Your employees are key participants
in your efforts to prevent pollution.
Lighting upgrade projects can fail or
succeed based on how the
employees perceive the lighting
changes.

Several reasons to educate
employees follow.

:s~ Influential employees may use
their clout to delay or cancel the
project if they misunderstand the
benefits of the new lighting
system.

ts~ The lighting system is an
integral part of the employees'
workspace. Unexplained
changes can result in distraction
or annoyance.

••*- Improved lighting quality can
boost employee productivity.
Since labor costs typically
exceed lighting costs by a ratio
of 200 to 1, more productive
employees represent a
significant gain for your
organization.
Pollution Prevention and Energy Equivalents
* 3,450 kWh/yr =
* 7,060 kWh/yr =
* 11 kWh
1 acre of trees planted (CO2)
1 car removed from the road (CO2)
1 gallon of gasoline saved (energy)
To calculate equivalent savings, divide kWh/yr savings by the
appropriate conversion factor.
kWh/yr/3,450 =
kWh/yr/7,060 =
kWh/11 =
_ acres of trees planted
cars removed
. gallons of gasoline saved
^ You can boost employee morale
by highlighting the following
benefits of lighting upgrades:
enhanced visual comfort,
reduced atmospheric pollution
and global warming, and
reduced energy consumption.

You should notify employees about
your organization's participation in
Green Lights as soon as possible
after signing the MOU. You can
announce participation by sending a
memo to all employees, writing an
article in an employee newsletter, or
holding brief meetings. Emphasize
the importance that Green Lights
places on lighting quality (e.g.,
aesthetics, visual comfort, light
level, reduced noise & flicker), and
that you can achieve quality
improvements while improving
efficiency and saving energy. Green
Lights participants (not the Green
Lights program) set their standards
far lighting quality.

Throughout the lighting upgrade
process, keep the message of Green
Lights visible in the workplace.
Green Lights can send you "We're
doing a world of good" posters.
They show a photograph of the earth
and highlight your organization's
commitment to the environment and
energy efficiency. You can also use
the poster to identify the person(s) in
your organization who can answer
employee questions about Green
Lights.

Educating employees before trial
installations helps them to
understand the changes and support
your lighting efficiency efforts.
Before installing a trial upgrade, you
should notify employees that you will
demonstrate lighting improvements
in a particular space. Employees
generally respond favorably to trial
installations when they are informed
before implementation. However, if
employees suspect that the building
owner is trying to "sneak" the lighting
retrofits into the fixtures overnight,
many will conclude that quality is
being reduced in order to save
money.

Trial installations provide an
excellent opportunity to demonstrate
the efficiency and quality
improvements resulting from the
lighting upgrade project under
consideration. Publicize energy
savings information along with a
listing of the visible quality
improvements. Employees will be
better able to appreciate quality
improvements when you install trial
upgrades next to a similar space that
you have not upgraded.

Keeping employees aware of your
organization's on-going upgrade
progress, resulting savings, and
environmental benefits will maintain
their support. Quantify the savings
you achieve through lighting
efficiency in terms of energy
reduction, cost avoidance, or
pollution prevention. Use the
pollution prevention and energy
equivalents (above) to communicate
this information in real terms.
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
SAMPLE AGENDA FOR KICKOFF MEETINGS

EXECUTIVE PLANNING MEETING

Welcome 10min

Introductions and Overview 10 min

Green Lights Program Goals 15-30 min

Introduce the program by showing the GL videotape or selected marketing slides. Review the
terms of the MOU.

Green Lights Participant Support Programs 20-30 min

Identify EPA support for participants.

Green Lights Planning 60-90 min

Use this Guidebook to discuss staffing, financing, your technical approach, and your
implementation plan.

Economics of Maximizing Energy Savings 15-30 min

Review calculation methods for internal rate of return (IRR) and net present value (NPV).

TECHNICAUADMINISTRA TIVE PLANNING MEETING

Status of Participant's Green Lights Activities 15-30 min

Review the organization's achievements in organizing and implementing lighting upgrades.

Review of Implementation Plans 15-30 min

Refine the action plan developed in the executive planning session, getting input from technical
staff.

Progress Reporting 15 min

Review reporting obligation and form.

Technology Questions/Answers 30-60 min

Discuss specifying lighting technologies to maximize energy savings.

Software Demonstrations 30-60 min

Demonstrate GL/DSS, Quikalc, and the Financing Directory.

Site Visits 1+hours

Survey a limited portion of a floor (about 1,000 square feet) and specify a trial installation.
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program « January 1995
-------
Publicize Activities
Externally

You should also publicize your
Green Lights activities externally to
help raise awareness of the program
and the benefits of energy efficient
lighting. Several standard publicity
avenues are available — news
releases, advertisements, and case
studies published in trade journals.
In addition, networking with other
Green Lights participants can also
provide you with other creative
publicity ideas.

Green Lights has developed a
variety of communications materials
and publications designed to
recognize your commitment to the
program. These materials educate
employees about their organization's
participation in Green Lights, and
help participants develop and
produce written materials
incorporating the Green Lights logo.
For additional information, call the
Green Lights Information Hotline at
(202) 775-6650 or fax (202) 775-
6680.
IDENTIFY YOUR
FINANCING NEEDS
AND RESOURCES
For your program to be successful,
you need to allocate sufficient funds
to enable the investment in energy-
efficient lighting necessary to meet
your upgrade commitments. Your
company can either allocate existing
funds or secure third-party financing.
Utility incentives and financing
options can reduce or eliminate the
need for capital, reduce risk, and
improve cash flow. In fact,
financed lighting upgrades routinely
result in positive cash flow. Third-
party financing also enables you to
retain more of your own capital for
use in your business and begin
gaining the benefits of efficient
lighting earlier than might be
possible otherwise.
Considerations provides a complete
discussion of financing options. The
Financing Exercise presents quick
calculations, to help you in
identifying investment ranges for
budgeting purposes.
FINANCING EXERCISE
Estimate your high-end initial
investment

(total square feet) x (high estimate)
= high investment estimate

SF x (S2/SF)
Estimate your low-end initial
investment
(total square feet) x (low estimate)
= low investment estimate
_SFx($0.50/SF)
Estimate your typical initial
investment

(total square feet) x (typical investment)
= typical investment estimate

SF X (S0.85/SF)
= $
Range of estimated investment
Determine how you can you
secure this funding.
Although you do not have to make
the decision regarding specific
financing options at the outset, you
should begin investigating early. To
get started, refer to the Green Lights
Financing Directory, which includes
information on utility rebates and
services as well as non-utility
financing sources. For more
information, Financial
SELECT YOUR

TECHNICAL

APPROACH

Select the Necessary
Expertise

The most critical step in carrying
out successful lighting upgrades
is the lighting survey and anal-
ysis. Your company can use one
of two technical approaches to
getting the necessary expertise or
combine these two. The
advantages and disadvantages of
each technical approach are pre-
sented in Exhibit 1.
• In-house personnel. In-
house survey and analysis
enables employee involve-
ment and provides maximum
objectivity. However, it
usually requires some training
and time investment.

• Outside expertise. Outside
expertise (i.e., consultants,
lighting management
companies, product vendors)
enables fast implementation
using experienced personnel.
However, the scope of prod-
ucts or services may not be
comprehensive, because
companies or individuals may
only promote certain products or
technologies. The Directory of
Surveyor Allies provides names
of individuals who have
attended a Lighting Upgrade
Workshop, passed the
proficiency examination, and are
committed to helping Green
Lights Partners specify lighting
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
upgrades that meet the terms of
the MOU. Green Lights also
offers a Directory of Ally
Organizations, which identifies
individuals or companies who
can help in the lighting upgrade
process. You can create a
Lighting Expertise Phone Log
(model at the end of this
document) while you research
your options.

Whatever your technical
approach, all Green Lights
participants should attend a
Lighting Upgrade Workshop for
training in technology selection,
analysis, and project planning.

You should also consider disposal
options in planning your technical
approach, because lighting upgrades
can involve the disposal of
hazardous substances (e.g.,
mercury, PCBs). Early planning can
help you devise the most

EXHIBIT 1
ACQUIRING LIGHTING EXPERTISE
appropriate waste management
strategy for your lighting wastes.
Lighting Waste Disposal contains a
detailed description of waste
disposal issues, as well as an
updated directory of information
resources.
Identify Facilities to be
Upgraded and
Determine Priority and
Schedule
One of the first technical planning
activities you should undertake is
developing a list of facilities to target
for lighting surveys and upgrades.
Usually, it is not feasible to upgrade
all facilities simultaneously, so the
Facility Managers need to evaluate
facilities whose upgrades will yield
the highest internal rates of return.
Source
In-House
Independent
Consultant
Lighting
Management
Company
Product
Vendors
Utility
Services
Typical Cost
Depends on
salary/benefits
and amount of
training
needed.
$0.01-0.10/SF
*
$0-0.03/SF
$0
$0
Objec-
tivity
High
High
Medium
Low
High
Turnkey Services
Survey, specification,
possible installation
and/or maintenance
Survey and
specification
Survey, specification,
product sales,
installation and
maintenance
Survey, product
sales, field assistance
Depends on incentive
program
These facilities receive top priority
for immediate upgrade efforts. The
savings generated from these
upgrades can then help finance
subsequent upgrades. In identifying
high priority facilities, Facility
Managers should consider a variety
of factors: regional economic
factors, facility characteristics, and
corporate priorities. The Facility
Profile Sheet (at the end of the
document) assists managers in
setting priorities among facilities.

You should develop an initial list of
priority facilities before the kickoff
meeting. You can view it as a
working list of your top twenty
facilities, and you should review and
alter it as necessary. Upgrades
should be scheduled to surpass the
minimum guidelines identified in the
MOU.

Recognize that prioritizing facilities
can be time-consuming and difficult
for companies with multiple
facilities. You may need to consult
with several departments within
your organization and review real
estate records as part of this pro-
cess.
Install Trial
Upgrades

Once you set priorities among
facilities, you can identify potential
areas (between 5,000-15,000 ft2)
for trial upgrades. These upgrades
offer an inexpensive means of
testing your proposed projects and
receiving employee feedback.
They enable you to show that the
savings and quality enhancement
from lighting upgrades are real,
and that upgrades can be relatively
simple.
'Depends on scope of services offered, diversity, and travel costs.
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
8
Ideally, the trial areas should be
visible to employees and amenable
to simple, profitable upgrades with
high lighting quality. For example,
private offices are commonly
upgraded as trials with delamping,
partial-output electronic ballasts and
T8 lamps, task lighting, and wall-
mounted occupancy sensors. These
changes improve visual comfort,
enhance aesthetics (with improved
color rendering lamps), and provide
user control of workstation lighting.
Your employees will appreciate the
immediate difference!

Employee education and
acceptance are crucial to making
your trial upgrades a success. The
Communications Director, working
with other staff as necessary, should
alert employees to the trial space
and advertise the environmental and
cost benefits of the upgrade. Green
Lights Partners have written articles
for their company newsletters and
have conducted meetings for staff
detailing the benefits of these
upgrades. Generally, employees
have been responsive to the
changes and the company's interest
in reducing pollution.
Report Lighting
Upgrade Progress

To document your lighting upgrade
progress, complete the standard
one-page Green Lights
Implementation Report, or use
electronic reporting software
(ReportKalc), which is available
through the Green Lights Hotline or
your Account Manager. Progress
reports establish the credibility of
your pollution prevention efforts and
show the benefits of your energy
efficiency projects to management,
customers, and employees. In
addition, each issue of the Update
recognizes participants who have
reported projects that month.
You must submit reports at
least annually, but more
frequent reporting (e.g., at
the completion of projects) is
encouraged.
You should also use the Green
Lights Tracking Sheet (at the end of
this document) to track your upgrade
progress across facilities.

Regular reporting also helps EPA
evaluate program effectiveness and
enhance technical support to
participants. An Implementation
Report should be filled out for each
completed survey or upgrade, even
if the entire facility is not completed.
After EPA receives these reports,
they are sent to your Account
Manager, who will contact you to
clarify the reports, help with future
technology selections, or coordinate
case study development. This
information is entered in a database
used for evaluating the total impact
of the program as well as for
analyzing trends in upgrade choices,
costs, methods, acceptance, and
profitability. Refer to Progress
Reporting for more information
about Green Lights reporting
obligations.
0 Activities Typically
Completed Within the First
Year

C3 Designate GLID and Task
Force
D Attend Lighting Upgrade
Workshop
D Submit survey and
implementation reports
D Hold kickoff and planning
meetings
D Install trial upgrades
D Identify financing needs and
options
D Investigate company-wide
and national purchasing
D Set up coordinated
procurement
D Develop a 5-year action plan
and budget
D Survey first buildings (30%)
D Complete first upgrades (5-
10% of square footage)
DEVELOP AN

IMPLEMENTATION

MANAGEMENT

PLAN

During the implementation planning
process, you may have identified
barriers to successful implementa-
tion of the Green Lights Program.
These barriers will depend on the
resources and limitations of your
company. For instance, some
companies will need creative
financing plans, while others will
have difficulty setting priorities
among facilities. You should
develop a written strategic action
plan to help you overcome the
barriers you identify. You can use it
to clarify what tasks you need to
accomplish in specific timeframes
and to assign responsibilities. EPA
can provide assistance in
developing the plan if necessary.
The box on the next page presents a
typical 5-Year Implementation Plan.
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
The success of the Green Lights
Program depends on your efforts to
carry out energy-efficient lighting
upgrades, which ultimately result in
sustained pollution prevention. By
following the steps outlined in this
guidebook, you ensure a successful
energy-efficiency program and a
cleaner environment.
Typical 5-Year Implementation Plan
YeaM
Designate manager and support team
Attend Lighting Upgrade Workshop
Submit initial implementation reports for all facilities
Hold kickoff and planning meetings
Install trial upgrade
Identify financing needs and options
Investigate company-wide purchasing
Set up coordinated procurement
Develop 5-year action plan and budget
Survey first buildings (30%)
Install meters
Complete first upgrades (5% of square footage)
Year 2
Initiate company-wide purchasing agreements
Take advantage of volume price breaks
Evaluate first installations
Install trial upgrades
Fine tune approach
Complete building surveys (70%)
Upgrade next most profitable sites (15% of square footage)
Initiate lighting maintenance program
Update implementation reports
Write case studies about early installations
Year 3
Invest profits from first year upgrades in new upgrades
Complete upgrades (40% of square footage)
Update implementation reports
Write case studies
Year 4
Invest profits from previous year upgrades in new upgrades
Complete upgrades (30% of total square footage)
Update implementation reports
Write case studies
YearS
Invest profits from previous year upgrades in new upgrades
Complete upgrades (final 10% of total square footage)
Assess potential for continued improvement
Update implementation reports
Write case studies
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
LIGHTING EXPERTISE PHONE LOG
Type of
Expertise
Survey

Specification

Products
Installation

Maintenance

Disposal

Name

1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Phone

1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Remarks (e.g., cost, availability, references)

1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2
3
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3
GREEN LIGHTS
-------
FACILITY PROFILE SHEET
PAGE OF

Facility

Building
Type

Number of
Buildings

Floors

Owned

Leased
and
Term

Total
Gross SF

Age
(year)

Yearly
Electricity
Cost

Utility
Rate

Utility
Rebate
Program

Occ.
Hours
Per Year

\ tyj / iPA
WGreen
~ Lights
Comments

-------
GREEN LIGHTS
FACILITY TRACKING SHEET
Facility Name

Facility Square Footage

Survey
Completion
Date

Upgrade
Completion
Date

Date of Progress Report

Estimated Number of Projects per Facility

Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • KPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
13
NOTES:
-------
14
NOTES:
-------
15
NOTES:
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

Green Lights is an exciting and innovative program
sponsored by the US Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) that encourages major US corporations and other
organizations to install energy-efficient lighting
technologies.

For more informatfon contact the Green Lights program
office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Implementation Planning Guidebook is one of a series of
documents known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade
Manual. Other documents in the Manual are Listed
below.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

S (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
[All oreen
Lights
Implementation Planning Guidebook • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Financial
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
FINANCIAL
CONSIDERATIONS
EPA 430-B-95-003
January 1395
.. l\(/ Ureen
^Lights
Many profitable lighting upgrade projects are delayed
due to limited availability of capital. Participants can
take advantage of several financing options to
overcome this obstacle and receive the financial
advantages of energy efficiency: utility incentives,
national purchasing agreements, equipment financing,
and performance guarantees.
ACTION CHECKLIST
Using the computerized Green Lights Financing
Directory, assess availability of utility incentives
and review services and terms offered by
financing organizations.

Work with your financial and tax analysts to
identify the appropriate financing options.

Investigate national purchasing agreements with
manufacturers and service companies.

Evaluate profitability by calculating net present
value (NPV) instead of simple payback.
INTRODUCTION
Several utility incentives and financing options are
available to fund lighting upgrades. Although third-
party financing may be a more expensive funding
approach, it may still be the best alternative. It
reduces or eliminates the need for capital, reduces
risk, and improves cash flow. It also allows you to
retain capital for use in your business activities.

This document reviews the more popular financing
options for lighting upgrades using case studies. It
also identifies parameters for choosing a financing
option, and explains financial analysis and its terms.
To obtain information about the utilities and
CONTENTS

ACTION
CHECKLIST...
INTRODUCTION..

UTILITY
INCENTIVES..'
NATIONAL ACCOUNT
AGREEMENTS
OVERVIEW OF FINANCING
OPTIONS 3
CHOOSING A FINANCING
OPTION
....7
GREEN LIGHTS FINANCING
DIRECTORY
FINANCIAL
ANALYSIS 8

ECONOMICS OF MAXIMIZING ENERGY SAVINGS.. 11
companies who offer financing, refer to the Green
Lights Financing Directory, You can download a
current version by modem from the Green Lights
Electronic Bulletin Board at (202) 775-6671. Or you
can call Green Lights Customer Service at (202) 775-
6650 for a copy of the Financing Directory on disk.
UTILITY INCENTIVES
Some electric utilities are helping their customers
reduce the initial cost of lighting improvements by
offering rebates and other incentives. With reduced
customer loads, an electric utility can meet new
customer demand at a lower cost than building new
generating capacity.
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Before you begin your lighting
upgrades, contact your local utility
and obtain specific incentive
program information. Pay particular
attention to customer eligibility crite-
ria and qualifying technologies.
Also, verify the deadline for the re-
bate application or upgrade com-
pletion to qualify for the financial
incentives. To identify the incen-
tives that may apply to your up-
grades, consult the computerized
Green Lights Financing Directory. It
includes descriptions of utility
incentive programs and other
financing sources.

Utility incentives can take several
forms.

* rebates
* direct utility assistance
» low interest loans
Rebates
• The utility company reimburses
the building owner for part of the
cost of carrying out lighting
efficiency improvements.

• Rebates may be based on load
reduction ($ per kW), or based
on a fixed rebate for each
energy-efficient product
purchased ($ per item).

• A given technology may qualify
under one or more programs
offered by the utility. Typically,
you can only submit one
incentive program application
per building. Check with your
utility representative for details.
s
Rebates have been the most
common form of utility
incentives during the last
several years.
Direct Utility Assistance

• The utility pays some or all of
the lighting improvement cost
directly to an installing
contractor selected by the
customer.

• Alternately, the utility provides
lighting upgrade products or
services to the customer through
utility personnel or contractors
selected by the utility.
Low Interest Loans

Some utilities offer low-interest
financing for energy conservation
projects. Loan payments may be
added to your utility bills.
NATIONAL
ACCOUNT
AGREEMENTS
National account agreements (also
called national purchasing
agreements) are negotiated
relationships between suppliers and
nationwide buyers of products and
services. These agreements pro-
vide the following benefits.

• streamline coordination of
lighting equipment purchases

• guarantee the availability of
selected technology

• ensure competitive prices
• allow for multi-location shipping
direct from the manufacturer

• standardize installation and
maintenance of the lighting
equipment

• provide added support services

National accounts can help Green
Lights Partners and Allies by
simplifying the lighting upgrade
procurement process.
Steps You Should Take

The choice of whether to write
national account agreements is
yours. However, to be legally
binding, the agreements are written
and signed by both parties. You can
issue an RFP to solicit bids on a
national account. The following
section describes the how Green
Lights Partners and Allies can take
advantage of national account
purchasing.

Green Lights Partners

Green Lights Partners interested in
exploring national account
opportunities should take the
following steps.

«• Find out their current quantity
and price for lamps, fixtures,
and services purchased.

^ Plan and aggregate company-
wide purchases to gain the
maximum discount and benefits.

f Reduce the diversity of fixtures
(i.e., increase the purchase
quantities per fixture type) to
further maximize national
account savings.

«• Identify which products will be
specified for purchase and if
substitutes will be accepted.
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 1
OVERVIEW OF FINANCING OPTIONS

Initial
Payment
Periodic
Payments
Payment
Source
Performance
Risk
Contract
Termination
Options**

Ownership .

Tax
Deductions***

Cash
Purchase
1 00% of
project cost
none

capital

owner
100%*
N/A

building
owner
depreciation

Conventional
Financing
0-30% of
project cost
fixed

capital

owner 100%*
principal payoff

building owner

depreciation
and interest

Capital
Lease
$0 or deposit
fixed

capital

owner 1 00%*
principal
payoff

building
owner
depreciation
and interest

Shared
Savings
$0
% of energy
cost savings
operations

investor
100%
fair market
value buyout,
renew, or
return
investor

shared
savings
payments
Owner's risk may be reduced with guaranteed savings insurance.
At end of term
Subject to change in tax laws. Consult with tax advisor regarding eligibility.
Determine projected annual
purchasing volume.

Contact the appropriate
manufacturers to ask about
establishing a national account.

Issue an RFP, if neces'sary, to
solicit bids from interested lamp,
ballast, fixture, and service
companies for products and
services to be included in a
national account agreement.
Green Lights Allies

Green Lights Allies interested in
establishing national accounts
should take the following steps.

<*" Develop promotional and
educational materials on
national accounts for distribution
to Partners.

«• Designate national account
managers to serve as the single
point of contact between the Ally
and Partner.
Develop competitive national
account price lists and work
with their distributors to
ensure uniformity.

Monitor RFPs for national
accounts.

Develop competitive bids.
OVERVIEW OF
FINANCING
OPTIONS
Financing organizations can
provide the needed capital for
implementing a lighting upgrade.
They reduce or eliminate your
upfront project expenditures and
enable you to distribute these
costs overtime. Often, the
periodic energy cost savings
exceed the periodic financing
payments, resulting in positive
cash flow immediately. Besides
providing capital, several
organizations offer the expertise
to design and install the upgrades
while assuming some or all of the
performance risk.

There are many variations of
financing options available to
Green Lights Partners. This
section outlines the common
attributes of these financing
options. However, specific terms
and conditions vary among financing
entities. Additionally, tax laws are
frequently revised and sometimes
difficult to interpret; check with your
tax and financial analysts to identify
"bottom-line impacts" before
entering into an agreement with a
financing company.

To obtain information on companies
that provide these financing options,
please refer to the computerized
Green Lights Financing Directory.
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Exhibit 1 describes the various
financing options available for
lighting upgrades. Other financing
options may be applicable to
projects involving cogeneration or
thermal storage systems; however,
these financing options are beyond
the scope of the Lighting Upgrade
Manual.

Lease Purchase
You can use two basic types of
leases for financing energy
efficiency improvements. These are
capital leases and operating leases.

Capital leases are installment
purchases. Little or no initial capital
outlay is required to purchase the
equipment. You are considered the
owner of the equipment and may
take deductions for depreciation and
for the interest portion of payments
to the lessor. Similar to
conventional loans, capital leasing is
"on-balance-sheet" financing,
meaning that the transaction will be
recorded on your balance sheet as
both a liability and an asset. Capital
leases are offered by banks, leasing
companies, installation contractors,
suppliers, and some electric utilities.

Under an operating lease, the lessor
owns the equipment that is, in effect,
"rented" (leased) to you for a
monthly fee during the contract
period. Because the lessor is
considered the owner of the energy-
efficient equipment, he claims the
tax benefits associated with the
depreciation of the equipment. At
the end of the contract term, you
have several options. You can
purchase the equipment at fair
market value (or at a predetermined
amount). You can also renegotiate
the lease or have the equipment
removed.

Many lighting upgrades will not
qualify for an operating lease based
on the criteria defined by the
Financial Accounting Standards
Board (FASB) Statement No. 13.
These criteria disallow automatic
ownership transfer and bargain
purchase options, and set the
maximum lease term at 75% of
economic life. They also limit the
present value of rental payments
(plus any residual value guarantee)
to less than 90% of fair value of the
leased equipment.

Shared Savings

Shared savings is a unique and
complex financing method whose
primary benefit to Partners is
reducing the risk of the lighting
upgrade investment. This financing
option is typically used to procure
building-wide upgrades of HVAC,
hot water, and lighting systems. The
key features of the shared savings
approach follow.

•»• No Down Payment. The entire
cost of the upgrade is paid for by
the third-party financing source.

^ Third-Party Ownership. The
third party investor provides the
capital for the project and owns
the improvements during the
term of the agreement. Asa
result, the financing obligation
does not appear on your balance
sheet. At the end of the contract
term, you have several options.
You can purchase the
improvements at an agreed-
upon value, or renegotiate the
contract terms. You can also
cancel the agreement, allowing
the investor to recover the
equipment.

<*" Performance-Based Payments.
Periodic "energy service"
payments are variable and
based on the measured or
calculated energy cost savings
attributed to the upgrades.
These payments will typically be
made from your operating
budget (not your capital budget).
You pay part of this cost savings
back to the investor according to
the ratios outlined in the
contract. The energy services
contractor takes responsibility
for maintaining the system to
ensure energy savings.

Positive Cash Flow. The
resulting cash flow is always
positive, because you do not
make a down payment and you
pay periodically from realized
savings.

No Performance Risk. The risk
of the investment is shifted to
the third party, because the
third-party investor only gets
paid in proportion to the financial
performance of the upgrade.
You should carefully evaluate
the total costs associated with
reducing risk through shared
savings.
Guaranteed Savings
Insurance
Guaranteed savings insurance, may
be applied to the following types of
financing approaches.

* cash purchase
+ conventional financing
* lease purchase

This savings option guarantees that
energy cost savings will exceed an
established minimum dollar value.
Typically, this guaranteed minimum
equals the financing payment value
for the same period to ensure a
positive cash flow during the
financing term.

Reaching a guaranteed savings
agreement is like buying an
insurance policy. You will pay an
indirect insurance premium, which
compensates the guarantor.
Compensation is appropriate,
because the guarantor assumes
some performance risk and costs
associated with ensuring guaranteed
performance (such as maintenance
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 2
Representative Cash Flow Diagrams

CASH PURCHASE
/ash Flow
NET CASH FLOW
456
Years
10
CONVENTIONAL FINANCING
Cash Flow
NET CASH FLOW
10
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Cash Flow
EXHIBIT 2 (cont'd)
Representative Cash Flow Diagrams
CAPITAL LEASE
(with optional guaranteed savings)
NET CASH FLOW
with guarantee
~ without guarantee
Guaranteed Savings Payout
(when savings are below guarantee)
Energy Cos
Savings
i ••
Note: Rebates, if available, would be
payable to lessee (building owner).
Guaranteed Savings "Insurance" Premiums
4 5
Years
10
Cash Flow
SHARED SAVINGS
NET CASH FLOW
Buyout at
Fair Market Value
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
and monitoring costs). When
combined with conventional or lease
financing, this premium can be
added to the monthly payment or
paid directly to the guarantor. The
supplier, installer, or energy service
company selling the upgrade usually
provides this guarantee.

Cash Flow

The representative cash flow
diagrams on the previous pages
illustrate how financing options can
produce positive cash flow. If
rebates are offered, they are usually
paid to the owner of the lighting
upgrades. Providers of shared
savings financing may factor in the
rebates when determining financing
terms.
CHOOSING A
FINANCING OPTION
With so many options available to
finance lighting upgrades, how will
you decide which method would be
most advantageous? To arrive at an
answer, you must consider the
following factors.

rtr cost of capital
<*• eligibility for utility incentives
:3~ perceived risk
<*• impact on balance sheet
•-*• flexibility
Cost of Capital

In any economic study, the cost of
capital must be considered. The
capital cost factor most commonly
applied in financial analysis is the
present value discount rate. The
discount rate is simply the
corporation's minimum required rate
of return on invested capital. Green
Lights Partners may choose a 20%
Internal Rate of Return(IRR) to
calculate their discount rate. Most
corporations have a specific
discount rate for financial analyses.

A simple relationship exists between
the cost of capital and the
attractiveness of third-party
financing. The higher the cost of
capital (i.e., higher discount rate),
the more attractive third-party
financing becomes. Suppose you
perform a net present value (NPV)
analysis of the 20-year cash flows
resulting from your proposed
financing alternatives. The option
with the highest NPV would be the
most attractive financing alternative
for your corporation, based on your
cost of capital.
Eligibility for Utility
Incentives

Before entering into a shared
savings financing agreement, check
with your local utility to find out who
is eligible to receive the incentives
— the Partner or the investor. If the
third-party investor is to receive the
incentive, then you should negotiate
reduced payments that consider the
value of the utility incentives paid to
the financing entity.
Perceived Risk

Compared to other investments,
lighting upgrades are low-risk
investments. Nevertheless, returns
on lighting investments are
dependent on such external factors
as electricity rates, building
occupancy, and usage factors. To
reduce the risks associated with
these variables, your financial officer
may choose to pay additional
premiums for a savings guarantee or
enter into a shared savings
agreement. In any case, the risks
associated with achieving reduced
lighting loads are small; you can
easily measure actual load
reductions in the field (refer to
Lighting Evaluations).
Impact on Balance
Sheet
With conventional loans or capital
leases, the transaction is recorded
on the company's balance sheet as
both an asset and a liability. For
companies that cannot incur
additional liabilities, or are
concerned about impacts on their
return on assets, the shared savings
approach should be considered.
Flexibility

Whatever your financing approach,
verify that you will not incur
penalties by prepayment or early
buy-out of the financing liability. For
shared savings agreements, be sure
that provisions exist for purchasing
the equipment at fair market value
before the end of the contract term.
Besides these contract cancellation
options, also look for financing
sources that can adapt the financing
agreement to include future
purchases of energy-efficient
equipment.
GREEN LIGHTS
FINANCING
DIRECTORY

The computerized Green Lights
Financing Directory provides
information on both utility incentives
and non-utility financing options.
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
8
This database is updated regularly
and can be downloaded from the
Green Lights Electronic Bulletin
Board (modem: 202-775-6671).
Utility Incentives

To quickly identify rebates or other
utility incentives that may apply to
your lighting upgrade, select the
Utility Financing choice on the main
menu. When you select your utility
from the menu, the program will
display the specific incentive levels,
eligibility criteria, and contact
information. You may choose to
print out the retrieved data for future
reference.

For each utility program, the data is
displayed as follows.

» utility name
* program name
» incentive type (rebate, loan)
» sectors (eligible customer
groups)
» situation (retrofit, new
construction, outdoor)
* contact information
* program details

You can also search the database by
technology. For example, you could
create a list of all incentive
programs that address T8
fluorescent lamps, and assess which
program offers the highest rebate.
Non-Utility Financing
Sources
By selecting Financing Products
from the menu, you have access to
a database of organizations that can
provide project financing. Note that
each organization may have
minimum requirements for project
size and client gross revenue. In
addition, maximum contract terms
and loan amounts are specified for
each organization.
* For each financing organization,
the data is displayed as follows.

» name, address, contact name,
phone number
* type of organization

« each financing product offered:
equipment covered, term,
markets, census regions

» sources of capital

» eligibility criteria
FINANCIAL

ANALYSIS

Financial profitability is vital to your
success. Many methods exist to
measure the profitability of a lighting
upgrade. This section addresses
three: simple payback, internal rate
of return (IRR), and net present
value (NPV). This discussion also
includes a brief overview of cash
flow analysis, which is part of
calculating both IRR and NPV.

A simple example will be the basis
of this discussion. Suppose you
have two upgrade options for a
building. Each option is assumed to
have a useful lifetime of 10 years,
after which it must be replaced.
Cash flows and profitability
measures are presented below in
Exhibit 3.

If you were to choose between these
two options based on simple
payback or IRR, Option A would win
easily. If you look instead at NPV,
Option B seems the superior choice.
What's going on? Which measure
leads you to the best decision?

As the rest of this section will
explain, NPV is the best measure to
use when comparing or prioritizing
upgrade options. IRR is a valid tool
as well, but only for assessing
whether an individual option is
profitable (yes or no), not for
comparing two options. Simple
payback is not as useful as IRR or
Simple = Initial Project Cost
Payback Annual Net Savings
NPV, for reasons that will be
explained below.

Simple Payback

Simple payback calculations reveal
the number of years it takes a
savings-generating project to recoup
the initial investment. To calculate
simple payback, divide the initial
project cost by its annual net
savings.

Using the information in Exhibit 3
(on the next page), you can
calculate simple payback for each
option. Based on simple payback
alone, Option A would be the
preferred upgrade, since it has a
shorter payback.

Upgrade Option A Payback

* $100,000/$40,000 = 2.5 yrs

Upgrade Option B Payback

* $400,000/$100,000 = 4 yrs

Simple payback is widely used in the
energy management industry. It is
easy to understand, and does not
require detailed calculations or cash
flow projections. Additionally, it is
an inherently conservative way to
evaluate energy upgrades.

Drawbacks of Simple
Payback Method

Simple payback has two serious
drawbacks that limit its usefulness.
First, it does not consider savings
that occur after the payback
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 3
COMPARING TWO LIGHTING UPGRADE OPTIONS
USING DIFFERENT PROFITABILITY MEASURES
Year
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cumulative Savings
Over Ten Years
Simple Payback
IRR
NPV
Upgrade
Initial Cost
$100,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Option A
Savings
Generated
0
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$40,000
$400,000
2.5 years
0.39
$126,000
Upgrade
Initial Cost
$400,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Option B
Savings
Generated
0
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$1,000,000
4 years
0.21
$165,022
point, and thus provides only a
limited view of a project's lifetime
profitability. Looking at the
example, Option B generates more
profit over its lifetime than Option A,
despite Option A's shorter payback.
Exhibit 4 makes this difference even
clearer. Payback does not
completely describe project
profitability.

Simple payback's second drawback
is that it does not take into
account the time value of money.
In a world of interest rates, people
universally value money received
today more highly than the same
money received ten years from now.
Properly comparing and choosing
between long-lived upgrade options
requires a decision-making tool that
incorporates the time value of
money. Discounted payback
measures have been developed to
address this drawback. While
preferable to simple payback, they
still suffer from the first drawback
described above.
Cash Flow Analysis

Two profitability measures avoid the
flaws associated with simple
payback: IRR and NPV. Before
discussing these, a brief overview of
cash flow analysis follows. This
analysis is the basis for calculating
IRR and NPV.

No matter which profitability
measure you choose to assess
lighting upgrade projects, a year-by-
year cash flow analysis should be
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10
part of your assessment. Although it
requires more time and effort than a
simple payback approach, cash flow
analysis provides financial insights
into proposed upgrades that you
cannot afford to miss. When
supplemented with IRR or NPV, this
analysis shows you the whole
picture concerning profitability.

To do a cash flow analysis, construct
a table or spreadsheet, similar to
Exhibit 3. EPA recommends a
twenty-year analysis period for
lighting upgrade projects. Fill the
table with your best estimates for
each type of cash flow, for each year
of a project's lifetime.

Remember to include labor and
materials in the maintenance cash
flows; and consider including
inflation factors where appropriate. If
you have not done a cash flow
analysis before, do not make precise
estimates at this stage. Concentrate
on identifying each type of cash flow
affected by the upgrade, and
entering quick best-estimates for,
each category. You can refine the
analysis later.

For simplicity, one cash flow
element not shown here is tax
effects. Lighting upgrades generally
affect your organization's income tax
bill in several ways: by increasing
depreciation, by decreasing energy
and maintenance expenses, and if
debt financing is used, by increasing
the interest deduction. If you are not
familiar with these tax effects, you
can omit them from your cash flow
analysis as long as you keep in mind
that the results will be expressed in
pre-tax terms.

This series of yearly net cash flows
will reveal much about the project's
financial attractiveness without
further analysis. However, to obtain
a single profitability measure or to
compare two projects easily, you will
need ti calculate IRR or NPV. In
addition, you must calculate IRR for
Green Lights reporting.
Internal Rate of Return

IRR is a profitability measure,
expressed in percentage terms, that
is analogous to an average annual
rate of return from an investment.
Technically, IRR represents the
discount rate that equates, or
balances, the present value of a
project's estimated positive and
negative cash flows generated over
its lifetime. In simpler terms, IRR
shows the annual rate of return a
project generates. Keep in mind
that IRR is not quite the same as a
simple ROI (return on investment)
measure.

IRR calculations avoid the two
primary drawbacks of the simple
payback method: blindness to
savings occurring after the payback
point and not taking account of the
time value of money. Since IRR is
based on net cash flows calculated
over the full lifetime of the upgrade,
it provides a complete picture of the
upgrade's profits. IRR also discounts
future cash flows, incorporating the
time value of money and avoiding
overvaluing cash flows.

IRR is,the measure EPA has chosen
as the basis for the Green Lights
profitability test. It is simple to
calculate with a financial calculator
or spreadsheet program. The Green
Lights Decision Support System
(GL/DSS) also calculates IRR. The
GL/DSS constructs and analyzes
cash flow tables based on your
existing and proposed analysis
assumptions.

To calculate IRR using one of these
tools, you need yearly estimated
cash flow changes generated by the
upgrade over its lifetime (Exhibit 3).
As described above, IRR is superior
to payback measures. Additionally,
it is familiar to the business
community and independent of
project size (unlike NPV).

Green Lights Profitability
Test

If a project's IRR is greater than the
firm's cost of capital for lighting
upgrades, then the project is worth
doing. For Green Lights projects,
EPA recommends using an IRR of
20% as the cost of capital, because
of the low risk of lighting upgrade
projects.
Net Present Value

Though less familiar to many in the
lighting industry than simple
payback, NPV is the most powerful
EXHIBIT 4
Why Payback Isn't Enough
$600,000

500,000

400,000

300,000

200.000

100,000

-100,000

-200,000

-300,000

-400,000
$600,000
$300,000
10
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11
Calculating IRR and NPV Using Spreadsheets

A variety of spreadsheet programs calculate IRR and NPV using @ functions. The
formulae for three of these programs are identified below, For lighting upgrade
calculations, the rate used in each formula is the discount rate, and the
range/block/values used are expected cash flows. When calculating IRR, you must
have at least one negative value (representing the initial investment). For all three
formulae, guess represents your best estimate of the IRR, If your estimate is not
within an acceptable range, you will receive an error message.

* Lotus 1-2-3™
IRR = @IRR(guess, range)
NPV = @NPV(interest, range)
Excel™

IRR = @IRR(values, guess)
NPV = @NPV(rate, values)

Quattro Pro™

IRR = @IRR(guess, block)
NPV = @NPV(rate, block)
tool for assessing profitability. NPV
represents the total net cash flows a
project generates over its lifetime
(including first costs), with
discounting applied to cash flows
that occur in the future. NPV shows
you what a project's lifetime cash
flows are worth today. In other
words, it identifies the sum of money
you would have to invest today to
generate the project's cash flows
over its lifetime.

To calculate NPV, you need yearly
estimated net cash flows for the
upgrade (Exhibit 3) and the
appropriate discount rate to be
applied to future cash flows. Most
firms use their average cost of
capital as the discount rate. For
Green Lights upgrades, using twenty
percent as the discount rate will
keep your results consistent with the
IRR-based Green Lights profitability
criterion.
If a project's cash flow yields an
NPV greater than zero (and a
discount rate of twenty percent is
used), then the project meets the
Green Lights profitability
criterion.

Once you have estimated year-by-
year net cash f ,vs and have
selected the discount rate, you can
use a financial calculator or a PC-
based spreadsheet program to easily
calculate NPV. With either
approach, the mechanics of
calculating NPV are simple.

If you have accurately estimated
cash flows and selected the
appropriate discount rate, all
projects with a positive NPV are
profitable for your organization, and
worth doing. If you haye several
projects competing for funding, or
more than one upgrade option for a
particular facility, choose the
alternative with the highest NPV, not
the highest IRR.

For Green Lights projects, EPA asks
that you use the Green Lights
profitability criterion first to
determine which projects are
profitable. Once you have identified
the profitable projects using IRR,
NPV is the best tool to prioritize the
projects, and also to choose among
competing options for a particular
building. As illustrated in Exhibit 3,
IRR and NPV can yield conflicting
results when used to compare
projects or options.

Remember not to use IRR for
comparing or prioritizing
projects, but only to decide
whether an individual project is
profitable and worth doing. Use
NPV for prioritizing and
comparing; it yields consistently
valid results.
ECONOMICS OF
MAXIMIZING
ENERGY SAVINGS

This section examines the tradeoff
between maximizing energy savings
and maximizing profits. The primary
goal of Green Lights is to maximize
profitable energy savings in each
facility. So, you should be aware
that a simple profit-maximization
approach does not always maximize
energy savings.

Exhibit 5 illustrates the difference
between maximizing profits and
maximizing energy savings for a
typical, hypothetical space where
several lighting upgrade options
exist. As measured by NPV, the
options that maximize profitability
are D and E; while the options that
maximize energy savings are F and
G. Green Lights requires that you
consider the entire range of energy-
saving upgrade technologies
suitable for the space and tasks.
Then, you choose the option, or
combination of technologies, that
achieves the greatest energy
savings while still being profitable. In
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
12
Exhibit 5, options F and G achieve
the greatest energy savings, but
they are not profitable (NPV < 0).
Option E, which achieves the
greatest energy savings of the
profitable options, should be
implemented because it meets the
requirements of the Green Lights
Memorandum of Understanding
(MOU).

The Green Lights MOU requires that
participants estimate the profitability
of each upgrade option for a space.
You must select the option that
yields the highest energy savings
while also yielding an IRR of twenty
percent or higher. The Green Lights
Decision Support System (GL/DSS)
simplifies the upgrade process by
automatically performing the
following tasks: identifying each up-
grade option, calculating energy
savings and profitability for each,
and identifying the option that
maximizes savings while passing
the Profitability Test. For more
information on the GL/DSS, see The
Lighting Survey in the Lighting
Upgrade Manual.
EXHIBIT 5
Economics of Maximizing Savings
Energy
Savings

NPV
("Prime+slx
discount
rate)
B
Investment $
A - Delamp center lamp only
B - Delamp; install hybrid
ballasts
C - Delamp; install electronic
ballasts
D - Delamp; install T8 lamps,
partial-output electronic
ballasts, and task lights
E - System D with wall-mounted
occupancy sensor
F - System E with lumen
maintenance control
G - System F with higher-cost
components
Base system:
- 4 luminaires
- 3 lamps/fixture
- standard ballasts
- 40W lamps
- manual switch
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
NOTES:
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
14
NOTES:
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
NOTES:
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Green Lights Information Hotline
(for program, technical, and software support)

S (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
Financial Considerations is one of a series of
documents known collectively as the Lighting'Upgrade
Manual. <

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
f Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
* Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202) 775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
// //
ml Green
~n*~. T * 1 i
Financial Considerations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Disposal
-------
US EPA
GREEN LIGHTS PROGRAM
LIGHTING
WASTE
DISPOSAL
[All oreen
Lights
Upgrading a lighting system will likely involve the
removal and disposal of lamps and ballasts. Some of
this waste may be hazardous, and you must manage it
accordingly. This document provides an overview of
issues relating to the disposal of lamps and ballasts.
F^r project-specific assistance, please refer to the
information resources provided at the end of this
document.
DISPOSAL OF PCB-
CONTAINING BALLASTS
ACTION CHECKLIST
v' Investigate and follow state and local
requirements for handling and disposing of
ballasts.

^ Identify ballasts that contain PCBs and ballasts
that are leaking PCBs.

^ Remove, handle, and dispose of leaking PCB-
containing ballasts by high-temperature
incineration.

•S Green Lights recommends disposing of non-
leaking PCB-containing ballasts in an
environmentally responsible manner, such as by
high-temperature incineration, recycling, or
chemical or hazardous waste landfill.

^ Maintain permanent records of PCB-containing
ballast disposal.
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLISTS 1

PCB-CONTAINING BALLASTS 2

MERCURY-CONTAINING LAMPS 6

EVALUATING DISPOSAL OPTIONS 10

WORKING WITH CONTRACTORS 11

DEFINITIONS 11

INFORMATION RESOURCES 12
DISPOSAL OF MERCURY-
CONTAINING LAMPS
ACTION CHECKLIST
•/ Investigate and follow state and local
requirements for handling and disposing of lamps.
If you have not tested your mercury-containing
lamp wastes to show that they are not hazardous,
then assume, they are hazardous and dispose of
them as hazardous waste.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
S Mercury-containing lamps that
test hazardous must be handled
in compliance with hazardous
waste regulations.

s Maintain permanent records of
mercury-containing lamps that
are disposed as hazardous
waste.

Note: The information in this
document is believed to be correct as of
December 1993. EPA does not provide
legal advice, nor does this document.
Generators of lighting wastes should
check with local, state and regional
authorities for the most up-to-date
information.
PCB-
CONTAINING
BALLASTS
The primary concern regarding the
disposal of used fluorescent ballasts
is the health risk associated with
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
Human exposure to these possible
carcinogens can cause skin, liver,
and reproductive disorders.
Fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) ballasts contain a
small capacitor that may contain
high concentrations of PCBs
(greater than 90% pure PCBs or
900,000 ppm). These chemical
compounds were widely used as
insulators in electrical equipment
such as caoacitors, switches, and
voltage regulators through the late
1970s.

The Toxic Substances Control Act
(TSCA) was enacted in 1976, and
subsequently banned the production
of PCBs in the United States. The
specific regulations governing the
use and disposal of PCBs are found
in Volume 40 Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Part 761.
PrebaOly do«* not
CDOUinPCBl
Umittenmd
MW197I
The proper method for disposing
used ballasts depends on several
factors, such as the type and
condition of the ballasts and the
regulations or recommendations in
effect in the state(s) where you
remove or discard them. TSCA
specifies the disposal method for
ballasts that are leaking PCBs. In
addition, generators of PCB-
containing ballast wastes may be
subject to notification and liability
provisions under the Comprehensive
Environmental Response,
Compensation and Liability Act of
1980 (CERCLA) — also known as
"Superfund." To select the
appropriate disposal method for
PCB-containing ballasts, refer to the
decision flow chart on the following
page.

Because disposal requirements vary
from state to state, check with
regional, state, or local authorities
for all applicable regulations in your
area. For your convenience,
information resources are listed at
the end of this document.
Identifying PCB
Ballasts
Use the following guidelines to
identify ballasts that contain PCBs.

• All ballasts manufactured
through 1979 contain PCBs.
• Ballasts manufactured after
1979 that do not contain PCBs
are labeled "No PCBs."

• If a ballast is not labeled "No
PCBs," assume it contains
PCBs.

It is extremely important to find out if
a ballast containing PCBs is leaking
before you remove it from the fixture,
so that you can handle it properly.
Federal
Requirements

Non-Leaking PCB Ballast
Disposal

TSCA regulates ballasts that contain
PCBs (40 CFR 761.60(b)(2)(ii)).
Under TSCA, intact fluorescent and
HID ballasts that are not leaking
PCBs may be disposed in a
municipal solid waste landfill. EPA
recommends packing and sealing
the intact ballasts in 55 gallon
drums. Green Lights also
encourages its participants to
dispose of PCB-containing ballast
wastes responsibly, and
recommends high-temperature
incineration, recycling, or a chemical
or hazardous waste landfill.

In addition, CERCLA regulates the
disposal of non-leaking PCB-
containing ballasts. CERCLA
requires building owners and waste
generators to notify the National
Response Center at (800) 424-8802.
They must notify when disposing a
pound or more of PCBs (roughly
equivalent to 12-16 fluorescent
ballasts) in a 24-hour period.

As a generator of PCB-containing
ballast wastes, you could be liable in
any subsequent Superfund cleanup
at a municipal, hazardous, or chemi-
cal land disposal site, incinerator, or
recycling facility.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
NO
YES
Send ballast to
high-temperature
incinerator
Does ballast
contain PCBs?
No special
disposal
procedures
required
Is the
ballast
leaking?
Do
state/local
disposal
regulations
exist?
Adopt voluntary
safe, responsible
disposal practices?
Dispose of ballast
according to
state/local
regulations or
policies
Send ballast to
high temperature
Incinerator, chemical
or hazardous
waste landfill, or
ballast recycler
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
EPA encouraged proper disposal of
PCB-containing ballasts in the
preamble to the 1979 PCB Ban Rule
(44 FR 31514) and in the preamble
to the final rule on August 25, 1982
(47 FR 37342).

"The EPA encourages commercial
and industrial firms that use and
dispose of large quantities of
small PCB capacitors to establish
voluntarily a collection and
disposal program that would
result in the waste capacitors
going to chemical or hazardous
waste landfills or high-
temperature incinerators."

Leaking PCB Ballast
Disposal

A puncture or other damage to
ballasts in a lighting system exposes
an oily tar-like substance. If this
substance contains PCBs, the
ballast and all materials it contacts
are considered PCB waste, and are
subject to TSCA requirements.
Leaking PCB-containing ballasts
must be incinerated at an EPA-
approved high-temperature
incinerator. (See last section for a
list of incinerators).

It is very important that you remove,
handle, and dispose PCB-containing
ballasts properly. Take precautions
to prevent exposure of the leaking
ballast, since all materials that
contact the ballast or the leaking
substance are also PCB waste.
Use trained personnel or contractors
to handle and dispose leaking PCB-
containing ballasts.

For proper packing, storage,
transportation, and disposal
information call the TSCA
assistance information hotline at
(202) 554-1404.
State Requirements

Non-Leaking PCB Ballast
Disposal

Many states have developed
regulations governing the disposal of
non-leaking PCB-containing ballasts
that are more stringent than Federa.
regulations. In addition, some EPA
Regional offices published policies
specifying ballast disposal methods
adopted by individual states.

State standards can take several
forms (e.g., written regulations,
regional policies, written and verbal
recommendations, transportation
documentation). Some states do not
regulate PCB-containing ballasts as
toxic waste, but prohibit their
disposal in municipal solid waste
landfills. The table on the next page
provides a listing of state regulations
and recommendations. The last
section of this document lists solid
and hazardous waste agencies for
states and EPA Regions.

All generators of PCB-containing
ballasts should thoroughly
investigate their state's regulations
and follow local requirements.

Green Lights recommends three
methods for disposing of non-leaking
PCB-containing ballasts: high-
temperature incineration, recycling,
and chemical or hazardous waste
landfill.

When upgrading lighting, make sure
your contractor removes all
disconnected PCB-containing
ballasts from the lighting fixtures.
Non-leaking PCB-containing ballasts
may still be hazardous if left in
upgraded fixtures, especially in case
of fire.

High- Temperature
Incineration

High-temperature incineration is the
method preferred by many
companies because it destroys
PCBs, removing them from the
waste stream permanently and
removing the potential for future
CERQLA liability. Incinerating a
PCB-containing ballast costs more
than sending it to a hazardous waste
landfill, but this additional cost is one
many organizations are willing to
absorb.

Recycling Ballasts

Recyclers remove the PCB-
containing materials (i.e., the
capacitor and possibly the asphalt
potting material surrounding the
capacitor) for incineration or land
disposal. Metals, such as copper
and steel, can be reclaimed from the
ballasts for use in manufacturing
other products. You may recycle
used non-leaking ballasts despite
PCBs. The last section of this
document contains a list of
companies that recycle ballasts.

Chemical or Hazardous Waste
Landfill

PCB-containing ballasts may also be
disposed in a chemical or hazardous
waste landfill. Landfill disposal is
less expensive than high-
temperature incineration or
recycling, but does not eliminate
PCBs from the waste stream
permanently. While chemical or
hazardous waste landfill disposal is
an acceptable, regulated disposal
method, your organization may be
legitimately concerned about
potential future CERCLA liability
using this method.
Packing PCB Ballasts
for Disposal

Despite the disposal method
selected, ballasts are packed —
according to PCB regulations — in
55-gallon drums for transportation.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
'*•• One drum holds 150 to 300
ballasts depending on how
tightly the ballasts are packed.

tsr Fill void space with an absorbent
packing material for safety
reasons.
Label drums according to
Department of Transportation
regulations.

Note that tightly packed drums
may weigh more than 1,000
pounds, which may present a
safety risk, particularly when
STATE REGULATIONS REGARDING BALLAST DISPOSAL
State
AL
AR
AZ
CA
CT
FL
GA
IL
IN
KY
LA
MA
MD
ME
Ml
MN
MS
NJ
NM
OR
PA
Rl
SC
TN
VA
VT
WA
Wl
WV
Wash.,
DC
Comments
In-state landfill requires prior approval.
Regulates transportation of PCBs > 50 ppm.
Send to municipal landfill if packed in approved drums.
PCBs > 50 ppm are hazardous waste and must be placed in lab packs and
disposed in hazardous waste landfill or incinerated.
PCB ballasts must be incinerated or sent to a chemical waste landfill.
Follow EPA Region 4 Policy, which recommends chemical waste landfill.
Check with local landfill and see if it will accept the waste.
All PCB-containing ballasts meet definition of special waste (35 IAC).
Disposing > 25 small capacitors of ballasts/day requires approval.
Solid waste PCB greater than or equal to 1 ppm cannot be placed on the land;
waste containing PCB less than 50 ppm can be placed in a contained landfill.
Residual landfills may dispose of PCBs according to their permits.
PCBs > 50 ppm considered hazardous waste.
Policy on disposal and handling more stringent than Federal legislation.
Based on entire weight of ballast. Average limit is 1 -2 ballasts.
Regulates PCBs > 50 ppm as hazardous waste.
Prohibits PCB disposal in Michigan landfills with no small quantity exemptions.
Regulates all PCBs > 50 ppm as hazardous waste.
PCBs > 25 ppm must be disposed of in hazardous waste landfill.
PCBs > 50 ppm are hazardous waste, unless meet certain conditions.
Follow EPA Region 6 policy.
Follow EPA Region 1 0 policy (>5 ballasts/year must be incinerated or sent to
chemical waste landfill.)
If PCBs > 50 ppm, then waste is regulated by DER.
Regulates PCBs > 50 ppm as hazardous waste.
In-State disposal requires prior approval.
In-State disposal requires prior approval.
Regulates PCB-containing materials as Special Solid Waste. PCBs > 50 ppm
may not be disposed or stored without EPA approval. PCBs between 1 and 50
ppm restricted to disposal in sanitary landfills or industrial waste landfills.
Regulates all PCBs > 50 ppm as hazardous waste.
Follow EPA Region 10 policy (>5 ballasts/yr must be incinerated or sent to
chemical waste landfill.)
Regulates all PCBs > 50 ppm as PCB waste.
Follow EPA Region 3 policy.
Recommends incineration or chemical waste landfill.
moving the drum for loading or
unloading.
PCB Ballast Disposal
Costs

High-temperature incineration and
chemical or hazardous waste landfill
costs can vary considerably.
Disposal prices vary according to
the following.

X quantity of waste generated

X location of removal site

X proximity to an EPA-approved
high-temperature incinerator or
chemical or hazardous waste
landfill

X state and local taxes

When shopping for ballast disposal
serviges, request cost estimates in
terms of both pounds and number of
ballasts. Typical F40 ballasts weigh
about 3.5 Ibs., and F96 ballasts
weigh about 8 Ibs. Negotiate with
hazardous waste brokers,
transporters, waste management
companies, and disposal sites to
obtain the lowest fees.

High- Temperature
Incineration Costs

Incineration costs are calculated by
weight.

* Costs range from $0.55/lb. to
$2.10/lb.

* Average cost is $1.50/lb., which
equals approximately $5.25 per
ballast.

Note: Estimated costs do not
include packaging, transportation, or
profile fees.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
Recycling Costs

When recyclers remove the PCB-
containing capacitor, the volume
and weight of the ballast are
reduced. This change results in
lower packing, transportation, and
incineration or disposal costs.

Recycling costs are calculated by
weight.

* Costs range from $0.75/lb. to
$1.75/lb.

* Average cost is $1.00/lb., which
equals approximately $3.50 per
ballast.

Note: Recycling cost can range
from C1.25 per ballast (if the PCB
wastes are sent to a chemical or
hazardous waste landfill) to
approximately $3.50 per ballast (if
the PCB wastes are high-
temperature incinerated). Estimated
costs do not include packaging,
transportation, or profile fees.

Chemical or Hazardous
Waste Landfill Costs

Chemical or hazardous waste landfill
costs are calculated per 55-gallon
drum.

* Costs range from $65/drum to
$165/drum.

* Average cost is $1007drum,
which equals approximately
$0.50/ballast

Note. Estimated costs do not
include packaging, transportation, or
profile fees.

Transportation Costs

Transportation fees are calculated
as cents per pound per mile. They
vary according to (1) the number of
drums removed from the site, and
(2) the distance from your location to
the location of the high-temperature
incinerator, chemical or hazardous
waste landfill, or recycler.

Transporters may need to be
registered or licensed to move
hazardous wastes in certain states.
Documentation of the movement of
hazardous waste may be required
even if a state does not regulate
disposal or require the use of a
licensed transporter.

Profile Fees

Operators of the high-temperature
incinerator or chemical or hazardous
waste landfill may charge a profile
fee to document incoming
hazardous waste. Profile fees vary
depending on the volume of waste
materials generated.

* Profile fees range from $0 to
$300 per delivery.

* Fees may be waived if a certain
volume or frequency of
deliveries is assured or a
working relationship has been
established with a waste
management broker, lighting
management company, or other
contractor.
Record Keeping

To track transported TSCA or
hazardous waste, EPA requires
generators to prepare a Uniform
Hazardous Waste Manifest. The
hazardous waste landfill, incinerator,
or recycler that you use can provide
this one-page form. The manifest
identifies the type and quantity of
waste, the generator, the
transporter, and its ultimate
destination.

The manifest must accompany the
waste wherever it travels. Each
handler of the waste must sign the
manifest and keep one copy. When
the waste reaches its destination,
the owner of that facility returns a
copy of the manifest to the generator
to confirm that the waste arrived. If
the waste does not arrive as
scheduled, generators must
immediately notify EPA or the
authorized state environmental
agency (see the last section), so that
they can investigate and act
appropriately.

In addition, require your contractor
to provide you with documents
verifying the disposal method,
whether the PCBs are incinerated at
high-temperatures or disposed in a
chemical or hazardous waste
landfill.
MERCURY-

CONTAINING

LAMPS

Fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lamps contain a
small quantity of mercury that can
be harmful to the environment and
to human health when improperly
managed. Mercury is regulated
under the Resource Conservation
and Recovery Act (RCRA), which is
administered by the US
Environmental Protection Agency.
Under current Federal law, mercury-
containing lamps — such as
fluorescent and HID lamps — may
be hazardous waste. In addition,
incandescent and HID lamps may
contain small quantities of lead that
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
can also be potentially harmful to
human health and the environment.
To prevent these toxic materials
from contaminating the
environment, dispose of used lamps
responsibly.
Federal Regulations

Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act (RCRA)

RCRA requires generators of solid
wastes containing toxic constituents
(such as mercury) to determine
whether or not the waste is
hazardous by using generator
knowledge or testing representative
samples of that waste. According to
RCRA, generators of used
fluorescent and HID lamps are
responsible for determining whether
their lamp wastes are hazardous. If
you do not test used fluorescent and
HID lamps and prove them non-
hazardous, assume they are
hazardous waste and dispose them
accordingly.

Generator Know/edge

To use generator knowledge in
making a hazardous waste
determination, the generator must
have information on possible
hazardous constituents and their
quantities in the waste. Sometimes
manufacturers generate solid waste
as part of their manufacturing
process, and can use process
knowledge to determine whether the
waste exhibits a characteristic of
hazardous waste. However, with
expired lamp wastes the generator
has little process knowledge on
which to make a hazardous waste
determination (since he is not the
manufacturer). The generator could
base a determination on data
obtained from the manufacturer, or
he could refer to EPA's study
entitled "Analytical Results of
Mercury in Fluorescent Lamps"
(dated 5/15/92, available in EPA's
RCRA docket).

Testing Lamps To
Determine If They Are
Hazardous Waste
"! flfr
The Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure (TCLP) identifies whether
a waste is toxic and must be
managed as hazardous waste. The
test attempts to replicate the
conditions in a municipal landfill to
detect the mercury concentration of
water that would leach from the
landfill. If the mercury concentration
exceeds 0.2 milligrams per liter, the
lamp fails the toxicity test and is
managed as hazardous waste.

When mercury-containing lamps are
tested using the TCLP, the test
results can vary considerably,
depending on the lamp
manufacturer, the age of the lamp,
and the laboratory procedures used.
These lamps often fail the TCLP. If
you do not use the TCLP to verify
that your lamps are non-hazardous,
you should (1) assume that they are
hazardous waste, and (2) manage
them as hazardous waste. Contact
your state hazardous waste agency
for information on laboratories in
your state that conduct the TCLP
test. The cost to test one lamp is
approximately $140. However, due
to variability in TCLP testing for
lamps, EPA recommends that more
than one lamp be tested to make a
hazardous waste determination.

For more information on RCRA
regulations and waste identification,
storage, transportation, and
disposal, contact the RCRA hotline
at 1-800-424-9346 (in the District of
Columbia call 703-412-9810).

Conditionally Exempt Small
Quantity Generators

A conditionally exempt small
quantity generator, as defined under
RCRA, is a generator who disposes
100 kg or less of hazardous waste
per month. Generators must add
the weight of all the hazardous
waste (lamps plus other hazardous
wastes) that their business
generates during a month. For lamp
disposal, this quantity of waste in-
cludes the mercury in the lamp
along with the glass, phosphors, and
other materials (the weight of the
entire lamp).

Conditionally exempt small quantity
generators are excused from RCRA
identification, storage, treatment and
disposal regulations. To qualify as a
conditionally exempt small quantity
generator (if the only hazardous
waste is mercury-containing lamps),
a generator must dispose of fewer
than 300-350 four-foot T12 fluores-
cent lamps or 400-450 four-foot T8
fluorescent lamps per month, de-
pending upon the approximate
weight of each lamp. EPA
encourages all users of fluorescent
and HID lamps to dispose of
me'rcury-containing lamps
responsibly to limit the release of
mercury into the environment.

Comprehensive
Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability
Act (CERCLA)

CERCLA also regulates the disposal
of mercury-containing lamps. The
law requires building owners and
waste generators to notify the
National Response Center at (800)
424-8802 under certain conditions.
For example, they must notify if they
dispose of a pound or more of
mercury (roughly equivalent to
11,000 four-foot T12 fluorescent
lamps) in a 24-hour period. All
generators of mercury-containing
lamp waste (large, small, and
conditionally exempt small
generators) could be held liable in
any subsequent Superfund cleanup
at a land disposal site, incinerator,
storage site, or recycling or other
treatment facility.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
State Regulations

States may develop regulations that
are more stringent than current
Federal requirements. Several
states are currently considering
regulations that will affect the
transportation, storage, and/or
disposal of mercury-containing
lamps. Check with your Regional
EPA office or state agency to con-
firm the most current rules and infor-
mation on fluorescent and HID lamp
waste management in your state.
Disposal of Used
Fluorescent and HID
Lamps

The following sections outline the
storage, packing, transportation and
disposal options for used mercury-
containing lamps discarded as
hazardous waste.

Used lamps that test hazardous or
are determined hazardous by the
generator must be disposed of at a
hazardous waste landfill or sent to a
lamp recycling facility. Mercury-
containing lamps should never be
incinerated. Most municipal
incinerators and solid waste
combustors lack the necessary
control technologies to effectively
remove mercury from the flue gas
before it is released into the
atmosphere.

Hazardous Waste
Landfill

A hazardous waste landfill — also
known as a RCRA Subtitle C facility
— is a landfill that is permitted under
Subtitle C of RCRA and is
engineered to contain hazardous
waste. Incoming wastes are
manifested by the facility and some
GLASS: May be remanufacurod for non-food
contain*™ or reused as filler In camem end asphalt

END CAPS: May be sent to an aluminum
recyder for romanuracturing
MERCURY: May be sent to a mercury
distiller where It can be reused for
thermometers and other products
incoming wastes are subject to
treatment standards.

Recycling Fluorescent and
HID Lamps

Any lamp may be recycled at
permitted or licensed recycling
facilities, regardless of whether the
lamp tests hazardous. However, for
lamps that are hazardous waste,
generators must follow generation,
transport, and storage requirements
under RCRA Subtitle C. Recycling
separates the toxic substances (such
as mercury) from the glass,
aluminum, and other lamp
components, and all materials may
be re-used in manufacturing other
products. Some lamp recycling
companies recycle HID lamps as
well as fluorescent lamps. A list of
companies that provide lamp
recycling services is included in the
last section.

Lamp Disposal Costs

The costs for lamp disposal by
recycling or hazardous waste landfill
can vary considerably. Prices vary
according to the following.

* quantity of waste generated

* location of disposal site
t proximity to a permitted
hazardous waste landfill or
recycling facility

* state and local taxes

Negotiate with hazardous waste
brokers, transporters, waste
management companies, and
disposal sites to obtain lowest fees.

Recycling Costs

Recycling costs for fluorescent
lamps are typically calculated by
linear foot. HID lamp recycling costs
are typically quoted on a per-lamp
basis.

* fluorescent recycling costs range
from$0.06/ftto$0.15/ft

* average cost is $0.107ft

* approximately $0.40 per F40
lamp

* HID recycling costs range from
$1.25/lamp to $4.50/lamp

4 average cost is $2.50/lamp

Disposal costs for fluorescent lamps
at a hazardous waste landfill range
from 25-50 cents per 4-foot tube, not
including costs for packaging,
transportation, or profile fees.
Packing Lamps for
Disposal

To prevent used fluorescent and HID
lamps from breaking, lamps should
be properly packed for storage and
transportation. When lamps are
removed and replaced with new
lamps (e.g., during group
relamping), the used lamps should
be packed in the cardboard boxes
that contained the replacement
lamps. The boxes containing the
hazardous waste must be properly
labeled. Pre-printed labels or rubber
stamps that meet Department of
Transportation regulations are
recommended for high-volume
disposal.
Storing Lamps for
Disposal

RCRA sets storage requirements for
generators depending on how much
hazardous waste they dispose each
month.

* Small quantity generators
dispose 100 to 1,000 kg of
hazardous waste per month
(which roughly corresponds to
350 to 3,600 four foot lamps),
and can store hazardous waste
up to 180 days.

* Large quantity generators
dispose over 1,000 kg of
hazardous waste per month
(more than 3,600 four foot
lamps), and can store hazardous
waste up to 90 days.
* Conditionally exempt small
quantity generators dispose 100
kg or less of hazardous waste
per month and are exempt from
RCRA storage requirements.

In addition to proper packing, care
should be taken when stacking the
boxes of used lamps for storage to
avoid crushing the bottom boxes
under the weight of the boxes on
top. If you work with a contractor to
maintain your lighting system, you
may want to specify a safe storage
arrangement in your contract. This
approach ensures that your used
lamps are not accidentally broken or
crushed before they are sent to a
disposal facility.

Some organizations crush their used
lamps before disposal. This option
should be pursued with care. The
crushing equipment should have the
approval of state and local
authorities, and crushing methods
should be evaluated carefully. The
lamp should be crushed entirely in-
side the drum or storage unit so that
no mercury vapor enters the
atmosphere. There should also be
adequate ventilation in the space
where the crushing occurs. Under
current EPA hazardous waste
regulations, crushing lamps before
sending them to a hazardous waste
landfill may be considered
treatment. Therefore, a RCRA
treatment permit may be required.
Transportation

Registered haulers and other
transporters of hazardous waste
calculate transportation fees as
cents per pound per mile. The costs
will vary according to the number of
lamps, drums, or other containers to
be removed from the site and the
distance from your location to the
location of the hazardous waste
landfill or recycling facility.
Profile Fees

Operators of chemical or hazardous
waste landfills may charge a profile
fee to document incoming waste.
Profile fees vary depending on the
volume of waste materials
generated and may be waived if a
certain volume or frequency of
deliveries is assured. Establishing a
working relationship with a lighting
management company or lighting
maintenance contractor who assists
with the maintenance of your lighting
system can reduce your disposal
costs.
Record Keeping

To track transported waste, EPA
requires generators to prepare a
Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest.
This one-page form can be provided
by the recycler or hazardous waste
landfill where you dispose of your
used fluorescent or HID lamps. The
manifest identifies the type and
quantity of waste, the generator, the
transporter, and the facility to which
the waste is being shipped.
The manifest must accompany the
waste wherever it travels. Each
handler of the waste must sign the
manifest and keep one copy. When
the waste reaches its destination,
the owner of that facility returns a
copy of the manifest to the generator
to confirm that the waste arrived. If
the waste does not arrive as
scheduled, generators must
immediately notify EPA or the
authorized state environmental
agency (see the last section), so that
they can investigate and take
appropriate action.

In addition, require your contractor
to provide you with documentation
verifying that the lamps were
properly recycled or disposed in a
hazardous waste landfill.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
10
Municipal Solid Waste
Landfill
Lamp wastes generated in small
quantities (see "Conditionally
Exempt Small Quantity Generators"
in the previous section) and used
fluorescent and HID lamps that do
not test hazardous under RCRA may
be disposed in a properly managed
municipal solid waste landfill (RCRA
Subtitle D facility). The municipal
landfill may impose restrictions or
regulate incoming wastes in
accordance with local rules or
company guidelines. Disposal costs
for lamps at a Subtitle D municipal
solid waste landfill are
approximately 2-3 cents per 4-foot
lamp.

Generators may be legitimately
concerned about potential future
Superfund liability in connection with
this disposal method. All generators
of mercury-containing lamp waste,
regardless of size, could be held
liable in any subsequent Superfund
cleanup at a municipal solid waste
landfill.
EVALUATING
DISPOSAL
OPTIONS

Liability Issues

Under CERCLA, owners and '
operators of facilities and persons
disposing hazardous substances
may be held liable for response
costs, if there is a release or threat
of a release of a hazardous
substance into the environment.
Liability under CERCLA is broad and
potentially costly, and can apply
retroactively. All generators may
incur Superfund liability for
disposing mercury-containing lamps
or PCB-containing ballasts in a
dumpster, local landfill, or recycling,
storage, or treatment facility. Dis-
posal of mercury wastes or PCBs in
an environmentally sound manner,
however, will help to minimize the
potential for environmental
contamination and thus also mini-
mize the potential for liability.
Impact of Lamp
Disposal Cost on
Profitability

The overall impact of lamp disposal
on the profitability of typical Green
Lights lighting upgrade projects is
minimal. The example on the next
page shows the impact of various
lamp recycling costs on the internal
rate of return (IRR) and the net
present value (NPV) of a typical
lighting upgrade project. The
assumed project consists of
upgrading a 4-lamp standard
fluorescent system that uses
magnetic ballasts and 40-watt lamps
with a 4-lamp T8/electronic system
and occupancy sensors. Without
considering the cost of lamp
disposal, the IRR and NPV were
calculated at 47.1% and $52,242,
respectively. Note that even when
assuming lamp disposal costs of
$1.50 per lamp — three times the
average recycling cost — the IRR
and NPV values decreased only
slightly to 44.8% and $51,642,
respectively. These results were
obtained using the Green Lights
analysis tool Quikalc.

The total cost of disposing of a lamp
as a hazardous waste either by
recycling or using a hazardous waste
landfill can be put into perspective in
three additional ways.

First, the cost of operating a lamp
(including ballast losses) for its
20,000-hour life is $64 at the
national average electric rate of 7
cents per kilowatt-hour. The 50-cent
disposal cost is quite modest in
comparison.
Disposal Costs
(per lamp)
Lamp
Disposal
Cost
No fee
$0.50
$1.00
$1.50
$2.00
$2.50
$3.00
$3.50
IRR
47.1%
46.3%
45.5%
44.8%
44.1%
43.4%
42.7%
42.1%
NPV
$52,242
$52,042
$51,842
$51,642
$51 ,442
$51,242
$51,042
$50,842
Quikalc Assumptions

63% energy savings
Before: 2x4 4-lamp fixture, 40W T12 lamps,
standard ballasts
After: 2x4 4-lamp fixture, 32W T8 lamps,
electronic ballasts, occupancy sensors, 25%
operating hour reduction
Second, replacing an old fixture with
a new one usually costs about $100-
$150, including installation.
Disposing of an old fixture's lamps
will cost approximately $2,
depending on market conditions and
disposal services purchased. If the
new fixture uses half the electricity
of the old fixture (as is typical with
Green Lights upgrades), then the
electric bill savings will pay for the
cost of disposing of the old lamps
after 310 hours of operation — about
one month for most businesses.
Essentially, lamp disposal will
extend the payback of a project by
approximately one month.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
11
Third, as shown in the pie chart, the
cost of disposing of a lamp as
hazardous waste either by recycling
or using a hazardous waste landfill
represents only a small fraction of
the total life-cycle operating costs of
a lighting system. If operating a 2-
lamp TS/electronic system, disposal
as a hazardous waste represents
only about 1 percent of total life-
cycle operating costs.
Mercury Emissions and
the Environment

The largest man-made sources of
mercury in the atmosphere are fossil
fuel combustion (58% of total) and
municipal solid waste incineration
(37% of total). When the mercury in
a fossil fuel is heated in a
combustor, it turns into a vapor. In
vapor form, mercury is difficult to
remove from the flue gas and easily
escapes into the atmosphere. When
moisture vapor in the atmosphere
turns to rain, mercury returns to the
earth and is deposited in streams,
lakes, and other waterways.

The mercury that is released into the
atmosphere by burning fossil fuels
can be substantially minimized using
efficient lighting technologies.

On average, fossil-fueled power
plants emit 0.04 milligrams of
mercury per kilowatt-hour sold. By
maximizing the efficiency of your
lighting system, you can minimize
mercury emissions from the power
plants that provide your electricity.

The graph on the next page
illustrates the long-term benefit of
upgrading to an efficient lighting
system: overall mercury emissions
are significantly reduced.

The amount of mercury emitted into
the atmosphere through solid waste
incineration and resource recovery
facilities (which burn solid waste to
produce energy) can be minimized if
FLUORESCENT LAMP LIFE-CYCLE COST
Material
6%
Recycling
1%
you adopt a sound lamp disposal
practice. EPA will be proposing
mercury emission limits for new and
existing municipal solid waste
incinerators in 1994
WORKING WITH
CONTRACTORS
Your lighting upgrade project
specification should include
provisions for proper handling and
safe disposal of lamps, ballasts, and
other hazardous materials that may
be associated with the project.

Here are some general guidelines.

•r Investigate your disposal options
thoroughly.

•" Do not expect your contractor to
be well-versed in all disposal
requirements and options.

•" Ask your lighting or electrical
contractor to provide disposal
services (either directly or
through a sub-contractor) as part
of their contract.

" Be specific in your disposal
requests (e.g., request high-
temperature incineration of
PCB-containing ballasts at an
EPA-approved incinerator).
Ask for certifications, licenses.
and references from all
subcontractors providing waste
disposal services.
DEFINITIONS

CERCLA
The Comprehensive Emergency
Response, Compensation and
Liability Act of 1980. CERCLA
referred to also as "Superfund"
established cleanup and emergency
response guidelines for releases of
hazardous substances into the
environment. A release of a
hazardous substance in an amount
equal to or greater than its
"reportable quantity" (one pound for
mercury and PCBs) in a 24-hour
period triggers CERCLA notification
requirements. CERCLA applies to
any size generator.

Chemical Waste Landfill
A TSCA permitted landfill that
accepts hazardous substances and
extremely hazardous waste These
facilities must meet different
engineering requirements than
RCRA Subtitle C (hazardous waste)
landfills.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
12
Net Mercury
Pollution (mg)
+ 160
+120
+80
+40
Key

Mercury content in T12 lamps
discarded after upgrade
Random disposal of T12 lamps in years
1-4 eliminated due to upgrade and
disposal In year 0
Reduced mercury content of spent T8
lamps (relamping at 20,000-hour rated
life; 5 year interval)
Reduced mercury emissions from
electric power plants due to T8
efficiency
Years
10
15
20
• •••
-80
Conditionally Exempt Small
Quantity Generator (SQG)
A generator who generates 100
kilograms or less a month of a
hazardous waste. Under RCRA,
small quantity generators are
exempt from RCRA regulations for
the transportation, storage,
treatment, and disposal of that
hazardous waste.

Hazardous Waste Landfill
See Subtitle C landfill.

RCRA
The Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act which regulates the
management of solid (hazardous
and non-hazardous) wastes. Under
RCRA, generators of solid wastes
are responsible for determining
whether the solid wastes are
hazardous and following RCRA
transportation, storage, treatment,
and disposal requirements for those
wastes.

RCRA Subtitle C Landfill
A landfill containing hazardous
wastes that is permitted under
Subtitle C of RCRA. Land disposal
of hazardous wastes is restricted to
permitted RCRA Subtitle C disposal
facilities.

RCRA Subtitle D Landfill
A municipal solid waste landfill
containing non-hazardous wastes
permitted under Subtitle D of RCRA.

TSCA
The Toxic Substances Control Act of
1976 which regulates the handling,
storage, transportation and disposal
of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
INFORMATION
RESOURCES

EPA Regional
Offices

REGION I (ME. VT. NH. MA. CT. Rll
Environmental Protection Agency
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Room 2203
Boston, MA 02203
(617)565-3420
REGION II (NY. NJ. PUERTO RICO.
VIRGIN ISLANDS)
Environmental Protection Agency
Jacob K. Javits Federal Building
26 Federal Plaza
New York, NY 10278
(212)264-2657

REGION III (PA. WV. VA. MD. DE.
WASHINGTON DC)
Environmental Protection Agency
841 Chestnut Building
Philadelphia, PA 19107
(215)597-9800

REGION IV (TN. KY. NC. SC. GA. AL.
MS. FL)
Environmental Protection Agency
345 Courtland Street, NE
Atlanta, GA 30365
(404) 347-4727

REGION V (IL. Wl. IN. Ml. MN. OH)
Environmental Protection Agency
77 West Jackson Boulevard
Chicago, ii_ 60604-3507
(312) 353-2000

REGION VI (NM. TX. OK. AR. LA)
Environmental Protection Agency
First Interstate Bank Tower at Fountain
Place
12th Floor/Suite 1200
1445 Ross Avenue
Dallas, TX 75202-2733
(214)655-6444

REGION VII (NE. KS. MO. IA)
Environmental Protection Agency
726 Minnesota Avenue
Kansas City, KS66101
(913)551-7000

REGION VIII (MT. WY. ND, SD. UT.
CO)
Environmental Protection Agency
Suite 500
999 18th Street
Denver, CO 80202-2405
(303) 293-1603

REGION IX (CA. NV. AZ. HI. AMER-
ICAN SAMOA. GUAM)
Environmental Protection Agency
75 Hawthorne Street
San Francisco, CA 94105
(415)744-1305
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
13
REGION X (WA. OR. ID. AK)
Environmental Protection Agency
1200 Sixth Avenue
Seattle, WA 98101
(206) 553-4973
State Solid and
Hazardous Waste
Agencies

ALABAMA
Department of Environmental
Management
Land Division — Solid/Hazardous
Waste
1751 Federal Drive
Montgomery, AL 36130
(205)271-7761/7735

ALASKA
Glenn J. Miller, P.E.
Manager, Solid Waste Program
State of Alaska
Department of Environmental
Conservation
410 Willoughby Avenue
Juneau, Alaska 99801-1795
(907)465-5153

ARIZONA
Anthony Leverock
Arizona Department of Environmental
Quality
Hazardous Waste Permits Unit
3033 North Central Avenue
Phoenix, AZ 85012
(602)207-4160

ARKANSAS
Tom Ezell
Manager, Programs Branch
Department of Pollution Control and
Ecology
Hazardous Waste Division
PO Box 8913
Little Rock, AR 72219-8913
(501)562-6532

CALIFORNIA
Mardis Coers
Department of Toxic Substances Control
PO Box 806
Sacramento, CA 95812-0806
(916)322-3700
COLORADO
Winifred Bromley
Department of Health
Hazardous Materials and Waste
Management Division
4300 Cherry Creek Drive, So.
Denver, CO 8022201580
(303) 692-3434

CONNECTICUT
Department of Environmental Protection
Waste Management Bureau
79 Elm Street
Hartford, CT 06106
(203) 566-8476

DELAWARE
Department of Natural Resources and
Environmental Control
D'v's'on o^ Env'ronrr!en^a' Con^rcl
Solid Waste/Hazardous Waste Section
Edward Tatnall Building
PO Box 1401
Dover, DE 19901
(302) 739-4403

Delaware Solid Waste Authority
PO Box 71
Newcastle, DE 19901
(302) 736-5361

DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
Department of Consumer and
Regulatory Affairs
Environmental Regulation
Administration
Pesticides, Hazardous Waste and
Underground Storage Tank Division
Hazardous Waste Management Branch
(Hazardous Waste Disposal)
2100 Martin Luther King, Jr. Ave. SE,
Suite 203
Washington, DC 20020
(202)404-1167

Department of Public Works
Public Space Maintenance
Administration
Bureau of Sanitation Services (Solid
Waste Disposal/Recycling)
2750 South Capitol St., SE
(202) 767-8512

FLORIDA
Raoul Clarke, Environmental
Administrator
Bureau of Solid and Hazardous Waste
Department of Environmental Protection
2600 Blair Stone Road
Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2400
(904) 488-0300
GEORGIA
Vern George
Environmental Protection Agency
Toxics Branch
345CourtlandSt., NW
Atlanta, GA 30334
(404)347-1033

Department of Natural Resources
Environmental Protection Division
Land Protection Branch
205 Butler Street, SE
Suite 1154
Atlanta, GA 30334
(404) 656-2833

HAWAII
State of Hawaii
Department of Health
Envircnn"'ental Managerr>ert D'V'S'O"
Clean Air Branch
Asbestos Abatement Office
PO Box 3378
Honolulu, HI 96801-3378
(808) 586-4200

IDAHO
William Fritell
Department of Health and Welfare
Division of Envfronment
Bureau of Hazardous Materials
450 W. State Street
Boise, ID 83720
(208) 334-5879

ILLINOIS
Clarence L. Smith
State of Illinois
Environmental Protection Agency
2200 Churchill Road
Springfield, IL 62794-9276
(217)524-3300

INDIANA
Robert Snodgrass
Solid Waste Permit Section
105 South Meridian Street
Indianapolis, IN 46206-6015
(317)232-8603

IOWA
Lavoy Haage
Department of Natural Resources
Environmental Protection Division
Air Quality and Solid Waste Protection
Bureau
Wallace State Office Building
900 East Grand Avenue
Des Moines, IA 50319
(515)281-5145
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
14
KANSAS
Ron Smith
Department of Health and Environment
Solid Waste Management Division
Forbes AFB Bldg. No. 740
Topeka, KS 66620
(913)296-1500

KENTUCKY
Department for Environmental
Protection
Division of Waste Management
Ft. Boone Plaza
14 Reilly Road
Frankfort, KY 40601
(502) 564-6716

LOUISIANA
Department of Environmental Quality
Office of Solid and Hazardous Waste
Solid Waste Division
PO Box 44307
Baton Rouge, LA 70804
(504) 342-4677

MAINE
Department of Environmental Protection
Bureau of Oil & Hazardous Materials
Control
State House Station 17
August, ME 04333
(207)287-2651

Waste Management Agency
State House Station 154
August, ME 04333
(207)287-5300

MARYLAND
Ed Hammerburg
Department of Environment
Toxic Operations Program
2500 Boening Highway
Baltimore, MD 21224
(410)631-3345

MASSACHUSETTS
Victoria Phillips, Environmental Analyst
Office of Hazardous Waste
Enforcement Division
1 Winter Street
Boston, MA 02108
(617)292-5812

MICHIGAN
Department of Natural Resources
Hazardous Waste Division
PO Box 30241
Lansing, Ml 48909
(517)373-2730
MINNESOTA
Nancy Ellefson
Minnesota Pollution Control Agency
Solid or Hazardous Waste Division
520 Lafayette Road North
St. Paul, MN 55155
(612)296-6300

MISSISSIPPI
Russell Smith
Department of Environmental Quality
Office of Pollution Control
PO Box 10358
Jackson, MS 39209
(601)961-5171

MSSO-R
Department of Natural Resources
Division of Environmental Quality
Waste Management Program
Jefferson State Office Building
205 Jefferson Street
PO Box 176
Missouri Boulevard
Jefferson City, MO 65102
(314)751-3176

MONTANA
Don Vidrine
Department of Health and
Environmental Sciences
Environmental Sciences Division
Solid and Hazardous Waste Bureau
PO Box 200901
Helena, MT 59620-0901
(406)444-1430

NEBRASKA
Department of Environmental Control
PO Box 94877
State Office Building
Lincoln, NE 68509
(402)471-2186

NEVADA
Colleen Crips
Bureau of Hazardous Waste
333 West Nye Lane
Carson City, NV 89710
(702) 687-5872

NEW HAMPSHIRE
Robert C. White, Chief
PCB Section
Department of Environmental Services
Air Resources Division/Toxics
Management Bureau
64 N. Main St., Caller Box 2033
Concord, NH 03302-2033
(603)271-1370
Department of Environmental Services
Waste Management
Division/Compliance Bureau
6 Hazen Drive
Concord, NH 03301
(603)271-2942

NEW JERSEY
SandorJuhasz
NJ Department of Environmental
Protection and Energy
Hazardous Waste Regulation Program
401 East State Street
CN421
Trenton, NJ 08625
(609) 292-8341

NJ Department of Environmental
Protection and Energy
Solid Waste Management Division
840 Bear Tavern Road
CN44
Trenton, NJ 08625
(609) 292-8341

NEW MEXICO
New Mexico Environmental Department
Harold Runnels Building
PO Box 26110
Santa Fe, New Mexico 87502

Hazardous and Radioactive Materials
Bureau
(505) 827-4308

Solid Waste Bureau
(505) 827-2775

NEW YORK
William A. Yeman, P.E.
Division of Hazardous Substances
Regulation
New York State Department of
Environmental Conservation
50 Wolf Road
Albany, NY 12233
(518)485-8988

NORTH CAROLINA
Department of Environment, Health, and
Natural Resources
Solid Waste Management/Hazardous
Waste Division
PO Box 27687
Raleigh, NC 27611
(919)733-2178
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
15
NORTH DAKOTA
Neil M. Knatterud, Director
Health Department
Division of Waste Management
1200 Missouri Avenue
PO Box 5520
Bismarck, ND 58502-5520
(701)221-5166

OHIO
Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Solid and Hazardous Waste
PO Box 1049
1800 Watermark Drive
Columbus, OH 43266-0149
(614)644-2917

OKLAHOMA
Ellen Bussert
Oklahoma Department of Environmental
Quality
Public Information and Education
1000 Northeast 10th Street
Oklahoma City, OK 73117-1212
(405)271-7353

OREGON
Susan Violette, Management Analyst
Department of Environmental Quality
Hazardous/Solid Waste Division
811 S.W. 6th Avenue
Portland, OR 97204
(503) 229-5630

PENNSYLVANIA
Department of Environmental Re-
sources
Bureau of Waste Management
PO Box 8471
Harrisburg, PA 17105-8471

PUERTO RICO
Environmental Quality Board
Solid and Hazardous Waste Bureau
PO Box 11488
Santurce, PR 00910
(809)725-5140

RHODE ISLAND
Robert Nero
Department of Environmental
Management
Air and Hazardous Materials
291 Promenade Street
Providence, Rl 02908
(401)277-2797
SOUTH CAROLINA
Board of Health and Environmental
Control
Bureau of Solid and Hazardous Waste
2600 Bull Street
Columbia, SC 29201
(803) 734-5200

SOUTH DAKOTA
Department of Water and Natural
Resources
Environmental Health Division
Joe Foss Building
Pierre, SD 57501
(605)773-3153

TENNESSEE
Wayne Gregory, Technical Coordinator
Department of Environment and
Conservation
Division of Solid Waste Management
5th Floor, L&C Tower
401 Church Street
Nashville, TN 37243-1535
(615)532-0780

TEXAS
Alice Hamilton Rogers, P.E., Technical
Consultant
Texas Water Commission
PO Box 13087
1700 North Congress Avenue
Austin, TX 78711-3087
(512)463-7830

UTAH
Rusty Lundburg
Department of Environmental Quality
Bureau of Solid and Hazardous Waste
PO Box 144880
Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-4880

VERMONT
Stephen W. Simeos,
Hazardous Materials Coordinator
Department of Environmental
Conservation
Hazardous Materials Management
Division
103 South Main Street
Waterbury, Vermont 05671-0404
(802) 244-8702

VIRGINIA
Steven E. Frazier, Waste Division
Virginia Department of Environmental
Quality
Special Solid Waste Program
11th Floor Monroe Building
101 North 14th Street
Richmond, VA 23219
(804) 225-2667
WASHINGTON
Vern Meinz, Environmental Engineer
Department of Ecology
Solid and Hazardous Waste Program
PO Box 47600
Olympia, WA 98504-7600
(206) 459-6322

WEST VIRGINIA
WV Division of Environmental Protec-
tion
Office of Waste Management
1356 Hansford Street
Charleston, WV 25301
(304) 558-5929

WISCONSIN
Department of Natural Resources
Bureau of Solid Waste Management
101 South Webster Street
Madison, Wl 53707
(608)266-1327

WYOMING
Department of Environmental Quality
Solid Waste Management Program
122 West 25th Street
(307) 777-7752
TSCA, RCRA, and
CERCLA Information
Phone Lines
Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA)
Assistance Information Hotline
(202)554-1404

RCRA/CERCLA Hotline
(800) 424-9346
in the Washington, DC Metro Area
(703)412-9810

CERCLA National Response Center
(NRC) Hotline
(800) 424-8802
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
/}"?
16
Te S-fc.
jjltJH
- 7885"
EPA-Approved Disposal
Locations

Commercially permitted
PCBI NCINERA TORS
operating as of June 1993

Aptus, Inc.
PO Box 1328
Coffeyville, KS 67337
(316)251-6380

Aptus, Inc.
Aragonite, UT
(801)266-7787

Chemical Waste Management
PO Box 2563
Port Arthur, TX 77643
(409) 736-2821
Environmental Energy Group
Denton, TX
(817)383-3632

Environmental Energy Group
PO Box 50764
Denton. TX 76206
(817)898-1291

Rollins
PO Box 609
Deer Park, TX 77536
(713)930-2300

Commercially permitted
HAZARDOUS WASTE
LANDFILLS operating as of
June 1993

Chem-Security Systems Incorporated
Star Route, Box 9
Arlington, OR 98712
(503) 454-2643

Chemical Waste Management
Call 1-800-843-3604 for
information on CWM disposal
facilities nation-wide.

Envirosafe Services Inc. of Idaho
PO Box 16217
Boise, ID 83715-6217
(800)274-1516

US Ecology, Inc.
Box 578
Beatty, NV 89003
(702) 553-2203
US Pollution Control, Inc.
Grayback Mountain
8960N Hwy 40
Lake Point, UT 84074
(801)531-4980
Recycling Resources

Lamp Recycling Services

Advanced Environmental Recycling
Corp.
2591 Mitchell Avenue
Allentown, PA
(800) 554-2372 or (215) 797-7608

Allied Technology Group
47375 Freemont Boulevard
Freemont, CA 94538
(5"C)49C-3C38

Alta Resource Management Services
88-B Industry Avenue
Springfield, MA 01104-9926
(800) 730-ALTA or (413) 734-3399

Bethlehem Apparatus
Hellertown, PA
(215)838-7034

Dynex Environmental, Inc.
6801 Industrial Loop
Milwaukee, Wl 53129
(800) 249-3310 or (414) 421-4959
4751 Mustang Circle
St. Paul, MN 55112
(800) 733-9639 or (612) 784-4040

Global Recycling Technologies, Inc.
PO Box 651 .
Randolph, MA 02368
(617)341-6080

Light Cycle, Inc.
1222 University Avenue
St. Paul, MN 55104
(612)641-1309

Lighting Resources, Inc.
386 S. Gordon Street
Pomona, CA
(800) 57-CYCLE

Luminaire Recyclers Inc.
2161 University Avenue, Suite 206
St. Paul, MN 55114
(612)649-0079
Mercury Recovery Systems
2021 S. Myrtle Street
Monrovia, CA
(818)301-1372

Mercury Refining Co., Inc.
Albany, NY
(518)459-0820

Mercury Technologies International, LP
Hay ward, CA
(800) 628-3675
Los Angeles, CA
(310)475-4684
West Melbourne, FL
(407)852-1516

Mercury Technologies of Minnesota
Pine City Industrial Park
Pine City, MN 55063-0013
(612)629-7888
(800) 864-3821

Nine West Technologies
Nashville, TN
(615)399-1486

NSSI, Inc.
574 Etheridge Street
Houston, Texas 77087
(713)641-0391

Recyclights
2010 E. Hennepin Avenue
Minneapolis, MN 55413
(612)378-9571

Resource Recovery, Inc.
Edina, MN
(612) 828-9722 (service)
(701) 234-9102 (sales)

Superior Lamp Recycling, Inc.
Mineral Springs Facility
1275 Mineral Springs Drive
Port Washington, Wl 53074
(800) 556-LAMP (5267)

USA Lights
2007 County Road, C-2
Roseville, MN 55113
(612)628-9370

Ballast Recycling Services

Alta Resource Management Services,
Inc.
88-B Industry Avenue
Spingfield, MA 01104-9926
(800) 730-ALTA or (413) 734-3399
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
17
Dynex Environmental, Inc.
6801 Industrial Loop
Milwaukee, Wl 53129
(800) 249-3310 or (414) 421-4959
4751 Mustang Circle
St. Paul, MN 55112
(800) 733-9639 or (612) 784-4040

Eastern Environmental Technologies
Portchester, NY
(914)934-2100

Ensquare, Inc.
Newton Upper Falls, MA
(617)776-7320

FulCircle Ballast Recyclers
168 Brattle Street
Cambridge, MA
(800)775-1516
Baltimore, MD
(717)932-1022
New York, NY
(800)581-0857
San Francisco, CA
(916)649-9194
Los Angeles, CA
(800)775-1516
Atlanta, GA
(800)775-1516
Chicago, IL
(708)434-0593
Detroit, Ml
(313)651-6589

Global Recycling Technologies, Inc.
PO Box 651
Randolph, MA 02368
(617)341-6080

Lighting Resources, Inc.
Pomona, CA
(714)622-0881

Light Cycle, Inc
1222 University Avenue
St. Paul, MN 55104
(612)641-1309

Luminaire Recyclers Inc.
2161 University Avenue, Suite 206
St. Paul, MN 55114
(612)649-0079

S.D. Myers
180 South Avenue
Tallmadge, Ohio 44278
(216)633-2666
Salesco U.S.A.
Boston, MA
(617)344-4074
Chicago, IL
(708) 803-0880
Dallas, TX
(214)661-8819
Honolulu, HI
(800) 368-9095
Phoenix, AZ
(800) 368-9095
San Diego, CA
(619)793-3460

Transformer Service, Inc.
Concord, NH 03302
(603) 224-4006

Transtec Environmental
Niagara Falls, NY
(716)283-6174

THIS IS NOT A COMPLETE LIST OF
COMPANIES WHO PROVIDE
RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL
SERVICES THROUGHOUT THE
UNITED STATES. COMPANIES
LISTED IN THIS SECTION ARE NOT
ENDORSED BY THE EPA OR THE
GREEN LIGHTS PROGRAM. EPA
DOES NOT SCREEN LISTED
COMPANIES AND CANNOT CONFIRM
THE METHODS THESE COMPANIES
MAY USE IN THEIR RECYCLING
PROCESS.
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

•Organizations that make the commitment to Green
Lights will profit by lowering their electricity bills,
improving lighting quality, and increasing worker
productivity. They will also reduce the air pollution
caused by electricity generation.
t
For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Waste Disposal is one of a series of
documents known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade
Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
The Lighting Survey
Green Lights General Information

S (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680

Green Lights Ally Information

S (202) 293-4527
Fax: (202)223-9534

Green Lights Technical Information

9 (202)862-1145
Fax: (202)862-1144

Green Lights Software Support

S (703)934-3150

Energy Star Fax-Line System

S (202) 233-9659
cs" To order other documents
or appendices in this
series, contact the Green
Lights Customer Service
Center at (202) 775-6650.
Look in the Green Lights
Update for announcements
of new publications.
W Green
Lights
Lighting Waste Disposal • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • July 1994
-------
Reporting
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA 430-B-95-005
January 1995
fill/ Ureen
^ Lights
Saving energy and preventing pollution is good news
for US businesses and the American public. By
submitting project upgrade reports to EPA, you can
help in identifying and publicizing success stories. In
addition, regular reporting will help the Green Lights
staff evaluate program effectiveness and enhance
technical support to Partners.
ACTION CHECKLIST
Report all lighting surveys and upgrades upon
project completion.

Report each project on the one-page Green Lights
Implementation Report form.

Collect required data during the lighting survey.

Negotiate with contractors to have them fill out
forms as part of the lighting contract.
WHY YOU SHOULD REPORT
The Green Lights program is based on a cooperative
agreement between American business and EPA.
EPA provides a wide range of technical and
promotional services to Green Lights Partners and
Allies. In return, participants commit to implement
cost-effective lighting upgrades that ultimately result
in environmental benefits. As part of the agreement,
Partners and Allies agree to annually document their
lighting surveys and upgrades. By working together,
EPA and Green Lights participants not only reduce
pollution and protect the environment, but also
improve America's bottom line.
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLIST 1

WHY YOU SHOULD REPORT 1

HOW TO REPORT 2

REPORTKALC 5

ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS 5
Reporting lighting upgrade progress to EPA is centra!
to a successful program and helps measure your
success.

*• How much pollution has your Green Lights effort
prevented?

«- How many kWh of electricity did you save?

<*• What was the internal rate of return of your
lighting upgrade?

•*• What types of technologies did ypu use?

Your reports are critical for assessing the
effectiveness of the program and helping EPA provide
assistance and support to participants. Additionally,
with this information, EPA can publicize the success
that participants make in reducing energy use and
preventing pollution.

Green Lights has streamlined the reporting obligation
into a simple one-page form. The Green Lights Im-
plementation Report measures the progress
participants make in surveying their facilities and
upgrading to more energy-efficient lighting. The
benefits of highlighting the success of Green Lights
and its participants offset the limited effort required to
complete the form.
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
HOW TO REPORT
The following instructions will help
you complete the Implementation
Report form. EPA has developed
this one-page form to record the
necessary information about each of
your lighting survey and upgrade
projects. The report form should be
used to document interim project
progress or final project completion.

Please take ten minutes to read the
following instructions. For each
Green Lights participant, EPA has
designated an Implementation
Support Specialist (ISS) to provide
assistance throughout the
implementation process. If you
have any questions, please call your
ISS. If you do not know how to
contact your ISS, please call the
Green Lights Technical Hotline at
(202)862-1145. Taking a few
minutes to make sure that each
question is properly completed will
save you time, enabling you to avoid
future inquiries from Green Lights
representatives. The following
pages contain a blank Green Lights
Implementation Report form and
one that is filled out (to be used with
the sample calculations in Exhibit 1).
Contents of the Report
Form

Section 1:
Facility Information

Use the codes on the back of the
form to define "Facility type."
Please include the telephone and
telefax number of the facility
contact. "Total facility floorspace"
represents the total square footage
of the facility. "Floorspace included
in this report" asks only for the
square footage that the survey or
upgrade covers. Outside lighting is
not incorporated into the total square
footage; however, technologies
used to upgrade outside lighting
should be reported. If you have
questions about what square footage
to include, please contact your ISS.
The report form will be rejected
without square footage
information.

Sections 2-3:
Fixture Information

Please identify each fixture type in
your project. Use additional pages if
you have more than six fixture
types. Asterisked columns in
Sections 2 and 3 require codes listed
on the back of the report form. EPA
will not accept reports without these
codes. Wattage/fixture represents
the system wattage, so ballast loss
must be incorporated. Also, please
include operating hours (out of a
maximum of 8,760 hours/year) for
each fixture type. Providing this
information helps EPA verify energy
savings, If an application is not
provided as a code, please
explain in Section 8.

Sections 4-5:
Controls

Sections 4 and 5 ask for the quantity
and type(s) of controls used. Please
use codes listed on the back of the
report form.

Sections 6-7:
Maintenance

These two sections ask for the
methods used in relamping and
cleaning the lighting fixtures. Please
circle the appropriate answer for
each question.

Section 8:
Comments

Please include any comments
regarding your project that may help
EPA better understand your report.
Section 9:
Project Costs

Show the pre-rebate cost
components of the project, if the
project cost cannot be broken down,
include only the total project cost.
Also, please include all rebates or
grants received for the project.

Section 10:
Lighting Surveys

This section is critical to the report.
It is crucial to verify each
calculation as you go, because
each question usually depends
on the preceding one. The sample
equations in Exhibit 1 will help you
with your calculations. If you have
any questions, please call your ISS
or the Green Lights Technical
Hotline at (202) 862-1145.

Section 11:
Implementation Methods

Please use the codes on the back of
the report form to answer questions
concerning implementation
methods.

Section 12:
Signature

Sign your name and send the form
to the following address.

Green Lights Program
US-EPA 6202J
401 M St. SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 233-9569 FAX

ATTN: Progress Reporting
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS IMPLEMENTATION REPORT
(>MB# 2060-025S |-\p VII Wo

SURVEY REPORT
(fill in sections 1,2, -1,6, and 12 below)

COMPLETED PROJECT REPORT
(fill in sections 1-12 below)
Date:
Page of
i'anach addmonal pages as needed)
1. FA CILITY IN FORM A TION
Company Name:
Facility Name:
Facility address:
City/St./ZipCode
Facility type*
New Construction?
Yes No
2. LIGHTING FIXTURES BEFORE UPGRADE fuse codes on back)
Fixture
Quantity
Lamp
Lamp
Wattage
Lamps
Fixture
Ballast
Type*
Lamps
Ballast
Wattage
peif Fixture
Lighting
hours'year
4. LIGHTING CONTROLS BEFORE UPGRADE
Type I •
Quantity
Type 2-
Quantity
Type 3'
Quantity
6. MAINTENANCE METHODS BEFORE UPGRADE
Group relamping?
Yes No Fixture cleaning?
Yes No
Facility Manager:
Telephone No./FAX No.
Total Floorspace for this Facility:
Floorspace included in this report:
Is this the FIRST report sent to EPA for this floorspace?
sq.fl
sqjl
Yes No
3. LIGHTING FIXTURES AFTER UPGRADE
(*use codes on back)
Upgrade
Type'
Fixluie
Type-
Fixture
Quantity
Lamp
Type"
Lamp
Wattage
Lamps/
Fixture
Ballast
Type-
Lamps
Ballast
Wattage
pet Fixture
Lighting
hours yeiir
5. LIGHTING CONTROLS AFTER UPGRADE
Typel'
Quantity
Type 2'
Quantity
Type 3-
Quantity'
7. MAINTENANCE METHODS AFTER UPGRADE
Group relamping?
Yes No Fixture cleaning?
Yes
No
8. COMMENTS
9. PROJECT COSTS
Survey
Administrative
Materials
Installation Labor
Disposal/Recycling Costs:
Other Costs
Total Project Cost
Rebates/Grants
10. LIGHTING SAVINGS
Lighting Load Reduced
Electricity Reduction
% Lighting Savings
Energy Cost Savings
Internal Rate of Return
11. IMPLEMENTATION METHODS:
Survey/Analysis*
Equipment Provider*
Installation Method*
Financing Method*
* use codes on the back for these entries
12. SIGNATURE
Are you? GL Implementation Director
Facility Manager Qther
Scud lo Jackie Krieger, Green Lights, US-EPA 6202J, -101 M Si S\V, Washington DC 20-460 , or
FAX tt) I 202) 77S-fi(iK() |-'or (jiicslinns call the Green I iulils icchnical liollinc 202-77 S-(,('> ^1
-------
GREEN LIGHTS IMPLEMENTATION REPORT CODES
Facility I ypo
I (ion Ollicc
10(11 Warehouse
1002 Industrial Manufacturing
1003 Retail sales
1004 HcallhCarc
1005 Lodging (hotels, dormitories etc.)
1006 Assembly (churches, auditoriums, etc.)
1007 Education (classrooms)
1008 Food sales and service
1009 Parking Garage
1010 Laboratory-
Kill Outdoor

Fixture Typo
I 1 Fluorescent- commercial- no lens
I -4 Fluorescent- commercial-clear lens
1 5 Fluorescent- commercial-translucent lens
I 6 Fluorescent - deep cell louver
17 Fluorescent - small cell louver
18 Fluorescent- industrial-open fixture
19 Fluorescent- industrial-enclosed fixture
20 Incandescent- downlight ("can")
21 Incandesccnt-spotlight'floodlight
22 Incandcscent-decorative/sconce
23 Incandescent-pendant fixture
24 Incandescent-general illumination
2 5 Incandescent-extcrior/landscape
26 Incandescent - track lighting
27 HID-outdoor-cobra head
28 HID-outdoor-shoe box
29 I lin-otitdoor-wallpak/flood
30 IIID-outdoor-landscape
31 IIID-outdoor-sports lighting
32 HID-indoor-high bay
33 IIID-indoor-lowbay
34 IIID-indoor-recessed commercial
35 Hll)-indoor-sports lighting
36 F.xit sign-incandescent
37 F.xit sign-fluorescent
38 F.xit sign-l.ED
39 Exit sign-electroluminescent
40 Hxit sign- tritium
•II Fxit sign- luminescent
• 12 Indirect

Installation by
2010 in-house staff
2011 contractor
;'H.> uliliu
Lamp Type
54 T-8
55 T-10
56 T-12 Energy Saving
57 T-12 Cathode cut-out
58 T-12 High Lumen
59 T-12 Standard
60 T-12 High Output (SOOma)
61 T-12VHO(1500ma)
62 T-17VHO(1500ma)
63 T-5 single ended
64 Compact twin-tube
65 Compact quad-tube
66 Compact-integrated ballast
67 Compact-circular
68 Incandescent-general service (A, PS,T)
69 Incandescent-Reflector (R, PAR, ER)
70 IncandescenUdecorative
71 Halogen-general service
72 Halogen-reflector (R.PAR, MR)
73 Halogen-tubular
74 HID-mercury vapor
75 HID-metal halide
76 HID-high pressure sodium
77 HID-white-HPS
78 Low pressure sodium
79 T-12 Slimline

Ballast Type
80 Fluorescent-old standard magnetic
81 Fluorescent-efficient magnetic
82 Fluorescent-hybrid/cathode cutout
83 Fluorescent-standard electronic
84 Fluorescent-integrated electronic
85 Fluorescent-extended output electronic
86 Fluorescent-partial output electronic
87 Fluorescent-dimming electronic
88 Fluorescent-step dimming electronic
89 Fluorescent-HO standard magnetic
90 Fluorescent-HO (SOOma) electronic
91 Fluorescent-VHO standard magnetic
92 Fluorescent-compact magnetic
93 Fluorescent-compact electronic
94 HID-magnetic
95 HID-electronic
96 Fluorescent-HO efficient magnetic
97 Fluorescent-VHO efficient magnetic
Upgrade Type
110 Relamponly
111 Delamp only
112 Relamp and reballast
113 Specular reflector delamp
114 ReflectorReballast
115 New Lens/Reflector/Reballast
116 New lens'louver
117 New fixture
118 Convert Incand. to Fluorescent or HID
119 Task Lighting

Control Type
100 Manual switching
101 Manual dimming
102 Occupancy sensor
103 Timed switching
104 Timed dimming
105 Daylight switching
106 Daylight dimming
107 Panel level dimming
108 Panel level EMS
109 Power reducer

Survey/Analysis by
2010 in-house personnel
2011 independent consultant
2012 electrical contractor
2013 utility representative
2014 equipment supplier
2015 lighting management company
2016 energy services company
2017 Green Lights Surveyor Ally
2018 Architect
2019 Lighting Designer
2024 Electrical Distributor

Equipment Provided by
2020 lighting equipment supplier
2021 lighting management company
2022 utility
2023 contractor

Financing by
2040 internal funds
2041 conventional loan
2042 utility
2043 lease/lease-purchase
2044 shared savings
2045 other
POLLUTION PREVENTION
You may want to estimate the
pollution prevention of this
project for your own use. Use the
following formulas and factors:

CO2: kWh/yr x emission = Ibs-yr
saved factor
SO2: kWh/yr x emission = g/yr
saved factor
NOx: kWh/'yr x emission = g/yr
saved factor
EPA Regional Emission Factors (see note below)
REGION 1: CT, MA, ME, NH, RI, VI
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.1 4.0 1.4
REGION 2: NJ, NY, PR, VI
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.1 3.4 1.3
REGION 3: DC, DE, MD, PA, VA, WV
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.6 8.2 2.6
REGION 4: AL, FL, GA, KY, MS, NC, SC, TN
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.5 6.9 2.5
REGION 5TIL, IN, MI, MN, OH, Wl
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.8 10.4 3.5
REGION 6: AR, LA, NM, OK, TX
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.7 2.2 2.5
REGION 77IA, KS, MO, NE
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 2.0 8.5 3.9
REGION 8: CO, MT, ND, SD, UT, WY
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 2.2 3.3 3.2
REGION 9: AZ, CA, HI, NV, Guam, Am Samoa
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 1.0 1.1 1.5
REGION 10: AK, ID, OR, WA
Emission per CO2 SO2 NOx
kWh saved: 0.1 0.5 0.3
Note: State pollution emission factors arc
aggregated by EPA region. Factors for U.S.
territories are national average emission factors.
See the Green Lights Lighting Upgrade Manu.il
-------
REPORTKALC

ReportKalc is a new software tool
that simplifies and speeds the Green
Lights reporting process. It reduces
your reporting effort while providing
EPA with accurate and timely data.
Based on the current Green Lights
Implementation Report form, the
program uses the same equipment
and activity codes. Instead of filling
out the form, you will enter the
information on your computer and
send a diskette to EPA.

ReportKalc automatically calculates
several of the required values, such
as lighting savings (including lighting
load reduction, electricity reduction,
and percent lighting savings). It will
also calculate energy cost savings,
internal rate of return (IRR), and
amount of pollution prevented, if
enough additional data are entered.

Several program features make
reporting easier and enhance
accuracy. ReportKalc provides pop-
up picklists for items that require
report codes (such as fixture type,
lamp type). The program also
includes features that enable you to
export and import reports from other
staff in your organization,
maintaining a central reporting
source. Furthermore, ReportKalc
checks the report for incomplete or
inconsistent data (e.g., operating
hours that do not reflect the use of
controls).

ReportKalc will run on most IBM PC-
compatible computers, and a user's
manual and context-specific help
screens will guide your data entry.
The program has the following
minimum hardware requirements.

* 286 or higher CPU

» hard disk with at least 4
megabytes available
* 640K RAM with at least 512K
free
» DOS version 3.X, 5.X, or 6.X
(DOS version 4.X is not
supported)

EPA will mail ReportKalc (including
a disk with all data previously
reported to EPA) to the Green Lights
Implementation Director (GLID) with
the anniversary letter. You can also
request it by calling the Green Lights
Customer Service Hotline (202-775-
6650).
ANSWERS TO

COMMON

QUESTIONS

How often do I need to
submit reports?

The Memorandum of Understanding
(MOU) only requires that you submit
reports annually. However,
reporting on a more frequent basis
— such as upon individual project
completion — provides the following
benefits.

<* Timely updates enable frequent
reevaluation of the effectiveness
of Green Lights in preventing
pollution and reducing energy
consumption.

•*• Frequent reporting involves a
less concentrated effort than
annual reporting, resulting in
less potential interference with
normal business activities.

*• Success stories (i.e., case
studies) can be identified and
publicized soon after
installations are complete.

«• EPA can adapt support
programs to be more responsive
to Partner needs.
You should submit reports as soon
as possible after a project has been
completed. Once you have
completed the lighting upgrade
report for an entire building, you
have no further reporting obligations
until you resurvey the building and
reanalyze your upgrade options.
Under the terms of the MOU, a
resurvey (and subsequent re-up-
grade if profitable) is required no
later than five years after completing
an upgrade.
How will EPA use this
information?

EPA expects the Green Lights
program to have a significant impact
on improving US energy efficiency
and protecting the global
environment. The collected data will
be entered into a database for
retrieval and analysis. Reports of
aggregate results and case studies
will be generated; however, case
studies will be published only after
receiving your permission. The
following list provides examples of
how EPA will use these data.

S monitoring program
effectiveness

S monitoring participation by
Partners and Allies

S projecting demand for lighting
equipment supply

S communicating between
participants and program staff

S identifying case studies

S communicating program
accomplishments
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
What if I do not have all
of the necessary data
for the report?

You can obtain most of the
information requested on the form
from your lighting survey
documentation. If you are having
outside professionals conduct
your lighting surveys and
analyses, ask them to provide all
of the requested information as
part of their service. The level of
analysis needed to verify that your
project maximizes energy savings
will often dictate that this informa-
tion be collected or calculated.
However, in cases where certain
data are unavailable, please call
the Green Lights Hotline at (202)
862-1145.

Forms will be returned to you if any
of the following data are missing.

Facility Information (Section 1)

• all fields

Fixture Information (Sections 2
and 3)

• complete the following for each
unique fixture configuration for
both before and after conditions

- number of fixtures
- lamp type
- lamp wattage
lamps/fixture
- ballast type
- wattage per fixture
- operating hours/year

Controls (Sections 4 and 5)

* all fields

Project Costs (Section 9)

• total project cost
Lighting Savings (Section 10)

• all fields
Are alternate formats
acceptable?

Green, Lights cannot accept
alternate formats. Deviations from
EXHIBIT 1
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR SECTION 10, LIGHTING SAVINGS

Lighting Load Reduced is the decrease in electrical demand
expressed in kW.

How to calculate: [(A x B) - (C x D)]/1000
Sample calculation: [(5 x 190) - (5 x 62)]/1000 = 0.64 kW

Note: Calculated values need to be summed over all fixture types
to arrive at total savings.

Electricity Reduction is the decrease in electrical consumption
expressed in kWh/yr.

How to calculate: [(A x B x E) - (C x D x F)]/1000
Sample calculation: [(5 x 190 x 4000) - (5 x 62 x 3500)]/1000 =
2,715kWh/yr

% Lighting Savings is the overall reduction in lighting energy
consumption, expressed as a percentage.

How to calculate:/(E/ecfricrty reduction x 1000)/(A xBxE)]x100
Sample calculation: [(2,715 x 1000)/(5 x 190 x 4000)] x 100 = 71%

Energy Cost Savings is the energy savings expressed in dollars.

How to calculate: Electricity reduction x $/kwh
Sample calculation: 2,715 x $0.075 = $204/yr

Note: $/kWh = what you pay for each kWh. Average kWh rate or a
rate that incorporates both demand and usage changes may be
used (the latter will be more accurate).

S Internal Rate of Return (IRR) is a more advanced form of
payback that includes various costs and benefits (i.e., maintenance,
taxes, inflation) over a specified period, usually the useful life of the
lighting system (15 to 20 years). It can be calculated using the IRR
function featured in most spreadsheet programs. The Green Lights
Decision Support System (GUDSS), Quikalc, and IRRkalc also
perform this function. Quikalc and IRRkalc are both available from
the Green Lights Electronic Bulletin Board (modem: 202-775-6671).

Note: Please do not leave this section blank. If you are unable to
calculate IRR, please contact your ISS for assistance. Alternately,
refer to Financial Considerations.
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS IMPLEMENTATION REPORT
OMH tt 21KJIMI255 l'\|>.

SURVEY REPORT
(/ill in sections 1,2,4,6, and 12 below;

COMPLETED PROJECT REPORT
(fill in sections 1-12 below)
Date:
Page of
(aiixch_itfJdnt-TONi PC ZQOO6
New Construction?
Yes No
2. LIGHTING FIXTURES BEFORE UPGRADE (>me codes on back)
Fixture
Type*
Fixture
Quantity
Lamp
Type*
Lamp
Wattage
Lamps
Fixture
Lamps7
Ballast
Wattage
per F Fixture
Lighting
hours year
4. LIGHTING CONTROLS BEFORE UPGRADE
Typel-
Quantity
Type 2-
Quantity
Type 3*
6. MAINTENANCE METHODS BEFORE UPGRADE
Group relamping?
Yes No Fixture cleaning?
Yes No
Facility Manager:
Telephone No./FAX No.
Total Floorspace for this Facility:
Floorspace included in this report:
Is this the FIRST report sent to EPA for this floorspace?
3"ANE DOE
\ g O, OOP
sq.ll
1 I O . OOP
Yes No
3. LIGHTING FIXTURES AFTER UPGRADE
{*itsc codes on back)
Upgrade
Type*
Fixture
Type*
Fixture
Quantity
Lamp
Type*
Lamp
Wattage
Lamps
Fixture
Type*
Lamps
Wattage
per Fixtuie
Lighting
hours ye.ii
3,500
5. LIGHTING CONTROLS AFTER UPGRADE
Type I •
Quantity
Type r
Quantity
Type 3'
Quantity
7. MAINTENANCE METHODS AFTER UPGRADE
Group relamping?
Yes No Fixture cleaning?
Yes No
«. COMMENTS
9. PROJECT COSTS
Survey
Administrative
Materials
Installation Labor
Disposal/Recycling Costs:
Other Costs
Total Project Cost
Ki.-bates/Grants
10. LIGHTING SAVINGS
Lighting Load Reduced
Electricity Reduction
% Lighting Savings
Energy Cost Savings
Internal Rate of Return
Syr
11. IMPLEMENTATION METHODS:
Survey/Analysis*
Equipment Provider*
Installation Method*
Financing Method*
: use codes on the back for these entries
12. SIGNATURE
Are you? GL Implementation Director
Facility Manager Other
Send lo: Jackie Krieger, Green Lights. US-KI'A (.2n2.l -IDI M Si. SW, Washington DC 2(M(>u
I-.AX lo (202i 775-66XII l-'or questions call llir diivn l.iulils lechnical hotline' 2tl2-77S-(lio(i
-------
the standard one-page form add
confusion and expense in data
processing, and affect the accuracy
and interpretation of data.
Electronic reporting is under
development. Meanwhile, please
submit reports on the standard one-
page form.
Should I fill out reports
for projects completed
before joining Green
Lights?

You should report projects
completed within 18 months of
joining the program, provided they
maximize energy savings as stated
in the MOD. (This approach avoids
penalizing companies that began
lighting upgrades while they were
considering joining the Green Lights
program.) If a project does not meet
this criterion, you should survey the
space and analyze the options for
maximizing energy savings. You
should implement and report any
options that are profitable and
maintain or enhance lighting quality.
What if I have a fixture
for which there is no
code?

Please explain any such problems in
the "General Comments" field in
Section 8. Use this field to provide
supporting information to explain
any data entries that may be
confusing or unusual. You may also
use this field to convey suggestions
or requests to Green Lights program
staff. Alternately, if you have
questions, call the Green Lights
Technical Hotline at (202) 862-1145,
or fax your questions to (202) 862-
1144.
What if I do not have
cost-effective
upgrades?

If you have already upgraded (or
constructed) with energy-efficient
lighting systems and controls, and
no lighting upgrade options pass the
20% IRR profitability test, simply fill
out the following sections.

-^ all fields in Section One

-•» "before upgrade" data fields in
Section Two

-> note that your survey revealed
no cost-effective upgrades in
Section Eight

If this project was completed less
than 18 months before joining the
Green Lights program, please
submit a complete report.

Sometimes, you will have a few
fixture types for which there are no
cost-effective upgrades, while others
can be upgraded. If so, fill out the
report, and list all fixture types.
Leave the "after upgrade" section
blank for those fixture types where
there are no cost-effective upgrade
options.
How do I report on a
building where
upgrades are planned in
two or more separate
phases?

Two options may apply, and you
should choose the most appropriate.

Option 1: Upgrade projects are
completed in technology-based
phases

Certain fixtures or controls are
commonly upgraded sooner than
others. If so, update and submit the
report at the end of each installation
phase. Enter the appropriate data
(before and after installation) in
Sections 2 and 3, and enter the
current cumulative project costs and
lighting savings in Sections 9 and
10. As subsequent phases are
completed, simply submit a new
implementation report that updates
the cumulative upgrades, controls,
costs, and savings for the entire
building to date. In such cases,
indicate in Section 1 that the report
is not the first report sent to EPA.

Option 2: Comprehensive upgrade
projects are completed in separate
sections of a building

Submit separate reports for separate
phases of the comprehensive
lighting project. The "Floorspace
included-this report" field should
reflect the square footage
corresponding to the portion of the
upgraded building. Make sure that
all separate reports submitted for the
facility, when added, address the
entire facility floorspace.
(Alternately, you may report such
projects on a single form using
Option 1.)
We have just completed
the construction of a
new facility. Do I need
to fill out a report?

Yes. If the lighting design complies
with the ASHRAE/IES 90.1-1989
standard, simply fill out the
implementation report, leaving
Sections 2, 4, and 6-11 blank.
Remember to check the New
Construction box in Section 1. In
cases where you have improved the
lighting design from a less efficient
"base design," you should also fill in
Sections 7-11 as appropriate.

If the lighting design does not
comply with the ASHRAE/IES 90.1-
1989 standard, do not submit an
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
implementation report until you have
Begun the process of surveying and
upgrading the building with energy-
efficient lighting retrofits. Reports
submitted in these unique cases
should have the "new construction"
box checked [NO] in Section 1.
How do I calculate
internal rate of return?

Calculating IRR is an iterative
process, which accounts for the cash
flow of a project over a specific
period (usually 10 to 20 years). The
IRR is easily calculated using the
IRR function featured in standard
spreadsheet programs. The Green
Lights Decision Support System
(GL/DSS), Quikalc, and IRRkalc also
calculate IRR. You can only obtain
GL/DSS through an EPA-sponsored
workshop. Call (202) 862-1145 for
dates and locations. Quikalc and
IRRkalc are available from the
Green Lights Electronic Bulletin
Board (modem: (202) 775-6671).
May I use the pollution
prevention factors for
my area?

Yes, you may use the pollution
prevention factors (emissions per
kWh) for your local utility. Call your
utility and ask for them. Or, you
can use the state-by-state listing of
regional pollution prevention factors
listed on the back of the form.
May I submit
Implementation Reports
electronically?

Electronic reporting software is now,
available. See the ReportKalc
section for more information (page
5).
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10

NOTES:
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11
NOTES:
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

Green Lights is an exciting and innovative program
sponsored by the US Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) that encourages major US
corporations and other organizations to install
energy-efficient lighting technologies.

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.
\
Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Waste Disposal is one of a series of
documents known collectively as the Lighting
Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

9 (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
Air oreen
Lights
Progress Reporting • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Publicity
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA 430-8-95-006
January 1995
COMMUNICATING
GREEN LIGHTS
SUCCESS
Green
^ Lights
A major benefit of participating in Green Lights is the
positive recognition you receive as an environmental
leader. Joining Green Lights can help you create
better customer relations, a friendlier atmosphere for
employee's, and a better reputation in your business
community. Successfully communicating your
involvement in the program is critical to receiving this
recognition.
ACTION CHECKLIST
s Educate your employees on the goals and
benefits of Green Lights.

^ Incorporate the Green Lights logo and message
appropriately into employee newsletters,
advertisements, promotional activities, and
reports.

^ Issue news releases and place advertisements.

^ Participate in the Partner/Ally of the Year
competition.

s Use Earth Day as an opportunity to publicize your
Green Lights involvement.

This document focuses on how you can effectively
communicate your Green Lights success to your
employees and the public. Several tools exist — such
as the Green Lights logo, news releases, and
advertising — that help the public understand and
recognize your efforts. The following sections
describe each communications opportunity and
suggest ways for you to use them to your advantage.
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLIST 1

EMPLOYEE EDUCATION 2

GREEN LIGHTS LOGO AND MESSAGE 2

NEWS RELEASES 3

ADVERTISING 3

PARTNER/ALLY OF THE YEAR AWARDS 4

COMMUNICATE YOUR PARTNERSHIP
TO THE PUBLIC 6

PROMOTIONAL RESOURCES 6
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EMPLOYEE

EDUCATION

Your employees are key participants
in your efforts to prevent pollution.
Notify them of your organization's
participation in Green Lights as soon
as possible after you join, and keep
them informed throughout the
lighting upgrade process. You can
use the following activities to
educate employees about the
lighting changes you are making.

"~ Announce your Green Lights
participation around the office.
Write articles in employee
newsletters, and quantify and
publicize the pollution you have
prevented through Green Lights
upgrades. Reproduce and
distribute Green Lights literature.

"• Organize environmental
awareness events highlighting
your commitment to Green
Lights. For example, conduct
tours of your lighting upgrade
process, or work with your local
utility to display energy efficient
products.
*• Use posters to publicize Green
Lights and identify the person(s)
in your organization who can
answer employee questions
about the program.

^ Install trial upgrades to
demonstrate the efficiency and
quality improvements of your
upgrades.

Keep employees aware of your
organization's ongoing upgrade
progress and resulting savings to
maintain their support. Quantify the
savings you achieve through lighting
efficiency in terms of energy
reduction, cost avoidance, or
pollution prevention. Use the
pollution prevention and energy
equivalents below to communicate
this information in real terms.
GREEN LIGHTS
LOGO AND
MESSAGE

Creative and appropriate use of the
Pollution Prevention and
Energy Equivalents

f 3.450 kWh/yr = 1 acre of
trees planted (CO2)
*• 7,060 kWh/yr = 1 car
removed from the road
(C02)
*• 11 kWh = 1 gallon of
gasoline saved (energy)
Green Lights Logo is an easy way to
associate your organization with this
quickly growing pollution prevention
program. Use of this environmental
symbol and the message it
represents identifies your
organization as a leader in energy-
efficiency and pollution prevention.
You are encouraged to incorporate it
in all of your communication
materials, including newsletters.
promotional brochures,
merchandising, annual reports, and
advertising.

Current participants use the logo in a
variety of ways to visually connect
their organization to protection of the
environment. For example, the
Goodyear blimp flew over Ohio,
SAMPLE PARTNER NEWS RELEASE

[YOUR ORGANIZATION] BECOMES PARTNER IN GREEN LIGHTS PROGRAM

[Your organization] has joined in a nationwide,effort to reduce energy consumption.

[Your organization] announced today that it has signed on as a Partner in the Environmental Protection
Agency's Green Lights Program — an innovative, voluntary program designed to reduce energy
consumption through installation of energy-efficient lighting in US businesses.

As a Green Lights Partner, [your organization] will survey all of its facilities and replace lighting with more
efficient fixtures wherever possible. "Through our voluntary participation in Green Lights, we are
demonstrating that business and environment can work together. We can save money and energy at the
same time," says [VIP name and title here].

According to government estimates, lighting accounts for 25 percent of the nation's yearly consumption of
electricity, with half of that consumed by inefficient lighting. With installation of more efficient lighting,
energy consumption could be reduced by more than 10 percent.

For more information, contact [your name, title, and number here].
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
SAMPLE ALLY NEWS RELEASE

[YOUR ORGANIZATION] BECOMES ALLY IN GREEN LIGHTS PROGRAM

[Your organization] has joined in a nationwide effort to reduce energy consumption.

[Your organization] announced today that it has signed on as an Ally in the Environmental Protection
Agency's Green Lights Program — an innovative, voluntary program designed to reduce energy
consumption through installation of energy-efficient lighting in US businesses.

As a Green Lights Ally, [your organization] will survey all of its facilities and replace lighting with more
efficient fixtures wherever possible. It will also help EPA educate industry and encourage the development
of energy-efficient technologies.

For more information, contact [your name, title, and number here].
Florida, and California displaying on
its side the Green Lights logo and a
message about energy-efficient
lighting. Other participants have
used the logo in TV public service
announcements and on banners,
company vehicles, and buttons.
You can also use the logo on
internal communications, including
newsletters, posters, and as part of
employee awareness activities.

Organizations have used the Green
Lights logo as a versatile tool to
easily communicate their
involvement in a brighter future in
the following ways.

* promotional videos
* posters
* letterhead
* report covers
* T-shirts
* bumper stickers
* wall plaques
* vehicles (top and sides)
* advertisements

Some organizations have creatively
used the Green Lights logo to suit
their needs. For instance, the TBS
"Captain Planet" superhero
displayed the logo in several
segments dealing with energy-
efficiency.
NEWS RELEASES

The media is a powerful forum for
organizations to communicate their
concern for the environment to the
public. Make sure your efforts
receive the attention they deserve
by informing the local media of your
activities, particularly any special
events you have planned.

Draft a comprehensive news
release, covering the who, what,
where, when, how, and why for your
event. You may not be able to
address all of these angles, but
include as many as you can. If you
plan to have VIPs at your event,
invite them to be a part of your news
release by submitting a quotation.
Make sure that you verify their titles
and roles, and that they approve the
news release before it is issued.
(See the sample news releases.)
After you draft the news release,
send it to the attention of the media
— including TV, radio, and daily and
weekly newspapers. A day or two
before the event, call your media
contacts and confirm that they are
aware of your event, and ask if they
plan to attend. Mention any VIPs
who will be there. It may also be
helpful to give the reporters a packet
of information with the release, such
as a fact sheet or other information
on Green Lights or your
organization. For those media
contacts on your list who do not
attend, fax them the release, and let
them know you are available to
answer questions.
ADVERTISING
A Green Lights advertisement is
another way for you to get your
efforts recognized by your
customers and community. EPA
has already produced six public
service advertisements of its own,
some of which include participating
organizations' logos. You can
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
request to place these
advertisements in local periodicals,
business newspapers, environmental
magazines, and trade organization
newsletters. These advertisements
use the following slogans.

* "Do A World Of Good!"
* "An Environmental Revolution
From Top To Bottom"
* "Strike A Blow For The
Environment"
* "The Environment Breathes A
Little Easier Thanks To These
Companies"
•*• "Judge Us By The Companies
We Keep"
* "Brightest Among Equals"

You can create your own print
advertisements using Green Lights
information and logos. These
advertisements can highlight your
unique contributions to the program,
such as the square footage of office
space you have committed to the
program. You can also express the
carbon dioxide reductions resulting
from your lighting upgrades in terms
of trees planted or cars removed
from the road.

Radio and TV advertising are also
reliable ways to promote your Green
Lights events or activities. Once
you have identified the stations in
your area, call for rates and ask
about the required ad format. Those
stations with the largest markets will
be more expensive, but your ads will
also be seen or heard by a greater
number of people. You should also
ask stations about their policy
regarding public service
announcements (PSAs). They are
required by the Federal
Communications Commission to run
PSAs. Generally stations will run
PSAs of interest to the community
for free, on a time-available basis.
Following are some sample ads that
you can personalize and use. When
creating your own, keep them short
and catchy.
"Did you know that [your
organization], and more than 1,500
other organizations across the
country are offering a solution to our
country's air pollution problems
through their voluntary work with
EPA's Green Lights program? Using
energy-efficient lighting has saved
[amount of kilowatt-hours or dollars]
over [length of time]. You can make
a difference too! To learn more,
please call Green Lights at (202)
775-6650." (45 seconds)

"You can cut your lighting electricity
bill by as much as 45 percent.
Sound impossible? Not if you join
EPA's Green Lights program and
upgrade your lighting. [Your
organization] joined Green Lights in
[year], and we've saved [dollar
amount] annually since then. To
learn more, call Green Lights at
(202) 775-6650." (15 seconds)

"Did you know that if all commercial
and industrial businesses in the US
joined the EPA's Green Lights
program and installed energy-
efficient lighting, we would prevent
the annual pollution equivalent of 44
million vehicles. That's like taking
one-third of all cars off the road. And
we're only talking about lighting!
Volunteer to save energy by calling
the Green Lights program at (202)
775-6650." (30 seconds)
PARTNER AND ALLY
OFTHE YEAR
AWARDS
Each year the Green Lights program
recognizes the most outstanding
efforts to create energy-efficient
working environments among its
Partners and Allies. The awards
acknowledge excellence and
accomplishment in Green Lights. In
addition, the winning organizations
are able to use the respective logos
for a year and receive EPA
promotion'through the Green Lights
Update and other activities.

Winners can also develop their own
promotional materials, such as news
releases and advertisements. An
internal announcement developed
by Mobil to publicize winning Partner
of the Year for 1994 is presented on
page 5.

Awards are based on participants'
implementation progress as well as
their promotion of Green Lights and
energy-efficiency to their employees
and the general public. Winners of
Partner and Ally of the Year awards
have initiated the following
innovative promotional activities.

* Mobil developed and placed an
Op Ed ad promoting Green
Lights and pollution prevention.
This ad appeared in the New
York Times, the Washington
Post, Roll Call, the Los Angeles
Times, and USA Today.

* Mobil negotiated a national
contract, enabling employees to
purchase energy efficient light
sources for their homes.

* Cooper Lighting promoted the
Green Lights program through
articles in Retail Store Image.

The Arizona Public Service
Company (APS) sponsored local
broadcasts of the "Green Lights
Environmental Showcase" public
affairs TV special. The show
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
That's what U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) Adminis-
trator Carol M. Browner called
volunteer participants in its Green
Lights program, a nationwide
initiative to reduce air pollution
and improve the environment.
It encourages U.S. institutions,
businesses, governments, and
other organizations to voluntarily
switch to energy-efficient lighting, and to save
money doing it.
Green Lights observed its third anniver-
sary on January 19, and already nearly 1,250
companies participate. In the best American
tradition, it's a program where everybody
wins. Here's how it works:
Electric lighting now accounts for about
25 percent of the electricity this country uses.
The EPA estimates that if everyone switched
to energy-efficient lighting, we could cut our
national electric bill by $16 billion. Says
Browner, "We could invest that money in a
stronger economic future with the added ben-
efit of less acid rain, less smog, and healthier
American families."
Scientists estimate that if everyone
switched to energy-efficient lighting, 1.3 mil-
lion metric tons of sulfur dioxide, 600,000
metric tons of nitrogen oxides, and millions of
tons of other emissions such as carbon diox-
ide could be eliminated every year. To say
nothing of the wear and tear the nation's
power grid experienced last month, when a
third of the nation shivered in a record deep
freeze and experienced unprecedented
demand that caused rolling brownouts in the
mid-Atlantic states.
In addition to all that, energy-efficient
lighting saves good money—and lots of it.
Mobil can vouch for it: Green Lights works—in
spades. We joined Green Lights just two
EPA
Green
Lights
PARTNER OF THE YEAR 1994
years ago, and in facilities across
the country, we've reduced light-
ing energy consumption by nine
million kilowatt hours, or 49 per-
cent. Our investment to achieve
those reductions totals $800,000
—a lot of money. But we're seeing
savings of about $600,000 a year
and rising, which gives us a pay-
back on our investment in less
than one-and-a-half years. We achieved this
through a volunteer network of our own facili-
ties managers—who worked closely with EPA
support groups, set up implementation teams
and undertook their own initiatives, and who
believe in the program so fervently that they
go out and recruit other businesses and orga-
nizations to join.
We're proud to say that the EPA recog-
nized our team's efforts in January by naming
Mobil its first "Partner of the Year" nationwide
for outstanding achievement in implementing
energy-saving lighting.
Mobil's Robert 0. Swanson, senior vice
president, who accepted the award in Wash-
ington, D.C., said, "The EPA's Green Lights
program is an outstanding voluntary initiative
to save energy and protect the environment
based on sound business principles that
every investment must have an appropriate
return. It also proves that cooperation and
consultation work better than adversarial and
regulatory approaches."
If your group would like to help the envi-
ronment and save money doing it—you can
call the EPA's Green Lights Hot Line at (202)
775-6650, or write to: EM Green Lights Pro-
gram, 401 M Street, S.W. (6202J), Washing-
ton, D.C. 20460
Volunteers are some of our nation's
brightest lights—and in this case, those lights
are green. And that means go for it.
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
featured a call-in number for viewers
to request additional information on
Green Lights.
COMMUNICATE
YOUR

PARTNERSHIP TO
THE PUBLIC

The following activities, among
many others, enable you to share
your Green Lights success with the
public.

'^ Open your doors to conduct
educational tours of your
facilities to demonstrate the
energy efficiency of your Green
Lights upgrades.

•tr Describe your Green Lights
Partnership in your
organization's annual
environmental report newsletter
or in a news release. '

:lr Invite the press to your Earth
Day activities to promote Green
Lights, energy efficiency, and
your environmental leadership.

<*• Spread the word that energy
efficiency means pollution
prevention.
Challenge Others to
Prevent Pollution

The following activities can
encourage pollution prevention in
your office or your business
community.

•T Distribute environmental pledge
cards for employees to sign
stating that they will conserve
energy. (The following page
presents a sample pledge card.)
:lr Give employees and customers
an energy-efficient light bulb or
replace disposable cups with a
mug with the Green Lights logo.

<*• Encourage your local and state
governments, businesses,
schools, and community groups
to join Green Lights. In addition,
you can call or write Green
Lights with your referrals.

cff- Set up a lighting technology
booth at a public fair or at your
facility. Identify your audience
(e.g., employees, general
public), and place the booth so
you have maximum visibility
with that audience. Consider
your technical needs (e.g.,
extension cords, electrical
outlets), and prepare materials
and handouts. Train your staff
and schedule them based on
expected traffic patterns.
Educate Your
Employees

*• Reaffirm that making simple
changes in purchasing habits —
such as choosing energy-
efficient or recycled products —
can help preserve the
environment.

<*• Use the Green Lights logo on
posters, and use EPA's "We're
doing a world of good" poster,
which has space for you to
identify how much energy your
organization saves through
lighting efficiency.

•-*• Sponsor Green Lights (or Earth
Day) poster, essay, and
photograph contests.

<*• Develop an award program to
recognize individual
environmental achievements.
Present a certificate, button or
plaque with the Green Lights
logo to the employee who finds
a new way to save energy.

Earth Day
Promotional Activities

Earth Day — April 22 — is an
excellent opportunity for Green
Lights participants to communicate
their past successes and future
goals in protecting the environment.
On this day of environmental
celebration, you can spotlight your
commitment to Green Lights in
several ways: communicate your
efforts to the public, challenge
others to prevent pollution, and
educate your employees.
PROMOTIONAL
RESOURCES
The Green Lights program has
several promotional resources
available that enable participants to
communicate their Green Lights
activity. These tools can be used
within your organization as well as
outside it.
» Green Lights: An Enlightened
Approach — booklet providing a
concise description of the goals,
objective, process, and progress
of the program

» Green Lights Case Studies —
histories of successful Green
Lights upgrades that maximize
savings and pollution prevention

* Sample Participant News
Releases — examples of how
participants are telling the story
of their Green Lights
membership to the public

* Sample Participant Newsletters
— examples of how participants
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
are communicating their Green
Lights membership internally

» Green Lights Pollution
Prevention Sheet — an easy
way to calculate and
demonstrate the environmental
impact of your organization's
participation in Green Lights

* Green Lights Poster: We're
Doing a World of Good. — a
visible record of your
organization's energy savings
through lighting efficiency

* Green Lights Endorsers —
membership organizations (e.g.,
trade associations, research
institutes, professional societies)
who agree to inform and
educate their members about
the benefits of energy-efficient
lighting and Green Lights; they
promote the program by
providing Green Lights
information to their members,
publishing articles in
newsletters, scheduling
presentations, and sponsoring
Green Lights public service
announcements
SAMPLE PLEDGE CARD

{Name of Your Organization]
Make a difference on Earth Day and Every Day!

s Conserve energy — it's the easiest way to prevent pollution. Purchase energy-efficient products.
•/ Conserve water. Turn off water while shaving or brushing teeth. Fix leaky faucets. Install water-saving shower
heads and faucet aerators.
S Reduce and reuse disposable products. Reuse grocery bags or use cloth bags. Bring a coffee cup to work. Buy
refills whenever possible. Make two-sided copies. Share reading materials with co-workers.
s Recycle newspapers, glass, plastic, paper, and aluminum cans.
s Buy recycled and recyclable products.
•/ Speak out! Urge your local stores to carry environmentally friendly products and to establish recycling operations.

I pledge to think globally and act locally at home, at work, and while shopping.
Q conserve energy
Q conserve water
Q reduce and reuse
Q recycle
Q buy recycled
a speak out
Signature:_
Title/Department:_

Phone:
Return this pledge card to [your department] in order to officially register your participation and to become eligible for a
special environmental award (e.g., an energy-efficient light bulb, a mug, a reusable cloth bag).

Remember, every small choice adds up to a big difference!
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.'

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Communicating Green Lights Success is one of a
series of documents known collectively as the Lighting
Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
» Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
Lighting Maintenance
Lighting Evaluations
The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

8 (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202)775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
All oreen
^ Lights
Communicating Green Lights Success • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
TECHNICAL
-------
Fundamentals
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA 430-B-95-007
January 1995
LIGHTING
FUNDAMENTALS
Teen
Lights
A basic understanding of lighting fundamentals is
essential for specifiers and decision-makers who are
evaluating lighting upgrades. This document provides
a brief overview of design parameters, technologies,
and terminology used in the lighting industry. For
more detailed information about specific energy-
efficient lighting technologies, refer to the Lighting
Upgrade Technologies document.
ILLUMINATION
Quantity of Illumination

Exhibit 1 shows the interaction between light output,
light level, and brightness. Although they are
quantitative measures, they directly affect the quality
of illumination.

Light Output

The most common measure of light output (or
luminous flux) is the lumen. Light sources are labeled
with an output rating in lumens. For example, a T12
40-watt fluorescent lamp may have a rating of 3050
lumens. Similarly, a light fixture's output can be
expressed in lumens. As lamps and fixtures age and
become dirty, their lumen output decreases (i.e.,
lumen depreciation occurs). Most lamp ratings are
based on initial lumens (i.e., when the lamp is new).

Light Level

Light intensity measured on a plane at a specific
location is called illuminance. Illuminance is
measured in footcandles, which are workplane
lumens per square foot. You can measure illuminance
using a light meter located on the work surface where
tasks are-performed. Using simple arithmetic and
manufacturers' photometric data, you can predict
illuminance for a defined space. (Lux is the metric unit
for illuminance, measured in lumens per square meter.
To convert footcandles to lux, multiply footcandles by
10.76.)
CONTENTS
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT SOURCES
BALLASTS
LUMINAIRES
SELECTED REFERENCES.
GLOSSARY

. .. 1
4
11
13
.. 15
20

Brightness

Another measurement of light is luminance,
sometimes called brightness. This measures light
"leaving" a surface in a particular direction, and
considers the illuminance on the surface and the
reflectance of the surface.
EXHIBIT 1
LIGHT OUTPUT'
(Luminous Flux)
LUMENS
LIGHT LEVEL
(Illuminance)
FOOTCANDLES (Ims/sf.)
t
BRIGHTNESS
(Luminance)
FOOTLAMBEHTS
WorX Plane
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
! Quantity Measures

Luminous flux is commonly
called light output and is
measured in lumens (Im).

Illuminance is called light
level and is measured in
footcandles (fc).

~ Luminance is referred to as
brightness and is measured
in footlamberts (fL) or
candelas/m2 (cd/m2).
The human eye does not see
illuminance; it sees luminance.
Therefore, the amount of light de-
livered into the space and the re-
flectance of the surfaces in the
space affects your ability to see.

Refer to the glossary at the end of
this document for more detailed
definitions.

Determining Target Light
Levels

The Illuminating Engineering Society
of North America has developed a
procedure for determining the
appropriate average light level for a
particular space. This procedure —
used extensively by designers and
engineers — recommends a target
light level by considering the
following.

* the task(s) being performed
(contrast, size, etc.)
* the ages of the occupants
* the importance of speed and
accuracy

Then, the appropriate type and
quantity of lamps and light fixtures
may be selected based on the
following.

# fixture efficiency
* lamp lumen output
* the reflectance of surrounding
surfaces
» the effects of light losses from
lamp lumen depreciation and
dirt accumulation
» room size and shape
» availability of natural light
(daylight)

When designing a new or
upgraded lighting system, one
must be careful to avoid
overlighting a space. In the past,
spaces were designed for as much
as 200 footcandles in places where
50 footcandles may not only be
adequate, but superior. This was
partly due to the misconception
that the more light in a space, the
higher the quality. Not only does
overlighting waste energy, but it can
also reduce lighting quality. Refer to
Exhibit 2 for light levels
recommended by the Illuminating
Engineering Society of North
America. Within a listed range of
illuminance, three factors dictate the
Quality of Illumination

Improvements in lighting quality can
yield high dividends for US business-
es. Gains in worker productivity may
result by providing corrected light
levels with reduced glare. Although
the cost of energy for lighting is
substantial, it is small compared with
the cost of labor. Therefore, these
gains in productivity may be even
more valuable than the energy
savings associated with new lighting
technologies. In retail spaces,
attractive and comfortable lighting
designs can attract clientele and
enhance sales.

Three quality issues are addressed
in this section.

=»• glare
^ uniformity of illuminance
^ color rendition
Quality Measures

*• Visual comfort probability (VCP) indicates the percent of
people who are comfortable with the glare from a fixture.

*• Spacing criteria (SC) refers to the maximum recommended
distance between fixtures to ensure uniformity.

<^" Color rendering index (CRI) indicates the color appearance of
an object under a source as compared to a reference source.
proper level: age of the occupant(s),
speed and accuracy requirements,
and background contrast.

For example, to light a space that
uses computers, the overhead light
fixtures should provide up to 30 fc of
ambient lighting. The task lights
should provide the additional
footcandles needed to achieve a
total illuminance of up to 50 fc for
reading and writing. For
illuminance recommendations for
specific visual tasks, refer to the IES
Lighting Handbook, 1993, or to the
IES Recommended Practice No. 24
(for VDT lighting).
Glare

Perhaps the most important factor
with respect to lighting quality is
glare. Glare is a sensation caused
by luminances in the visual field that
are too bright. Discomfort,
annoyance, or reduced productivity
can result.

A bright object alone does not
necessarily cause glare, but a bright
object in front of a dark background,
however, usually will cause glare.
Contrast is the relationship between
the luminance of an object and its
background. Although the visual
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
task generally becomes easier with
increased contrast, too much
contrast causes glare and makes the
visual task much more difficult.

You can reduce glare or luminance
ratios by not exceeding suggested
light levels and by using lighting
equipment designed to reduce glare.
A louver or lens is commonly used
to block direct viewing of a light
source. Indirect lighting, or
uplighting, can create a low glare
environment by uniformly lighting
the ceiling. Also, proper fixture
placement can reduce reflected
glare on work surfaces or computer
screens. Standard data now
provided with luminaire
specifications include tables of its
EXHIBIT 2
RECOMMENDED LIGHT LEVELS
TYPE OF ACTIVITY
Public spaces with dark surroundings
Simple orientation for short temporary visits
(typical hallway)
Working spaces where visual tasks are only
occasionally performed
Ambient lighting for computer use
Performance of visual tasks
High contrast or large size (typical office)
Medium contrast or small size
Low contrast or very small size
Low contrast and very small size over a
prolonged period
Performance of very prolonged and exacting
visual tasks
Performance of very special visual tasks of
extremely low contrast and small size
RANGE OF
ILLUMINANCE
2-3-5 fc
5-7.5-1 Ofc
10-1 5-20 fc
20-25-30 fc
20-30-50 fc
50-75-1 00 fc
100-1 50-200 fc
200-300-500 fc
500-750-1 000 fc
1000-1 500-2000 fc
visual comfort probability (VCP)
ratings for various room geometries.
The VCP index provides an
indication of the percentage of
people in a given space that would
find the glare from a fixture to be
acceptable. A minimum VCP of 70
is recommended for commercial
interiors, while luminaires with VCPs
exceeding 80 are recommended in
computer areas,

Uniformity of Illuminance
on Tasks

The uniformity of illuminance is a
quality issue that addresses how
evenly light spreads over a task
area. Although a room's average
illuminance may be appropriate,
two factors may compromise
uniformity.

» improper fixture placement
based on the luminaire's
spacing criteria (ratio of
maximum recommended fixture
spacing distance to mounting
height above task height)

* fixtures that are retrofit with
reflectors that narrow the light
distribution

Non-uniform illuminance causes
several problems.

* inadequate light levels in some
areas

» visual discomfort when tasks
require frequent shifting of view
from underlit to overlit areas

* bright spots and patches of light
on floors and walls that cause
distraction and generate a low
quality appearance

Color Rendition

The ability to see colors properly is
another aspect of lighting quality.
Light sources vary in their ability to
accurately reflect the true colors of
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
people and objects. The color
rendering index (CRI) scale is used
to compare the effect of a light
source on the color appearance of
its surroundings.

A scale of 0 to 100 defines the CRI.
A higher CRI means better color
rendering, or less color shift. CRIs
in the range of 75-100 are
considered excellent, while 65-75
are good. The range of 55-65 is fair,
and 0-55 is poor. Under higher CRI
sources, surface colors appear
brighter, improving the aesthetics of
the space. Sometimes, higher CRI
sources create the illusion of higher
illuminance levels.

The CRI values for selected light
sources are tabulated with other
lamp data in Exhibit 3.
LIGHT SOURCES

Commercial, industrial, and retail
facilities use several different light
sources. Each lamp type has ,
particular advantages; selecting the
appropriate source depends on
installation requirements, life-cycle
cost, color qualities, dimming
capability, and the effect wanted.
Three types of lamps are commonly
used.

* incandescent
* fluorescent
» high intensity discharge
- mercury vapor
- metal halide
- high pressure sodium
- low pressure sodium "

Before describing each of these
lamp types, the following sections
describe characteristics that are
common to all of them.
Characteristics of Light
Sources

Electric light sources have three
characteristics: efficiency, color
temperature, and color rendering
index (CRI). Exhibit 4 summarizes
these characteristics.

Efficiency

Some lamp types are more efficient
in converting energy into visible light
than others. The efficacy of a lamp
refers to the number of lumens
leaving the iamp compared to the
number of watts required by the
lamp (and ballast). It is expressed in
lumens per watt. Sources with
higher efficacy require less electrical
energy to light a space.

Color Temperature

Another characteristic of a light
source is the color temperature.
This is a measurement of "warmth"
or "coolness" provided by the lamp.
People usually prefer a warmer
source in lower illuminance areas,
such as dining areas and living
rooms, and a cooler source in higher
illuminance areas, such as grocery
stores.

Color temperature refers to the color
of a blackbody radiator at a given
absolute temperature, expressed in
Kelvins. A blackbody radiator
changes color as its temperature
increases — first to red, then to
orange, yellow, and finally bluish
white at the highest temperature. A
"warm" color light source actually
has a lower color temperature. For
example, a cool-white fluorescent
lamp appears bluish in color with a
color temperature of around 4100 K.
A warmer fluorescent lamp appears
more yellowish with a color
temperature around 3000 K. Refer
to Exhibit 5 for color temperatures of
various light sources.
Color Rendering Index

The CRI is a relative scale (ranging
from 0 - 100). indicating how
perceived colors match actual
colors. It measures the degree that
perceived colors of objects,
illuminated by a given light source,
conform to the colors of those same
objects when they are lighted by a
reference standard light source. The
higher the color rendering index, the
less color shift or distortion occurs.

The CRI number does not indicate
which colors will shift or by how
much; it is rather an indication of the
average shift of eight standard
colors. Two different light sources
may have identical CRI values, but
colors may appear quite different
under these two sources.
Incandescent Lamps

Standard Incandescent
Lamp

Incandescent lamps are one of the
oldest electric lighting technologies
available. With efficacies ranging
from 6 to 24 lumens per watt,
incandescent lamps are the least
energy-efficient electric light source
and have a relatively short life (750-
2500 hours).

Light is produced by passing a
current through a tungsten filament,
causing it to become hot and glow.
With use, the tungsten slowly
evaporates, eventually causing the
filament to break.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 3
CRI VALUES FOR SELECTED LIGHT SOURCES
Source

Incandescent/Halogen

Fluorescent

Cool White T12
Warm White T12
High Lumen T12
T8
T10
Compact

Mercury Vapor (clear/coated)

Metal Halide (clear/coated)

High-Pressure Sodium

Standard
Deluxe
White HPS

Low-Pressure Sodium
Typical CRI Value

100
62
53
75-85
75-85
80-85
80-85

22/52

65/85
25
70
80

0-18
EXHIBIT 4
LAMP CHARACTERISTICS

Wattage
System
Efficacy
(Im/W)
Average
Rated Life
(hrs)
CRI
Life Cycle
Cost
Fixture Size
Start to Full
Brightness
Restrike Time
Lumen
Maintenance
Standard
Incandescent
3-1 ,500
6-24
750-2,000
95+
high
compact
immediate
immediate'
good/ excellent
Tungsten-
Halogen
10-1,500
18-33
2,000-
4,000
95+
high
compact
immediate
immediate
excellent
Fluorescent
4-215
50-100
7,500-24,000
49-92
low
extended
0-5 seconds
immediate
good
Compact
Fluorescent
5-40
50-80
10,000-
20,000
82-86
moderate
compact
0-1 min
immediate
good
Mercury
Vapor
40-1 ,250
25-50
24,000+
22-52
moderate
compact
2-5 min
3-1 0 min
poor/fair
Metal
Halide
32-2,000
50-115
6,000-
20,000
65-92
moderate
compact
2-5 min
1 0-20 min
good
High-
Pressure
Sodium
35-1 ,000
40-140
16,000-
24,000
21-80
low
compact
4-6 min
1 min
good/
excellent
Low-
Pressure
Sodium
18-180
120-180
12,000-
18,000
0-18
low
extended
10-1 5 min
immediate
excellent
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBITS
COLOR TEMPERATURES OF VARIOUS LIGHT SOURCES
9000
8500
8000
7500
7000
6500
6000
5500
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
= Northlight/Blue Sky
Overcast Sky
Daylight Fluorescent
Mercury Vapor
Summer Sunlight
Metal Halide
Cool White Fluorescent
4100°KTri-phosphor
Fluorescent
3500°K Tri-phosphor
Fluorescent
3000°K Tri-phosphor
Fluorescent
Halogen Incandescent
40-Watt Incandescent
Lamp
High Pressure
Sodium Lamps
Candle
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
These lamps are available in many
shapes and finishes. The two most
common types of shapes are the
common "A-type" lamp (shown
below) and the reflector-shaped
lamps (R-lamps or PAR lamps).

Incandescent A-Lamp
Filament
Exhaust
Tube
Bulb

Support
Wires
Button
Heat
Deflecting
Disc
Fuse
Base
Tungsten-Halogen Lamps

The tungsten halogen lamp is
another type of incandescent lamp.
In a halogen lamp, a small quartz
capsule contains the filament and a
halogen gas. The small capsule
size allows the filament to operate at
a higher temperature, which
produces light at a higher efficacy
than standard incandescents. The
halogen gas combines with the
evaporated tungsten, redepositing it
on the filament. This process
extends the life of the filament and
keeps the bulb wall from blackening
and reducing light output.

Because the filament is relatively
small, this source is often used
where a highly focused beam is
desired. Compact halogen lamps
are popular in retail applications for
display and accent lighting. In
addition, tungsten-halogen lamps
generally produce a whiter light than
other incandescent lamps, are more
efficient, last longer, and have
improved lamp lumen depreciation.
More efficient halogen lamps are
available. These sources use an
infrared coating on the quartz bulb
or an advanced reflector design to
redirect infrared light back to the
filament. The filament then glows
hotter and the efficiency of the
source is increased.
Fluorescent Lamps

Fluorescent lamps are the most
commonly used commercial light
source in North America. In fact,
fluorescent lamps illuminate 71% of
the commercial space in the United
States. Their popularity can be
attributed to their relatively high
efficacy, diffuse light distribution
characteristics, and long operating
life.

Fluorescent lamp construction
consists of a glass tube with the
following features.

• filled with an argon or argon-
krypton gas and a small amount
of mercury

• coated on the inside with
phosphors

• equipped with an electrode at
both ends

Fluorescent lamps provide light by
the following process.

«• An electric discharge (current)
is maintained between the
electrodes through the mercury
vapor and inert gas.
<»• This current excites the mercury
atoms, causing them to emit
non-visible ultraviolet (UV)
radiation.

«• This UV radiation is converted
into visible light by the
phosphors lining the tube.

Discharge lamps (such as
fluorescent) require a ballast to
provide correct starting voltage and
to regulate the operating current
after the lamp has started.

Full-Size Fluorescent Lamps

Full-size fluorescent lamps are
•available in several shapes,
including straight, U-shaped, and
circular configurations. Lamp
diameters range from 1" to 2.5".
The most common lamp type is the
four-foot (F40), 1.5" diameter (T12)
straight fluorescent lamp. More
efficient fluorescent lamps are now
available in smaller diameters,
including the tlO (1.25 ") and T8
(1").

Fluorescent lamps are available in
color temperatures ranging from
warm (2700°K) "incandescent-like"
colors to very cool (6500°K)
"daylight" colors. "Cool white"
(4100°K) is the most common
fluorescent lamp color. Neutral
white (3500°K) is becoming popular
for office and retail use.

Improvements in the phosphor
coating of fluorescent lamps have
improved color rendering and made
some fluorescent lamps acceptable
Fluorescent Lamp
*.«mVff l?h1 n™Jf ifflvmti(
-------
in many applications previously
dominated by incandescent lamps

Performance
Consider a tions

The performance of any luminaire
system depends on how well its
components work together. With
fluorescent lamp-ballast systems,
light output, input watts, and efficacy
are sensitive to changes in the
ambient temperature. When the
ambient temperature around the
lamp is significantly above or below
25°C (77°F), the performance of the
system can change. Exhibit 6 shows
this relationship for two common
lamp-ballast systems: the F40T12
lamp with a magnetic ballast and the
F32T8 lamp with an electronic
ballast.

As you can see, the optimum
operating temperature for the F32T8
lamp-ballast system is higher than
for the F40T12 system. Thus, when
the ambient temperature is greater
than 25°C (77°F), the performance
of the F32T8 system may be higher
than the performance under ANSI
conditions. Lamps with smaller
diameters (such as T-5 twin tube
lamps) peak at even higher ambient
temperatures.

Compact Fluorescent
Lamps

Advances in phosphor coatings and
reductions of tube diameters have
facilitated the development of
compact fluorescent lamps.

Manufactured since the early 1980s,
they are a long-lasting, energy-
efficient substitute for the
incandescent lamp.

Various wattages, color
temperatures, and sizes are
available. The wattages of the
compact fluorescents range from 5
to 40 — replacing incandescent
lamps ranging from 25 to 150 watts
— and provide energy savings of 60
to 75 percent. While producing light
similar in color to incandescent
sources, the life expectancy of a
compact fluorescent is about 10
times that of a standard
incandescent lamp. Note, however,
that the use of compact fluorescent
lamps is very limited in dimming
applications.

The compact fluorescent lamp with
an Edison screw-base offers an easy
means to upgrade an incandescent
luminaire. Screw-in compact
fluorescents are available in two
types.

•*• Integral Units. These consist of
a compact fluorescent lamp and
ballast in self-contained units.
Some integral units also include
a reflector and/or glass
enclosure.

*• Modular Units. The modular
type of retrofit compact
fluorescent lamp is similar to the
integral units, except that the
lamp is replaceable.

A Specifier Report that compares
the performance of various name-
brand compact fluorescent lamps is
now available from the National
Lighting Product Information
Program ("Screw-Base Compact
Fluorescent Lamp Products,"
Specifier Reports, Volume 1, Issue
6, April 1993).
High-Intensity
Discharge Lamps

High-intensity discharge (HID) lamps
are similar to fluorescents in that an
arc is generated between two
electrodes. The arc in a HID source
is shorter, yet it generates much
more light, heat, and pressure within
the arc tube.

Originally developed for outdoor and
industrial applications, HID lamps
are also used in office, retail, and
other indoor applications. Their
color rendering characteristics have
been improved and lower wattages
have recently become available —
as low as 18 watts.

There are several advantages to
HID sources.

^ relatively long life (5,000 to
24,000+ hrs)
•/ relatively high lumen output per
watt
v' relatively small in physical size

However, the following operating
limitations must also be considered.
First, HID lamps require time to
warm up. It varies from lamp to
lamp, but the average warm-up time
is 2 to 6 minutes. Second, HID
lamps have a "restrike" time,
meaning a momentary interruption
of current or a voltage drop too low
to maintain the arc will extinguish
the lamp. At that point, the gases
inside the lamp are too hot to ionize,
and time is needed for the gases to
cool and pressure to drop before the
arc will restrike. This process of
restriking takes between 5 and 15
minutes, depending on which HID
source is being used. Therefore,
good applications of HID lamps are
areas where lamps are not switched
on and off intermittently.

The following HID sources are listed
in increasing order of efficacy.

* mercury vapor
» metal halide
* high pressure sodium
* low pressure sodium

Mercury Vapor

Clear mercury vapor lamps, which
produce a blue-green light, consist
of a mercury-vapor arc tube with
tungsten electrodes at both ends.
These lamps have the lowest
efficacies of the HID family, rapid
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 6

SENSITIVITY OF LAMP-BALLAST PERFORMANCE
F40T12 Lamp with Magnetic Ballast
'x
re
c
CD

fc>
0>
Q.
80
20 30 40

Ambient Temperature (C)
50
100
95
x
re
o 90

S. 85
80
F32T8 Lamp with Electronic Ballast
Watts
10
Efficacy.

Lumens/
20 30 40

Ambient Temperature (C)
50
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10
lumen depreciation, and a low color
rendering index. Because of these
characteristics, other HID sources
have replaced mercury vapor lamps
in many applications. However,
mercury vapor lamps are still
popular sources for landscape
illumination because of their 24.000
hour lamp life and vivid portrayal of
green landscapes.

The arc is contained in an inner bulb
called the arc tube. The arc tube is
filled with high purity mercury and
argon gas. The arc tube is enclosed
within the outer bulb, which is filled
with nitrogen. (See the typical HID
lamp below.)

High Intensity Discharge Lamp
Supports K_Jl_

Reslator

Arc Tube Seal
Arc Tube
Double Colled
Electrode
Structure
Outer Bulb
Coating Bu,b
Color-improved mercury lamps use
a phosphor coating on the inner wall
of the bulb to improve the color
rendering index, resulting in slight
reductions in efficiency.

Metal Halide

These lamps are similar to mercury
vapor lamps but use metal halide
additives inside the arc tube along
with the mercury and argon. These
additives enable the lamp to
produce more visible light per watt
with improved color rendition.

Wattages range from 32 to 2,000,
offering a wide range of indoor and
outdoor applications. The efficacy of
metal halide lamps ranges from 50 to
115 lumens per watt — typically about
double that of mercury vapor. In short,
metal halide lamps have several
advantages.

s high efficacy
^ good color rendering
s wide range of wattages

However, they also have some
operating limitations.

* The rated life of metal halide
lamps is shorter than other HID
sources; lower-wattage lamps
last less than 7500 hours while
high-wattage lamps last an
average of 15,000 to 20,000
hours.

* The color may vary from lamp to
lamp and may shift over the life
of the lamp and during dimming.

Because of the good color rendition
and high lumen output, these lamps
are good for sports arenas and
stadiums. Indoor uses include large
auditoriums and convention halls.
These lamps are sometimes used
for general outdoor lighting, such as
parking facilities, but a high pressure
sodium system is typically a better
choice.

High Pressure Sodium

The high pressure sodium (HPS)
lamp is widely used for outdoor and
industrial applications. Its higher
efficacy makes it a better choice
than metal halide for these
applications, especially when good
color rendering is not a priority. HPS
lamps differ from mercury and
metal-halide lamps in that they do
not contain starting electrodes; the
ballast circuit includes a high-
voltage electronic starter. The arc
tube is made of a ceramic material
which can withstand temperatures
up to 2372°F. It is filled with xenon
to help start the arc, as well as a
sodium-mercury gas mixture.
The efficacy of the lamp is very high
— as much as 140 lumens per watt.
For example, a 400-watt high
pressure sodium lamp produces
50,000 initial lumens. The same
wattage metal halide lamp produces
40,000 initial lumens, and the 400-
watt mercury vapor lamp produces
only 21,000 initially.

Sodium, the major element used,
produces the "golden" color that is
characteristic of HPS lamps.
Although HPS lamps are not
generally recommended for
applications where color rendering is
critical, HPS color rendering
properties are being improved.
Some HPS lamps are now available
in "deluxe" and "white" colors that
provide higher color temperature
and improved color rendition. The
efficacy of low-wattage "white" HPS
lamps is lower than that of metal
halide lamps (lumens per watt of
low-wattage metal halide is 75-85.
while white HPS is 50-60 LPW).

Low Pressure Sodium

Although low pressure sodium (IPS)
lamps are similar to fluorescent
systems (because they are low
pressure systems), they are
commonly included in the HID family.
IPS lamps are the most efficacious
light sources, but they produce the
poorest quality light of all the lamp
types. Being a monochromatic light
source, all colors appear black, white,
or shades of gray under an LPS
source. LPS lamps are available in
wattages ranging from 18-180.

LPS lamp use has been generally
limited to outdoor applications such
as security or street lighting and
indoor, low-wattage applications
where color quality is not important
(e.g. stairwells). However, because
the color rendition is so poor, many
municipalities do not allow them for
roadway lighting.

Because the LPS lamps are
"extended" (like fluorescent), they
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11
are less effective in directing and
controlling a light beam, compared
with "point sources" like high-
pressure sodium and metal halide.
Therefore, lower mounting heights
will provide better results with LPS
lamps. To compare a LPS
installation with other alternatives,
calculate the installation efficacy as
the average maintained footcandles
divided by the input watts per square
foot of illuminated area. The input
wattage of an LPS system increases
overtime to maintain consistent light
output over the lamp life.

The low-pressure sodium lamp can
explode if the sodium comes in
contact with water. Dispose of these
lamps according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
BALLASTS

All discharge lamps (fluorescent and
HID) require an auxiliary piece of
equipment called a ballast. Ballasts
have three main functions.

* provide correct starting voltage,
because lamps require a higher
voltage to start than to operate

» match the line voltage to the
operating voltage of the lamp

* limit the lamp current to prevent
immediate destruction, because
once the arc is struck the lamp
impedance decreases

Because ballasts are an integral
component of the lighting system,
they have a direct impact on light
output. The ballast factor is the
ratio of a lamp's light output using a
standard reference ballast,
compared to the lamp's rated light
output on a laboratory standard
ballast. General purpose ballasts
have a ballast factor that is less than
one; special ballasts may have a
ballast factor greater than one.
Fluorescent Ballasts

The two general types of fluorescent
ballasts are magnetic and electronic
ballasts.

Magnetic Ballasts

Magnetic ballasts (also referred to
as electromagnetic ballasts) fall into
one of the following categories,

• standard core-coil (no longer
sold in the US for most
applications)

• high-efficiency core-coil

• cathode cut-out or hybrid ,

Standard core-coil magnetic ballasts
are essentially core-coil transformers
that are relatively inefficient in
operating fluorescent lamps. The
high-efficiency ballast replaces the
aluminum wiring and lower grade
steel of the standard ballast with
copper wiring and enhanced
ferromagnetic materials. The result
of these material upgrades is a 10
percent system efficiency
improvement. However, note that
these "high efficiency" ballasts are
the least efficient magnetic ballasts
that are available for operating full-
size fluorescent lamps. More
efficient ballasts are described
below.

"Cathode cut-out" (or "hybrid")
ballasts are high-efficiency core-coil
ballasts that incorporate electronic
components that cut off power to the
lamp cathodes (filaments) after the
lamps are lit, resulting in an
additional 2-watt savings per
standard lamp. Also, many partial-
output T12 hybrid ballasts provide
up to 10% less light output while
consuming up to 17% less energy
than energy-efficient magnetic
ballasts. Full-output T8 hybrid
ballasts are nearly as efficient as
rapid-start two-lamp T8 electronic
ballasts.
Electronic Ballasts

In nearly every full-size fluorescent
lighting application, electronic
ballasts can be used in place of
conventional magnetic "core-and-
coil" ballasts. Electronic ballasts im-
prove fluorescent system efficacy by
converting the standard 60 Hz input
frequency to a higher frequency,
usually 25.000 to 40.000 Hz. tamps
operating at these higher
frequencies produce about the same
amount of light, while consuming
12 to 25 percent less power
Other advantages of electronic
ballasts include less audible noise.
less weight, virtually no lamp flicker,
and dimming capabilities (with
specific ballast models).
There are three electronic ballast
designs available.

Standard 712 electronic ballasts
(430mA)

These ballasts are designed for use
with conventional (T12 orT10)
fluorescent lighting systems. Some
electronic ballasts that are designed
for use with 4' lamps can operate up
to four lamps at a time. Parallel
wiring is another feature now
available that allows all companion
lamps in the ballast circuit to
continue operating in the event of a
lamp failure. Electronic ballasts are
also available for 8' standard and
high-output T12 lamps.

T8 Electronic ballasts (265mA)

Specifically designed for use with T8
(1-inch diameter) lamps, the T8
electronic ballast provides the high-
est efficiency of any fluorescent
lighting system. Some T8 electronic
ballasts are designed to start the
lamps in the conventional rapid start
mode, while others are operated in
the instant start mode. The use of
instant start T8 electronic ballasts
may result in up to 25 percent
reduction in lamp life (at 3 hours per
start) but produces slight increases
in efficiency and light output. (Note:
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
12
Lamp life ratings for instant start
and rapid start are the same for 12
or more hours per start.)

Dimmable electronic ballasts

These ballasts permit the light out-
put of the lamps to be dimmed
based on input from manual dimmer
controls or from devices that sense
daylight or occupancy.

Types of Fluorescent
Circuits

There are three main types of
fluorescent circuits.

» rapid start
» instant start
» preheat

The specific fluorescent circuit in
use can be identified by the label on
the ballast.

The rapid start circuit is the most
used system today. Rapid start
ballasts provide continuous lamp
filament heating during lamp
operation (except when used with a
cathode cut-out ballast or lamp).
Users notice a very short delay after
"flipping the switch," before the lamp
is started.

The instant start system ignites the
arc within the lamp instantly. This
ballast provides a higher starting
voltage, which eliminates the need
for a separate starting circuit. This
higher starting voltage causes more
wear on the filaments, resulting in
reduced lamp life compared with
rapid starting.

The preheat circuit was used when
fluorescent lamps first became
available. This technology is used
very little today, except for low-
wattage magnetic ballast
applications such as compact
fluorescents. A separate starting
switch, called a starter, is used to aid
in forming the arc. The filament
needs some time to reach proper
temperature, so the lamp does not
strike for a few seconds.
HID Ballasts

Like fluorescent lamps, HID lamps
require a ballast to start and operate.
The purposes of the ballast are
similar: to provide starting voltage,
to limit the current, and to match the
line voltage to the arc voltage.

With HID ballasts, a major
performance consideration is lamp
wattage regulation when the line
voltage varies. With HPS lamps,
the ballast must compensate for
changes in the lamp voltage as well
as for changes in the line voltages.

Installing the wrong HID ballast can
cause a variety of problems.

* waste energy and increase
operating cost

* severely shorten lamp life

x significantly add to system
maintenance costs

x produce lower-than-desired light
levels

x increase wiring and circuit
breaker installation costs
x result in lamp cycling when
voltage dips occur

Exhibit 7 describes the differences
between the three types of HID
ballasts. For definitions of these
ballast types, please refer to the
glossary at the end of this document.

Capacitive switching is available in
new HID luminaires with special HID
ballasts. The most common
application for HID capacitive
switching is in occupancy-sensed bi-
level lighting control. Upon sensing
motion, the occupancy sensor will
send a signal to the bi-level HID
system that will rapidly bring the
light levels from a standby reduced
level to approximately 80% of full
output, followed by the normal
warm-up time between 80% and
100% of full light output. Depending
on the lamp type and wattage, the
standby lumens are roughly 15-40%
of full output and the input watts are
30-60% of full wattage. Therefore,
during periods that the space is
unoccupied and the system is
dimmed, savings of 40-70% are
achieved.

Electronic ballasts for some types of
HID lamps are starting to become
commercially available. These
ballasts offer the advantages of
reduced size and weight, as well as
better color control; however,
electronic HID ballasts offer minimal
EXHIBIT 7
HID BALLAST SELECTION FACTORS

Line Voltage
Variation
Losses
Power Factor
Dip Tolerance
Lamp Wattage
Regulation
Non-Regulating
(reactor, lag)
+/- 5%
low
40-50%
20-10%
2-2.5 % for each
1 % change of
line voltage
Lead-Type
Regulator
(CWA)
+/-10%
medium to high
90%+
50-10%
1-1.5% for each
1 % change of
line voltage
Lag-Type
Regulator
(magn.)
' +/-10%
high
90%+
60-30%
0.8% for each
1 % change of
line voltage
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
13
efficiency gains over magnetic HID
ballasts.
LUMINAIRES

A luminaire, or light fixture, is a unit
consisting of the following
components.

* iamps
» lamp sockets
• ballasts
* reflective material
» lenses, refractors, or louvers
» housing

Luminaire
Housing/Reflector

Ballast
Lens
The main function of the luminaire is
to direct light using reflective and
shielding materials. Many lighting
upgrade projects consist of replacing
one or more of these components to
improve fixture efficiency.
Alternatively, users may consider
replacing the entire luminaire with
one that is designed to efficiently
provide the appropriate quantity and
quality of illumination.

There are several different types of
luminaires. The following is a listing
of some of the common luminaire
types.

• general illumination fixtures
such as 2x4, 2x2, & 1x4
fluorescent troffers
• downlights
• indirect lighting (light reflected
off the ceiling/walls)

• spot or accent lighting

• task lighting

• outdoor area and flood lighting

Luminaire Efficiency

The efficiency of a luminaire is the
percentage of lamp lumens
produced that actually exit the
fixture. The use of louvers can
improve visual comfort, but because
they reduce the lumen output of the
fixture, efficiency is reduced.
Generally, the most efficient fixtures
have the poorest visual comfort (e.g.
bare strip industrial fixtures).
Conversely, the fixture that provides
the highest visual comfort level is
the least efficient. Thus, a lighting
designer must determine the best
compromise between efficiency and
VCP when specifying luminaires.
Recently, some manufacturers have
started offering fixtures with
excellent VCP and efficiency.
These so-called "super fixtures"
combine state-of-the-art lens or
louver designs to provide the best of
both worlds.

Surface deterioration and
accumulated dirt in older, poorly
maintained fixtures can also cause
reductions in luminaire efficiency.
Refer to Lighting Maintenance for
more information.

Directing Light

Each of the above luminaire types
consist of a number of components
that are designed to work together to
produce and direct light. Because
the subject of light production has
been covered by the previous
section, the text below focuses on
the components used to direct the
light produced by the lamps.

Reflectors

Reflectors are designed to redirect
the light emitted from a lamp in
order to achieve a desired
distribution of light intensity outside
of the luminaire.

In mostlncandescent spot and flood
lights, highly specular (mirror-like)
reflectors are usually built into the
lamps.

One energy-efficient upgrade option
is to install a custom-designed
reflector to enhance the light control
and efficiency of the fixture, which
may allow partial delamping.
Retrofit reflectors are useful for
upgrading the efficiency of older,
deteriorated luminaire surfaces. A
variety of reflector materials are
available: highly reflective white
paint, silver film laminate, and two
grades of anodized aluminum sheet
(standard or enhanced reflectivity).
Silver film laminate is generally con-
sidered to have the highest
reflectance, but is considered less
durable.

Proper design and installation of
reflectors can have more effect on
performance than the reflector
materials. In combination with
delamping, however, the use of
reflectors may result in reduced light
output and may redistribute the light,
which may or may not be acceptable
for a specific space or application.
To ensure acceptable performance
from reflectors, arrange for a trial
installation and measure "before"
and "after" light levels using the
procedures outlined in Lighting
Evaluations. For specific name-
brand performance data, refer to
Specifier Reports, "Specular
Reflectors," Volume 1, Issue 3,
National Lighting Product
Information Program.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
14
Lenses and Louvers

Most indoor commercial fluorescent
fixtures use either a lens or a louver
to prevent direct viewing of the
lamps. Light that is emitted in the
so-called "glare zone" (angles above
45 degrees from the fixture's vertical
axis) can cause visual discomfort
and reflections, which reduce
contrast on work surfaces or
computer screens. Lenses and
louvers attempt to control these
problems.

*• Lenses. Lenses made from
clear ultraviolet-stabilized acrylic
plastic deliver the most light
output and uniformity of all
shielding media. However, they
provide less glare control than
louvered fixtures. Clear lens
types include prismatic, batwing,
linear batwing, and polarized
lenses. Lenses are usually
much less expensive than
louvers. White translucent
diffusers are much less efficient
than clear lenses, and they
result in relatively low visual.
comfort probability. New low-
glare lens materials are
available for retrofit and provide
high visual comfort (VCP>80)
and high efficiency.

*• Louvers. Louvers provide
superior glare control and high
visual comfort compared with
lens-diffuser systems. The most
common application of louvers
is to eliminate the fixture glare
reflected on computer screens.
So-called "deep-cell" parabolic
louvers — with 5-7" cell
apertures and depths of 2-4" —
provide a good balance between
visual comfort and luminaire
efficiency. Although small-cell
parabolic louvers provide the
highest level of visual comfort,
they reduce luminaire efficiency
to about 35-45 percent. For
retrofit applications, both deep-
cell and small-cell louvers are
available for use with existing
EXHIBITS
2-FOOT X 4-FOOT TROFFER SHIELDING MEDIA
Shielding Material
Standard Clear Lens
Low-Glare Clear Lens
Deep Cell Parabolic Louver
Translucent Diffuser
White Metal Louver
Small Cell Parabolic Louver
Efficiency Range (%)
60-70
60-75
50-65
40-60
35-45
35-45
VCP Range (%)
50-75
75-85
75-95
40-50
65-85
99
fixtures. Note that the deep-cell
louver retrofit adds 2-4" to the
overall depth of a troffer; verify
that sufficient plenum depth is
available before specifying the
deep-cell retrofit.

Exhibit 8 shows the efficiency and
VCP for various shielding materials.

Distribution

One of the primary functions of a
luminaire is to direct the light to
where it is needed. The light
distribution produced by luminaires
is characterized by the Illuminating
Engineering Society as follows.

*• Direct — 90 to 100 percent of
the light is directed downward
for maximum use.

<*~ Indirect — 90 to 100 percent of
the light is directed to the
ceilings and upper walls and is
reflected to all parts of a room,

•»- Semi-Direct — 60 to 90 percent
of the light is directed downward
with the remainder directed
upward.

•»• General Diffuse or Direct-
Indirect— equal portions of the
light are directed upward and
downward.

*• Highlighting — the beam
projection distance and focusing
ability characterize this
luminaire.
The lighting distribution that is
characteristic of a given luminaire is
described using the candela
distribution provided by the
luminaire manufacturer (see
diagram on next page). The
candela distribution is represented
by a curve on a polar graph showing
the relative luminous intensity 360°
around the fixture — looking at a
cross-section of the fixture. This
information is useful because it
shows how much light is emitted in
each direction and the relative
proportions of downlighting and
uplighting. The cut-off angle is the
angle, measured from straight down,
where the fixture begins to shield the
light source and no direct light from
the source is visible. The shielding
angle is the angle, measured from
horizontal, through which the fixture
provides shielding to prevent direct
viewing of the light source. The
shielding and cut-off angles add up
to 90 degrees.

The lighting upgrade products
mentioned in this document are
described in more detail in Lighting
Upgrade Technologies.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Candela Distribution Curve
-90
15 30

SELECTED

REFERENCES

Individual Listings

Advanced Lighting Guidelines:
1993, Electric Power Research
Institute (EPRI)/California Energy
Commission (CEC)/United States
Department of Energy (DOE), May
1993.

EPRI, the CEC. and the DOE have
collaborated to produce the 1993
update of the Advanced Lighting
Guidelines (originally published in
1990 by the CEC). The Guidelines
include four new chapters that
address lighting controls. This series
of guidelines provides
comprehensive and objective
information about current lighting
equipment and controls.

The Guidelines address the following
areas.

• lighting design practice
• computer-aided lighting design
• luminaires and lighting systems
• energy-efficient fluorescent
ballasts
• full-size fluorescent lamps
• compact fluorescent lamps
• tungsten-halogen lamps
• metal halide and HPS lamps
• daylighting and lumen
maintenance
• occupant sensors
• time-scheduling systems
• retrofit control technologies

Besides providing technology
overviews and applications, each
chapter concludes with guideline
specifications to use in accurately
designating lighting upgrade
components. The Guidelines also
tabulate representative performance
data, which can be very difficult to
locate in product literature.
To obtain a copy of the Advanced
Lighting Guidelines (1993), contact
your local utility (if your utility is a
member of EPRI). Otherwise, call
the CEC at (916) 654-5200.

Applied Illumination Engineering,
JackL. Lindsey, 1991.

The Association of Energy Engineers
uses this text to prepare applicants to
take the Certified Lighting Efficiency
Professional (CLEP) examination.
This 480-page book is particularly
useful for learning about illuminance
calculations, basic design
considerations, and the operating
characteristics of each light source
family.

It also provides application guidelines
for industrial, office, retail, and
outdoor lighting.
You can order this textbook from the
Association of Energy Engineers by
calling (404) 925-9558.

ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-1989,
American Society of Heating Refriger-
ating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) and Illuminating Engineer-
ing Society (IES), 1989.

Commonly known as "Standard 90,1,"
ASHRAE/IES 90.1-1989 is the efficiency
standard that Green Lights participants
agree to follow when designing new
lighting systems. Standard 90.1 is
currently a national, voluntary
consensus standard. However, this
standard is becoming law in many
states. The Energy Policy Act of 1992
requires that all states certify by October
1994 that their commercial energy code
provisions meet or exceed the
requirements Standard 90.1.

Green Lights participants only need to
meet the lighting system portion of the
standard. Standard 90.1 sets maximum
wattage densities (W/SF) for lighting
systems based on the type of building or
expected uses within each space. The
lighting portion of Standard 90,1 does
not apply to the following: outdoor
manufacturing or processing facilities,
theatrical lighting, specialty lighting,
emergency lighting, signage, retail
display windows, and dwelling unit
lighting. Daylighting and lighting
controls receive consideration and
credits, and minimum efficiency
standards are specified for fluorescent
lamp ballasts based on the Federal
Ballast Standards.

You can purchase Standard 90.1 by
contacting ASHRAE at (404) 636-8400
or IES at (212) 248-5000.

Lighting Management Handbook,
Craig DiLouie, 1993.

This 300-page non-technical reference
provides a clear overview of lighting
management principles. It places
special emphasis on the importance of
effective maintenance and the benefits
of a well planned and executed lighting
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
16
management program. The contents
are organized as follows.

• Fundamentals and Technology
• The Building Survey
• Effective Illumination (for
People)
• Retrofitting Economics
• Maintenance
• Retrofitting Financing
• Green Engineering
(Environmental Impacts)
• Getting Help
• Success Stories

In addition, the book's appendices
include general technical
information, worksheets, and product
guides. To purchase this reference,
call the Association of Energy
Engineers at (404) 925-9558.

Illuminations: A Training Textbook
for Senior Lighting Technicians,
interNational Association of
Lighting Management Companies
(NALMCO), First Edition, 1993.

Illuminations is a 74-page course
workbook for use by Apprentice
Lighting Technicians (NALMCO
designation) for upgrading their
status to Senior Lighting Technician.
The workbook consists of seven
chapters, each with a quiz for self-
testing. Answers are provided in the
back of the book.

•js. Service Basics (e.g., electricity,
instrumentation, disposal issues,
etc.)

•s. Lamp Operation (e.g., lamp
construction and operation — all
types, color effects)

•s. Ballast Operation (e.g., fluores-
cent & HID ballast components,
types, wattage, ballast factor,
harmonics, starting temperature,
efficacy, replacement)

*s. Troubleshooting (e.g., visual
symptoms, possible causes,
explanations and/or remedies)
0
s. Controls (e.g., photocells, time
clocks, occupancy sensors,
dimmers, EMS)

•&. Lighting Upgrade Devices and
Technologies (e.g., reflectors,
compact fluorescents, ballast
upgrades, correcting overlit
situations, lenses and louvers,
HID conversions, measuring
energy effectiveness)

^ Emergency Lighting (e.g., exit
signs, fixture types, applications,
batteries, maintenance)

Illuminations is clear and
understandable. The publication's
greatest strength is its extensive
illustrations and photos, which help to
clarify the ideas discussed. The
textbook for Apprentice Lighting
Technicians is also available —
entitled Lighten Up — and is
recommended for newcomers to the
lighting field.

To order, call the NALMCO at (609)
799-5501.
Electric Power Research
Institute (EPRI)

Commercial Lighting Efficiency
Resource Book, EPRI, CU-7427,
September 1991.

The Commercial Lighting Efficiency
Resource Book provides an overview
of efficient commercial lighting
technologies and programs available
to the end-user. Besides providing an
overview of lighting conservation
opportunities, this 144-page
document provides valuable
information about lighting education
and information in the following areas.

• extensive annotated lighting
reference bibliographies

• directory of lighting demonstration
centers

• summaries of regulations and codes
related to lighting

• directory of lighting education
institutions, courses, and seminars

• listings of lighting magazines and
journals

• directory and descriptions of lighting
research organizations

• directory of lighting professional
groups and trade associations

• directory of energy and
environmental groups

To obtain a copy of EPRI Lighting
Publications, contact your local utility (if
your utility is a member of EPRI) or
contact the EPRI Publications
Distribution Center at (510) 934-4212.

The following lighting publications are
available from EPRI. Each publication
contains a thorough description of the
technologies, their advantages, their
applications, and case studies.

"• High Intensity Discharge Lighting
(10 pages), BR-101739

<*• Electronic Ballasts (6 pages), BR-
101886

<*• Occupancy Sensors (6 pages), BR-
100323

<*• Compact Fluorescent Lamps (6
pages), CU.2042R.4.93

«- Specular Retrofit Reflectors (6
pages), CU.2046R.6.92

*• Retrofit Lighting Technologies (10
pages), CU.3040R.7.91
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
17
In addition, EPRI offers a series of 2-
page informational bulletins that
cover such topics as lighting
maintenance, lighting quality. VDT
lighting, and lamp life.

To obtain a copy of EPRI Lighting
Publications, contact your local utility
(if your utility is a member of EPRI).
Otherwise, contact the EPRI
Publications Distribution Center at
(510)934-4212.

Lighting Fundamentals Handbook,
Electric Power Research Institute,
TR-101710, March 1993.

This handbook provides basic
information on lighting principles,
lighting equipment, and other
considerations related to lighting
design. It is not intended to be an
up-to-date reference on current
lighting products and equipment.
The handbook has three major
sections.

X Physics of Light (e.g., light,
vision, optics, photometry)

X Lighting Equipment and
Technology (e.g., lamps,
luminaires, lighting controls)

X Lighting Design Decisions (e.g.,
illuminance targets, quality,
economics, codes, power quality,
photobiology and waste disposal)

To obtain a copy of EPRI Lighting
Publications, contact your local utility
(if your utility is a member of EPRI)
or contact the EPRI Publications
Distribution Center at (510) 934-
4212.
Illuminating Engineering
Society (IES)

ED-100
Introductory Lighting

Consisting of approximately 300
pages in a binder, this education
program is an updated version of the
1985 fundamentals training materials.
This set of 10 lessons is intended for
those who want a thorough overview
of the lighting field.

X Light and Color
X Light, Vision, and Perception
X Light Sources
X Luminaires and their Photometric
Data
X Illuminance Calculations
X Lighting Applications for Visual
Performance
X Lighting for Visual Impact
X Exterior Lighting
X Energy Management/Lighting
Economics
X Daylighting

ED-150
Intermediate Lighting

This course is the "next step" for
those who have already completed
the ED-100 fundamentals program or
who wish to increase their knowledge
gained through practical experience.
The IES Technical Knowledge
Examination is based on the ED-150
level of knowledge. A 21/j-inch binder
contains thirteen lessons.

X Vision
X Color
X Light Sources & Ballasts
X Optical Control
X Illuminance Calculations
X Psychological Aspects of Lighting
X Design Concepts
X Computers in Lighting Design and
Analysis
X Lighting Economics
X • Daylighting Calculations
X Electrical Quantities/Distribution
X Electrical Controls
X Lighting Mathematics
/ES Lighting Handbook, 8th Edition,
IES of North America, 1993.

This 1000-page technical reference is a
combination of two earlier volumes that
separately addressed reference
information and applications.
Considered the "bible" of illumination
engineering, the Handbook provides
broad coverage of all phases of lighting
disciplines. The 34 chapters are
organized into five general areas.

•s. Science of Lighting (e.g., optics,
measurement, vision, color,
photobiology)

^s. Lighting Engineering (e.g., sources,
luminaires, daylighting, calculations)

^a. Elements of Design (e.g., process,
illuminance selection, economics,
codes & standards)

^ Lighting Applications, which
discusses 15 unique case studies

•3. Special Topics (e.g., energy
management, controls,
maintenance, environmental issues)

In addition, the Handbook contains an
extensive glossary and index, as well as
many illustrations, graphs, charts,
equations, photographs and references.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
18
The Handbook is an essential
reference for the practicing lighting
engineer. You can purchase the
manual from the'publications office
of IES at (212) 248-5000. IES mem-
bers receive a price discount on the
Handbook.

IES Lighting Ready Reference,
IES, 1989.

This book is a compendium of
lighting information, including the
following: terminology, conversion
factors, tight source tables,
illuminance recommendations,
calculation data, energy man-
agement considerations, cost
analysis methods, and lighting
survey procedures. The Ready
Reference includes the most often
used material from the IES Lighting
Handbook.
You can purchase the 168-page
reference from the publications office
of IES at (212) 248-5000. IES
members receive the Ready
Reference upon joining the society.

VDT Lighting: IES Recommended
Practice for Lighting Offices
Containing Computer Visual
Display Terminals. IES of North
America, 1990. IES RP-24-1989.

This lighting practice handbook
provides recommendations for
lighting offices where computer
VDTs are used. It also offers
guidelines regarding light
requirements for visual comfort and
good visibility, with an analysis of the
impact of general lighting on VDT
visual tasks.

To purchase a copy of RP-24, con-
tact the IES at (212) 248-5000.
National Lighting
Bureau (NLB)

The NLB is an information service
established by the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
Its purpose is to create more
awareness and appreciation of the
benefits of good lighting. NLB
promotes all aspects of lighting
energy management, ranging from
productivity to lumen output. Each
year the NLB publishes articles in
various periodicals and guidebooks
written for the lay person. These
articles discuss specific lighting
systems design, operation,
maintenance techniques, and system
components.

The following publications are basic
references that provide an overview
of the subject and include lighting
applications.

• Office Lighting and Productivity

• Profiting from Lighting
Modernization

• Getting the Most from Your
Lighting Dollar

• Solving the Puzzle of VDT
Viewing Problems

• NLB Guide to Industrial Lighting

• NLB Guide to Retail Lighting
Management

• NLB Guide to Energy Efficient
Lighting Systems

• Lighting for Safety and Security

• Performing a Lighting System
Audit

• Lighting and Human Performance

To request a catalog or to order
publications, call NLB at (202) 457-
8437.

NEMA Guide to Lighting Controls,
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association, 1992.

This guide provides an overview of
the following lighting control
strategies: on/off, occupancy
recognition, scheduling, tuning, dayhgnt
harvesting, lumen depreciation
compensation, and demand control. In
addition, it discusses hardware options
and applications for each control
strategy.

To order, call NLB at (202) 457-8437.
National Lighting Product
Information Program
(NLPIP)

This program publishes objective
information about lighting upgrade
products, and is co-sponsored by four
organizations: EPA's Green Lights, the
Lighting Research Center, the New York
State Energy Research and
Development Authority, and Northern
States Power Company. Two types of
publications are available — Specifier
Reports and Lighting Answers.

To purchase these publications, fax your
request to the Lighting Research Center,
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute at (518)
276-2999 (fax).

Specifier Reports

Each Specifier Report examines a
particular lighting upgrade technology.
Specifier Reports provide background
information about the technology and
independent performance test results of
name-brand lighting upgrade products.
NineSpec/ffer Reports have been
published as of July 1994.

«• Electronic Ballasts, December 1991

*• Power Reducers, March 1992
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
19
:*- Specular Reflectors, July 1992

=»• Occupancy Sensors, October
1992

<*• Parking Lot Luminaires, January
1993

»• Screwbase Compact Fluorescent
Lamp Products, April 1993

=*- Cathode-Disconnect Ballasts,
June 1993

^ Exit Sign Technologies, January
1994

»• Electronic Ballasts, May 1994

The Specifier Reports to be
published in 1994 will address five
topics: exit signs, electronic ballasts,
daylighting controls, compact
fluorescent lamp luminaires, and
replacements for incandescent
reflector lamps. HID systems for
retail display lighting will also be
researched in 1994.

Lighting Answers

Lighting Answers provide informative
text about the performance
characteristics of specific lighting
technologies but do not include
comparative performance test
results. Lighting Answers published
in 1993 addressed T8 fluorescent
systems and polarizing panels for
fluorescent luminaires. Additional
Lighting Answers planned for
publication in 1994 will cover task
lighting and HID dimming. Other
topics under consideration are
electronic ballast electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and 2'x4' lighting
systems.
Periodicals

Energy User News, Chilton
Publications, Published Monthly.

This monthly publication addresses
many aspects of the energy industry.
Each edition contains a section
devoted to lighting, usually featuring
a case study and at least one article
discussing a lighting product or issue.
Some Energy User News issues
feature product guides, which are
technology-specific tables that list the
participating manufacturers (with
phone numbers) and the attributes of
their products. The September 1993
edition featured lighting as the
centerpiece, and contained the
following information.

• several lighting articles and
product announcements

• special report about lighting
retrofit planning and power quality
• technology report on tungsten-
halogen lamps

• commentary on successful
occupancy sensor retrofits
• product guides for CFLs,
halogens, HIDs, reflectors,
electronic ballasts

To order back issues, call (215) 964-
4028.

Lighting Management &
Maintenance, NALMCO, Published
Monthly.

This monthly publication addresses
issues and technologies directly
related to upgrading and maintaining
commercial and industrial lighting
systems. The following are some
topics addressed in Lighting
Management and Maintenance: the
lighting industry, legislation, new
products and applications, waste
disposal, surveying, and the lighting
management business.

To order a subscription, call NALMCO
at (609) 799-5501.
Other EPA Green Lights
Publications
Besides the Lighting Upgrade Manual,
EPA publishes other documents, which
are available free of charge from the
Green Lights Customer Service Center.
Additionally, EPA's new faxline system
enables users to request and receive
Green Lights marketing and technical
information within minutes by calling
(202) 233-9659.

Green Lights Update

This monthly newsletter is the primary
vehicle for informing Green Lights
participants (and other interested
parties) about the latest program
enhancements. Each month's
newsletter addresses lighting
technologies, applications, case studies,
and special events. Every issue
contains the latest schedule for Lighting
Upgrade Workshops and a copy of the
reporting form used by participants to
report completed projects for EPA.

To receive a free subscription to the
Update, contact Green Lights Customer
Service at (202) 775-6650 or fax (202)
775-6680.

Power Pages

Power Pages are short publications that
address lighting technologies,
applications, and specific questions or
issues about the Green Lights program.
Look for announcements of Power
Pages in the Update newsletter.

These documents are available through
the Green Lights faxline. To request fax
delivery, call the faxline at (202) 233-
9659. Periodically contact the faxline to
retrieve the latest information from
Green Lights. If you do not have a fax
machine, contact Green Lights
Customer Service at (202) 775-6650.

Light Briefs

EPA publishes 2-page Light Briefs on
various implementation issues. These
publications are intended to provide an
introduction to technical and financial
issues affecting upgrade decisions.
Four Light Briefs focus on technologies:
occupancy sensors, electronic ballasts,
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
20

specular reflectors, and efficient
fluorescent lamps. Other releases
cover rolling financing strategies,
financing options, measuring lighting
upgrade profitability, and waste
disposal. Current copies have been
mailed to all Green Lights
participants.

For additional information, please
contact Green Lights Customer
Service at (202) 775-6650 or fax
(202) 775-6680.

Green Lights Brochure

EPA has produced a four-color
brochure for marketing the Green
Lights program. It outlines the
program's goals and commitments,
while describing what some of the
participants are doing. This
document is an essential tool for any
Green Lights marketing presentation.

To order copies of the brochure,
please contact Green Lights
Customer Service at (202) 775-6650
or fax (202) 775-6680.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
21
GLOSSARY
AMPERE: The standard unit of measurement for
electric current that is equal to one coulomb per
second. It defines the quantity of electrons moving
past a given point in a circuit during a specific period.
Amp is an abbreviation.

ANSI: Abbreviation for American National Standards
Institute.

ARC TUBE: A tube enclosed by the outer glass
envelope of a HID lamp and made of clear quartz or
ceramic that contains the arc stream.

ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-Conditioning Engineers

BAFFLE: A single opaque or translucent element
used to control light distribution at certain angles.

BALLAST: A device used to operate fluorescent and
HID lamps. The ballast provides the necessary
starting voltage, while limiting and regulating the lamp
current during operation.

BALLAST CYCLING: Undesirable condition under
which the ballast turns lamps on and off (cycles) due
to the overheating of the thermal switch inside the
ballast. This may be due to incorrect lamps, improper
voltage being supplied, high ambient temperature
around the fixture, or the early stage of ballast failure.

BALLAST EFFICIENCY FACTOR: The ballast
efficiency factor (BEF) is the ballast factor (see below)
divided by the input power of the ballast. The higher
the BEF — within the same lamp-ballast type — the
more efficient the ballast.

BALLAST FACTOR: The ballast factor (BF) for a
specific lamp-ballast combination represents the
percentage of the rated lamp lumens that will be
produced by the combination.

CANDELA: Unit of luminous intensity, describing the
intensity of a light source in a specific direction.

CANDELA DISTRIBUTION: A curve, often on polar
coordinates, illustrating the variation of luminous
intensity of a lamp or luminaire in a plane through the
light center.

CANDLEPOWER: A measure of luminous intensity of
a light source in a specific direction, measured in
candelas (see above).
CBM: Abbreviation for Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association.

CEC: Abbreviation for California Energy Commission.

COEFFICIENT OF UTILIZATION: The ratio of
lumens from a luminaire received on the work plane to
the lumens produced by the lamps alone. (Also called
"CU")

COLOR RENDERING INDEX (CRI): A scale of the
effect of a light source on the color appearance of an
object compared to its color appearance under a
reference light source. Expressed on a scale of 1 to
100, where 100 indicates no color shift. A low CRI
rating suggests that the colors of objects will appear
unnatural under that particular light source.

COLOR TEMPERATURE: The color temperature is a
specification of the color appearance of a light source,
relating the color to a reference source heated to a
particular temperature, measured by the thermal unit
Kelvin. The measurement can also be described as
the "warmth" or "coolness" of a light source.
Generally, sources below 3200K are considered
"warm;" while those above 4000K are considered
"cool" sources.

COMPACT FLUORESCENT: A small fluorescent
lamp that is often used as an alternative to
incandescent lighting. The lamp life is about 10 times
longer than incandescent lamps and is 3-4 times more
efficacious. Also called PL, Twin-Tube. CFL, or BIAX
Samps.

CONSTANT WATTAGE (CW) BALLAST: A
premium type of HID ballast in which the primary and
secondary coils are isolated. It is considered a high
performance, high loss ballast featuring excellent
output regulation.

CONSTANT WATTAGE AUTOTRANSFORMER
(CWA) BALLAST: A popular type of HID ballast in
which the primary and secondary coils are electrically
connected. Considered an appropriate balance
between cost and performance.

CONTRAST: The relationship between the luminance
of an object and its background.

CRI: (SEE COLOR RENDERING INDEX)

CUT-OFF ANGLE: The angle from a fixture's vertical
axis at which a reflector, louver, or other shielding
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
22
device cuts off direct visibility of a lamp. It is the
complementary angle of the shielding angle.

DAYLIGHT COMPENSATION: A dimming system
controlled by a photocell that reduces the output of the
lamps when daylight is present. As daylight levels
increase, lamp intensity decreases. An energy-saving
technique used in areas with significant daylight
contribution.
DIFFUSE: Term describing dispersed light
distribution. Refers to the scattering or softening of
light.

DIFFUSER: A translucent piece of glass or plastic
sheet that shields the light source in a fixture. The
light transmitted throughout the diffuser will be
redirected and scattered.

DIRECT GLARE: Glare produced by a direct view of
light sources. Often the result of insufficiently
shielded light sources. (See GLARE)

DOWNLIGHT: A type of ceiling luminaire, usually
fully recessed, where most of the light is directed
downward. May feature an open reflector and/or
shielding device,

EFFICACY: A metric used to compare light output to
energy consumption. Efficacy is measured in lumens
per watt. Efficacy is similar to efficiency, but is
expressed in dissimilar units. For example, if a 100-
watt source produces 9000 lumens, then the efficacy
is 90 lumens per watt.

ELECTROLUMINESCENT: A light source technology
used in exit signs that provides uniform brightness,
long lamp life (approximately eight years), while
consuming very little energy (less than one watt per
lamp).

ELECTRONIC BALLAST: A ballast that uses semi-
conductor components to increase the frequency of
fluorescent lamp operation — typically in the 20-40
kHz range. Smaller inductive components provide the
lamp current control. Fluorescent system efficiency is
increased due to high frequency lamp operation.

ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST: A variable
output electronic fluorescent ballast.

EMI: Abbreviation for electromagnetic interference.
High frequency interference (electrical noise) caused
by electronic components or fluorescent lamps that
interferes with the operation of electrical equipment.
EMI is measured in micro-volts, and can be controlled
by filters. Because EMI can interfere with
communication devices, the Federal Communication
Commission (FCC) has established limits for EMI.

ENERGY-SAVING BALLAST: A type of magnetic
ballast designed so that the components operate more
efficiently, cooler and longer than a "standard
magnetic" ballast. By US law, standard magnetic
ballasts can no longer be manufactured.

ENERGY-SAVING LAMP: A lower wattage lamp,
generally producing fewer lumens.

FC: (SEE FOOTCANDLE)

FLUORESCENT LAMP: A light source consisting of
a tube filled with argon, along with krypton or other
inert gas. When electrical current is applied, the
resulting arc emits ultraviolet radiation that excites the
phosphors inside the lamp wall, causing them to
radiate visible light.

FOOTCANDLE (FC): The English unit of
measurement of the illuminance (or light level) on a
surface. One footcandle is equal to one lumen per
square foot.

FOOTLAMBERT: English unit of luminance. One
footlambert is equal to 1/p candelas per square foot.

GLARE: The effect of brightness or differences in
brightness within the visual field sufficiently high to
cause annoyance, discomfort or loss of visual
performance.

HALOGEN: (SEE TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP)

HARMONIC DISTORTION: A harmonic is a
sinusoidal component of a periodic wave having a
frequency that is a multiple of the fundamental
frequency. Harmonic distortion from lighting
equipment can interfere with other appliances and the
operation of electric power networks. The total
harmonic distortion (THD) is usually expressed as a
percentage of the fundamental line current. THD for
4-foot fluorescent ballasts usually range from 20% to
40%. For compact fluorescent ballasts. THD levels
greater than 50% are not uncommon.

HID: Abbreviation for high intensity discharge.
Generic term describing mercury vapor, metal halide,
high pressure sodium, and (informally) low pressure
sodium light sources and luminaires.

HIGH-BAY: Pertains to the type of lighting in an
industrial application where the ceiling is 20 feet or
higher. Also describes the application itself.
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
HIGH OUTPUT (HO): A lamp or ballast designed to
operate at higher currents (800 mA) and produce
more light.

HIGH POWER FACTOR: A ballast with a 0.9 or
higher rated power factor, which is achieved by using
a capacitor.

HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMP: A high intensity
discharge (HID) lamp whose light is produced by
radiation from sodium vapor (and mercury).

HOT RESTART or HOT RESTRIKE: The
phenomenon of re-striking the arc in an HID light
source after a momentary power loss. Hot restart
occurs when the arc tube has cooled a sufficient
amount.

IESNA: Abbreviation for Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America.

ILLUMINANCE: A photometric term that quantifies
light incident on a surface or plane. Illuminance is
commonly called light level. It is expressed as lumens
per square foot (footcandles), or lumens per square
meter (lux).

INDIRECT GLARE: Glare produced from a reflective
surface.

INSTANT START: A fluorescent circuit that ignites
the lamp instantly with a very high starting voltage
from the ballast. Instant start lamps have single-pin
bases.

LAMP CURRENT CREST FACTOR (LCCF): The
peak lamp current divided by the RMS (average) lamp
current. Lamp manufacturers require <1.7 for best
lamp life. An LCCF of 1.414 is a perfect sine wave.

LAMP LUMEN DEPRECIATION FACTOR (LLD): A
factor that represents the reduction of lumen output
over time. The factor is commonly used as a
multiplier to the initial lumen rating in illuminance
calculations, which compensates for the lumen
depreciation. The LLD factor is a dimensionless value
between 0 and 1.

LAY-IN-TROFFER: A fluorescent fixture; usually a 2'
x 4' fixture that sets or "lays" into a specific ceiling
grid.
j
LED: Abbreviation for light emitting diode. An
illumination technology used for exit signs. Consumes
low wattage and has a rated life of greater than 80
years.

LENS: Transparent or translucent medium that alters
the directional characteristics of light passing through
it. Usually made of glass or acrylic.

LIGHT LOSS FACTOR (LLF): Factors that allow for
a lighting system's operation at less than initial
conditions. These factors are used to calculate
maintained light levels. LLFs are divided into two
categories, recoverable and non-recoverable.
Examples are lamp lumen depreciation and luminaire
surface depreciation.

LIFE-CYCLE COST: The total costs associated with
purchasing, operating, and maintaining a system over
the life of that system.

LOUVER: Grid type of optical assembly used to
control light distribution from a fixture. Can range
from small-cell plastic to the large-cell anodized
aluminum louvers used in parabolic fluorescent
fixtures.

LOW POWER FACTOR: Essentially, an uncorrected
ballast power factor of less than 0.9 (SEE NPF)

LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM: A low-pressure
discharge lamp in which light is produced by radiation
from sodium vapor. Considered a monochromatic
light source (most colors are rendered as gray).

LOW-VOLTAGE LAMP: A lamp — typically compact
halogen — that provides both intensity and good color
rendition. Lamp operates at 12V and requires the use
of a transformer. Popular lamps are MR11, MR16,
and PAR36.

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCH: A relay (magnetically-
operated switch) that allows local and remote control
of lights, including centralized time clock or computer
control.

LUMEN: A unit of light flow, or luminous flux. The
lumen rating of a lamp is a measure of the total light
output of the lamp.

LUMINAIRE: A complete lighting unit consisting of a
lamp or lamps, along with the parts designed to
distribute the light, hold the lamps, and connect the
lamps to a power source. Also called a fixture.

LUMINAIRE EFFICIENCY: The ratio of total lumen
output of a luminaire and the lumen output of the
lamps, expressed as a percentage. For example, if
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
24
two luminaires use the same lamps, more light will be
emitted from the fixture with the higher efficiency.

LUMINANCE: A photometric term that quantifies
brightness of a light source or of an illuminated
surface that reflects light. It is expressed as
footlamberts (English units) or candelas per square
meter (Metric units).

LUX (LX): The metric unit of measure for illuminance
of a surface. One lux is equal to one lumen per square
meter. One lux equals 0.093 footcandles.

MAINTAINED ILLUMINANCE: Refers to light levels
of a space at other than initial or rated conditions.
This terms considers light loss factors such as lamp
lumen depreciation, luminaire dirt depreciation, and
room surface dirt depreciation.

MERCURY VAPOR LAMP: A type of high intensity
discharge (HID) lamp in which most of the light is
produced by radiation from mercury vapor. Emits a
blue-green cast of light. Available in clear and
phosphor-coated lamps.

METAL HALIDE: A type of high intensity discharge
(HID) lamp in which most of the light is produced by
radiation of metal halide and mercury vapors in the
arc tube. Available in clear and phosphor-coated
lamps.

MR-16: A low-voltage quartz reflector lamp, only 2" in
diameter. Typically the lamp and reflector are one
unit, which directs a sharp, precise beam of light.

NADIR: A reference direction directly below a
luminaire, or "straight down" (0 degree angle).

NEMA: Abbreviation for National Electrical
Manufacturers Association.

NIST: Abbreviation for National Institute of Standards
and Technology.

NPF (NORMAL POWER FACTOR): A ballast/lamp
combination in which no components (e.g., capacitors)
have been added to correct the power factor, making
it normal (essentially low, typically 0.5 or 50%).

OCCUPANCY SENSOR: Control device that turns
lights off after the space becomes unoccupied. May
be ultrasonic, infrared or other type.

OPTICS: A term referring to the components of a
light fixture (such as reflectors, refractors, lenses,
louvers) or to the light emitting or light-controlling
performance of a fixture

PAR LAMP: A parabolic aluminized reflector iamp
An incandescent, metal haiide, or compact fluorescent
lamp used to redirect light from the source using a
parabolic reflector. Lamps are available with flood or
spot distributions.

PAR 36: A PAR lamp that is 36 one-eighths of an
inch in diameter with a parabolic shaped reflector
(SEE PAR LAMP).

PARABOLIC LUMINAIRE: A popular type of
fluorescent fixture that has a louver composed of
aluminum baffles curved in a parabolic shape. The
resultant light distribution produced by this shape
provides reduced glare, better light control, and is
considered to have greater aesthetic appeal.

PARACUBE: A metallic coated plastic louver made
up of small squares. Often used to replace the lens in
an installed trofferto enhance its appearance. The
paracube is visually comfortable, but the luminaire
efficiency is lowered. Also used in rooms with
computer screens because of their glare-reducing
qualities.

PHOTOCELL: A light sensing device used to control
luminaires and dimmers in response to detected Sight
levels.

PHOTOMETRIC REPORT: A photometric report is a
set of printed data describing the light distribution,
efficiency, and zonal lumen output of a luminaire.
This report is generated from laboratory testing.

POWER FACTOR: The ratio of AC volts x amps
through a device to AC wattage of the device. A
device such as a ballast that measures 120 volts, 1
amp, and 60 watts has a power factor of 50% (volts x
amps = 120 VA. therefore 60 watts/120 VA = 0.5).
Some utilities charge customers for low power factor
systems.

PREHEAT: A type of ballast/lamp circuit that uses a
separate starter to heat up a fluorescent lamp before
high voltage is applied to start the lamp.

QUAD-TUBE LAMP: A compact fluorescent lamp
with a double twin tube configuration.

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI):
Interference to the radio frequency band caused by
other high frequency equipment or devices in the
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
25
immediate area. Fluorescent lighting systems
generate RFI.

RAPID START (RS): The most popular fluorescent
lamp/ballast combination used today, This ballast
quickly and efficiently preheats lamp cathodes to start
the lamp. Uses a "bi-pin" base.

ROOM CAVITY RATIO (RCR): A ratio of room
dimensions used to quantify how light will interact with
room surfaces. A factor used in illuminance
calculations.

REFLECTANCE: The ratio of light reflected from a
surface to the light incident on the surface.
Reflectances are often used for lighting calculations.
The reflectance of a dark carpet is around 20%, and a
clean white wall is roughly 50% to 60%.

REFLECTOR: The part of a light fixture that shrouds
the lamps and redirects some light emitted from the
lamp.

REFRACTOR: A device used to redirect the light
output from a source, primarily by bending the waves
of light.
RECESSED: The term used to describe the
doorframe of a troffer where the lens or louver lies
above the surface of the ceiling.

REGULATION: The ability of a ballast to hold
constant (or nearly constant) the output watts (light
output) during fluctuations in the voltage feeding of
the ballast. Normally specified as +/- percent change
in output compared to +1- percent change in input.

RELAY: A device that switches an electrical load on
or off based on small changes in current or voltage.
Examples: low voltage relay and solid state relay.

RETROFIT: Refers to upgrading a fixture, room, or
building by installing new parts or equipment.

SELF-LUMINOUS EXIT SIGN: An illumination
technology using phosphor-coated glass tubes filled
with radioactive tritium gas. The exit sign uses no
electricity and thus does not need to be hardwired.

SEMI-SPECULAR: Term describing the light
reflection characteristics of a material. Some light is
reflected directionally, with some amount of scatter.

SHIELDING ANGLE: The angle measured from the
ceiling plane to tye line of sight where the bare lamp
in a luminaire becomes visible. Higher shielding
angles reduce direct glare. It is the complementary
angle of the cutoff angle, (See CUTOFF ANGLE)

SPACING CRITERION: A maximum distance that
interior fixtures may be spaced that ensures uniform
illumination on the work plane. The luminaire height
above the work plane multiplied by the spacing
criterion equals the center-to-center luminaire spacing.

SPECULAR: Mirrored or polished surface. The angle
of reflection is equal to the angle of incidence. This
word describes the finish of the material used in some
louvers and reflectors.

STARTER: A device used with a ballast to start
preheat fluorescent lamps.

STROBOSCOPIC EFFECT: Condition where rotating
machinery or other rapidly moving objects appear to
be standjng still due to the alternating current supplied
to light sources. Sometimes called "strobe effect."

T12 LAMP: Industry standard for a fluorescent lamp
that is 12 one-eighths (1% inches) in diameter. Other
sizes are T10 (1% inches) and T8 (1 inch) lamps.

TANDEM WIRING: A wiring option in which a ballasts
is shared by two or more luminaires. This reduces
labor, materials, and energy costs. Also called
"master-slave" wiring.

THERMAL FACTOR: A factor used in lighting
calculations that compensates for the change in light
output of a fluorescent lamp due to a change in bulb
wall temperature. It is applied when the lamp-ballast
combination under consideration is different from that
used in the photometric tests.

TRIGGER START: Type of ballast commonly used
with 15-watt and 20-watt straight fluorescent lamps.

TROFFER: The term used to refer to a recessed
fluorescent light fixture (combination of trough and
coffer).

TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP: A gas-filled tungsten
filament incandescent lamp with a lamp envelope
made of quartz to withstand the high temperature.
This lamp contains some halogens (namely iodine,
chlorine, bromine, and fluorine), which slow the
evaporation of the tungsten. Also, commonly called a
quartz lamp.

TWIN-TUBE: (SEE COMPACT FLUORESCENT
LAMP)
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
26

ULTRA VIOLET (UV): invisible radiation that is ZENITH: The direction directly above the iummaire
shorter in wavelength and higher in frequency than (180° angle).
visible violet light (literally beyond the violet light).

UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES (UL): An
independent organization whose responsibilities
include rigorous testing of electrical products. When
products pass these tests, they can be labeled (and
advertised) as "UL listed." UL tests for product safety
only.

VANDAL-RESISTANT: Fixtures with rugged
housings, break-resistant type shielding, and tamper-
proof screws.

VCP: Abbreviation for visual comfort probability. A
rating system for evaluating direct discomfort glare.
This method is a subjective evaluation of visual
comfort expressed as the percent of occupants of a
space who will be bothered by direct glare, VCP
allows for several factors: luminaire luminances at
different angles of view, luminaire size, room size,
luminaire mounting height, illuminance, and room
surface reflectivity. VCP tables are often provided as
part of photometric reports.

VERY HIGH OUTPUT (VHO): A fluorescent lamp
that operates at a "very high" current (1500 mA),
producing more light output than a "high output" lamp
(800 mA) or standard output lamp (430 mA).

VOLT: The standard unit of measurement for
electrical potential. It defines the "force" or "pressure"
of electricity.

VOLTAGE: The difference in electrical potential
between two points of an electrical circuit.

WALLWASHER: Describes luminaires that illuminate
vertical surfaces.

WATT (W): The unit for measuring electrical power.
It defines the rate of energy consumption by an
electrical device when it is in operation. The energy
cost of operating an electrical device is calculated as
its wattage times the hours of use. In single phase
circuits, it is related to volts and amps by the formula:
Volts x Amps x PF = Watts. (Note: For AC circuits,
PF must be included.)

WORK PLANE: The level at which work is done and
at which illuminance is specified and measured. For
office applications, this is typically a horizontal plane
30 inches above the floor (desk height).
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
27

NOTES:
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Fundamentals is one of a series of documents
known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

a (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
w oreen
~ Lights
Lighting Fundamentals • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Technologies
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
LIGHTING
UPGRADE
TECHNOLOGIES
EPA 430-B-95-008
January 1995
reen
Lights
This document provides brief descriptions of currently
available lighting upgrade technologies, listing
common applications and limitations. Many product
variations exist within each technology described. For
application assistance, contact a lighting professional
or the Green Lights Technical Hotline.

Graphics in this document were supplied by the
California Energy Commission, the Department of
Energy, and the Electric Power Research Institute.
FLUORESCENT

UPGRADES

Recent advances in lighting technology have created
new opportunities for reducing energy consumption
while enhancing the quality of fluorescent lighting
systems. Select the combination of the following
lighting upgrade approaches that will yield the
maximum energy savings. This choice should
maintain or improve lighting quality and earn an after-
tax internal rate of return exceeding the Green Lights
profitability criterion (twenty percent).
Fluorescent Ballast Upgrades

Full-Output Electronic Ballasts

Full-output electronic ballasts are high-frequency
versions of conventional magnetic "core-and-coil"
ballasts. Electronic ballasts operate fluorescent lamps
more efficiently at frequencies greater than 20,000 Hz.
The increase in lamp efficacy, combined with reduced
ballast losses, boosts fluorescent efficacy by up to 30
percent.
CONTENTS

FLUORESCENT UPGRADES 1

INCANDESCENTUPGRADES 11

HIDUPGRADES 15

OCCUPANCYSENSORS 17

SCHEDULINGCONTROLS 20

DIMMINGCONTROLS 21

PHOTOVOLTAICSYSTEMS 23

PERFORMANCE 23
Full-output electronic ballasts are rated with a ballast
factor of at least 0.85 (see definition of ballast factor in
the partial-output electronic ballast section below).
Applications

In nearly every fluorescent lighting system, full-output
electronic ballasts can replace conventional ballasts,
providing similar light output with significant
reductions in energy consumption.

Other advantages are reduced weight, less humming
noise, virtually no flicker, and the capability to operate
up to four lamps at a time.

Although most magnetic ballasts operate only two
lamps at a time, some electronic ballasts can
simultaneously operate as many as four lamps.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Magnetic and Electronic
Ballasts
Source- CEC/DOE/EPRI
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
Electronic Ballast
Where feasible, using 3- and 4-lamp
ballasts instead of 2-lamp ballasts
saves money (material, labor and
energy costs). This approach
requires fewer ballasts and is more
efficient. In applications with 2-lamp
luminaires, consider "tandem wiring"
pairs of two-lamp systems to share
single 4-lamp ballasts. Check with
your ballast supplier to find out the
maximum wire length between
lamps and ballast for reliable
operation.

Qualifications

All types of fluorescent ballasts
produce some degree of total
harmonic distortion (THD) which, if
severe, has the potential to interfere
with the operation of sensitive
electronic equipment. Harmonic
distortion is also caused by many
other types of electronic devices
such as fax machines, printers,
computers, and copy machines.
The following are typical ranges of
THD for each ballast type.

o»- magnetic have 12 - 20% THD
<* hybrid have 12-20% THD
«- electronic have 5 - 25+% THD

Many utilities will not offer rebates on
electronic ballasts unless the THD is
below 20%, so nearly all electronic
ballasts now meet these criteria.
Some electronic ballasts with
integrated circuits produce less than
5% THD. Because electronic ballasts
require reduced current, maintaining
the same percent THD will reduce the
harmonic current. Therefore,
installing low-harmonic electronic
ballasts can significantly reduce the
total harmonic current that exists in a
building's power distribution system.

Not all lamps work with all ballasts.
For example, T8 lamps (265mA)
work with T8 (265mA) ballasts, and
high-output T12 lamps (800mA)
lamps work with high-output
(800mA) ballasts. Some electronic
ballasts with integrated circuits can
adapt to operate T8 (265mA) and
T12 (430mA) lamps. Also, lamps
with only one electrical contact at
each end require operation with an
instant-start ballast. Check with your
lighting consultant or supplier about
compatibility.

As with most lighting equipment,
there are some rare occasions in
which certain high-frequency
ballasts may be incompatible with
existing technologies. For example,
some older-technology occupancy
sensor relays may fail when installed
on the same circuit with some
electronic ballasts. Check with your
occupancy sensor supplier for
compatibility with specific electronic
ballast products. In addition, a
potential system-compatibility
problem may occur when you install
electronic ballasts in a circuit
controlled by a high-frequency
power line carrier (PLC) control
system. Finally, electronic ballasts
may impair the operation of a
library's magnetic detector system
when installed within 10-15 feet of
the detector. Since you can resolve
or avoid these potential
incompatibility problems, they
should not disqualify electronic
ballasts from other applications.

Verify input wattage values for your
proposed lamp-ballast combination
because manufacturers' products
will vary in this regard. Lower input
wattage will increase energy savings
and profitability, but will typically
decrease light output. The ballast
tables at the end of this section list
system wattage, ballast factors, light
output, and .efficacies of various
lamp-ballast combinations.

Nearly all electronic ballasts reliably
start the lamps at a minimum
ambient temperature of 50°F.
Manufacturer literature will identify
the minimum starting temperatures
for your specific lamp-ballast
combination.
Typical Minimum Starting
Temperatures
Lamps

34WT12
60WT12
59WT8
others
Temperature

+60°F
+60°F
+50T
+50°ForO°F
Note that some electronic ballasts
can start high-output (800mA) lamps
at temperatures as low as -20°F.

Performance data for specific name-
brand electronic ballasts can be
found in Specifier Reports,
"Electronic Ballasts," Volume 1,
Issue 1, National Lighting Product
Information Program, December
1991. An update to this report is
expected in June 1994. The data
tables include listings of system
input power, ballast factor, ballast
efficiency factor, total harmonic
distortion, and lamp compatibility.

Partial-Output Electronic
Ballasts

Partial-output (i.e., "low-wattage")
electronic ballasts operate
fluorescent lamps at the high
efficacy of other electronic ballasts;
however, they have specified
reductions in both light output and
energy consumption.

The ballast factor (BF) identifies the
light output from a ballast operated
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Power vs. Ballast Factor Curves for Two-Lamp Four-Foot Fluorescent Lamp-Ballast Systems
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRl
ro use the graph, locate the curve (A-H) for the lamp-ballast system of interest. Draw a vertical line from the
«;:ed input power to that curve. Draw a horizontal line from that point to the vertical axis to find the ballast
factor for that lamp-ballast system. It is essential that the input power cited by the manufacturer be measure
under standard ANSI test conditions.
•Note: This graph is applicable only for two-lamp four-foot systems; other lamp-ballast systems will differ

A B'D E F|G H A 32W F32T8 IS electronic ballast
B 32W F32T8 RS elect, ballast
C 34W F40T12 RS elect, ballast
D 40W F40T12 RS.htr. cut. ballast
E 32W F32T8 RS magnetic ballast
F 40W F40T12 RS elect, ballast
G 34W F40T12 RS mag. ballast
H 40W F40T12 RS mag. ballast
100
_ 90
80
70
60
30
60 70
POWER (WATTS)
100
jn a specific lamp. BF is simply the
percentage of the lamps' rated
lumens produced by the specified
lamp-ballast combination.

Most magnetic ballasts have a
ballast factor between 0.93 - 0.95.
Electronic ballasts are available in a
wide range of ballast factors. For
example, you can purchase them
with high ballast factor (1.00 -1.30)
to boost light output. Or you could
specify a low ballast factor (0.47 -
0.80) to reduce light output. Full-
output electronic ballasts have
ballast factors that exceed a
minimum of 0.85. Most electronic
ballast brochures now list the ballast
factor for the various lamp-ballast
combinations that are available.

Applications

Partial-output electronic ballasts can
reduce electricity consumption
where reduced illumination is
acceptable. The availability of
electronic ballasts with various
output quantities enables specifiers
to select ballasts with the
appropriate output that meet the
target light level. There are several
applications where the use of
reduced-wattage electronic ballasts
will result in maximum energy
savings and improved lighting
quality.

• Task/Ambient Lighting. By
providing task lights at office
work stations, you can
significantly reduce the
illumination required from the
overhead lighting system.
Sometimes, delamping alone
will not reduce light levels to the
20-30 footcandles
recommended for the ambient
component of a task/ambient
lighting system. Reduced-output
electronic ballasts can lower the
light level while improving visual
comfort (through reduced
luminaire brightness or glare).

• Alternative to Delamping.
Particularly with parabolic louver
luminaires, delamping can result
in unfavorable luminaire
appearances. The use of
reduced-wattage electronic
ballasts can maintain uniform
brightness across the entire
luminaire aperture while
providing the appropriate
amount of illumination on task
surfaces.

• Replacing 34-Watt Fluorescent
Lamps. To achieve comparable
light levels, you can replace
conventional "energy-saver"
34W T12 lamps (i.e., reduced-
output lamps) and magnetic
ballasts with 32W T8 lamps and
partial-output electronic ballasts
(with BF = 0.70-0.75).

• New Luminaire Layouts. If the
required luminaire spacing to
achieve the target illumination is
too great, non-uniform
illuminance will result. This
situation can occur when ceiling
heights are low and low levels of
illumination are specified.
Reduced-wattage ballasts can
provide the target illuminance
while keeping luminaire spacing
within the luminaire's spacing
criterion for light level uniformity.

The Green Lights/Decision Support
System (GL/DSS) is a useful tool for
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
determining whether reduced-
wattage electronic ballasts would be
appropriate for your lighting system.
The GUDSS selects the mix of
lighting components and controls
that will provide the target
illuminance at the lowest wattage.
On a room-by-room basis, the
GUDSS output will specify the
ballast factor as part of the optimal
combination of technologies.

Because reduced-wattage electronic
ballasts reduce energy consumption
with little or no premium cost
compared to standard-wattage
electronic ballasts, both energy
savings and IRR will be increased.
For example, the cost of a 0.73 BF
reduced-wattage ballast is about the
same as a full-output electronic
ballast. Although a 0.47 BF ballast
costs roughly 25 percent more, it can
be hardwired or switched to provide
either half or full light output.

Qualifications

The same qualifications that apply to
full-output electronic ballasts also
apply to partial-output electronic
ballasts.

Operating at lower current, partial-
output electronic ballasts may
reduce fluorescent lamp life if the
ballast factor is less than 0.70,
particularly if the ballast is instant-
start.

Controllable Electronic
Ballasts

Controllable, or "dimmable,"
electronic ballasts vary the light
output of a fluorescent luminaire
based on input from a light sensor,
manual dimmer, or occupancy
sensor. These ballasts have two
additional low-voltage control leads
that receive the signal directly from
the controlling device. Now, most
controllable ballasts are only
available in the 2-lamp configuration.
Applications

Daylight dimming is a popular and
cost-effective application of
controllable electronic ballasts.
Other applications include lumen
maintenance control, manually-
operated dimming, and occupancy-
sensed dimming. With more than
one device controlling ballast output
(e.g., photosensor and occupancy
sensor), an integrated load controller
determines the appropriate signal to
send to the ballasts. For more
information about dimming controls,
refer to the controls section at the
end of this document.

Qualifications

The controlling devices —
photosensors, occupancy sensors,
dimmers, etc. — must be compatible
with the controllable electronic
ballast. Check with the
manufacturers to verify compatibility.

Harmonic distortion for most
controllable electronic ballasts is
very low due to the use of integrated
circuit technology. Although
harmonic distortion does increase as
the lamps are dimmed, the total
harmonic distortion typically remains
under 20% even in low current
conditions.

At 20% of full light output (maximum
dimming), the system efficacy drops
from about 84 lumens per watt to
about 58. Yet, this 80% reduction in
light output occurs with a 70%
reduction in power.

Lamp life is not appreciably affected
by dimming, because the ballasts
maintain cathode voltage when
dimming.

Cathode-Disconnect
(Hybrid) Magnetic Ballasts

Cathode-disconnect ballasts consist
of standard, energy-efficient
magnetic ballasts. They incorporate
electronic components that
disconnect power to the cathodes
(i.e., filaments) after the fluorescent
lamps are lit, resulting in an
additional 2-watt savings per
standard lamp.

Applications

These ballasts are suitable for ail 2-
lamp magnetic ballast applications
for 4-foot T8, T10 or T12 rapid start
fluorescent lamps. Hybrid magnetic
ballasts are about $4 less expensive
and nearly as efficient as 2-lamp
electronic ballasts. However,
greater energy and material cost
savings can be realized using 3- and
4-lamp electronic ballasts where
applicable.

In applications where
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
from electronic ballasts is a potential
problem (near very sensitive
electronic equipment), hybrid
magnetic ballasts should be
considered. Both electronic and
hybrid ballasts pass the FCC
requirements for EMI, but total EMI
is lower with hybrid ballasts.

Qualifications

Hybrid ballasts are manufactured as
either full-output ballasts or partial-
output ballasts. The partial-output
hybrid ballasts consume about the
same wattage as electronic ballasts,
but produce up to 10% less light
output. Full-output T12 and T8
hybrid magnetic ballasts are
available that produce light output
that is comparable to either standard
magnetic ballasts or full-output
electronic ballasts. Refer to the
ballast charts at the end of this
section for wattage and relative light
output data. Hybrid ballasts should
not be used in any dimming
applications or with T12 32-watt
heater cutout lamps.

Currently, all hybrid magnetic
ballasts for 40W T12 and 32W T8
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
lamps are only available in the 2-
lamp configuration
HyDnd ballasts operate at 60 Hz and
can potentially produce the same
hum and flicker problems caused by
conventional low-frequency ballasts.

For independently measured
performance data for specific name-
brand hybrid ballasts, refer to
Specifier Reports, "Cathode-
Disconnect Ballasts " Volume 2
Issue 1, National Lighting Product
Information Program, June 1993.

Alternatives

To achieve maximum efficiency and
energy savings, consider installing
3- and 4-lamp electronic ballasts as
an alternative. For example, the 4-
lamp T8 electronic ballast produces
approximately 89 lumens per watt,
compared to 82 lumens per watt for
the 2-lamp T8 cathode-disconnect
ballast.

"Energy-Efficient" Magnetic
Ballasts

These ballasts are premium versions
of the older standard magnetic
"core-and-coil" ballasts and are now
the standard for magnetic ballast
production. Ironically, these are the
least energy-efficient ballasts that
you can buy to operate full-size
fluorescent lighting systems!

Applications

You can use these ballasts in all
magnetic ballast applications for full-
size fluorescent lamps.

Qualifica tions

Other more efficient ballast options
exist, such as electronic or hybrid
magnetic ballasts.
Fluorescent Lamp
Upgrades

T8 Lamp-Ballast Upgrade

The T8 lamp-ballast system is
among the most efficient fluorescent
systems (approximately 90 lumens
per watt when used with a 4-lamp
electronic ballast).

Applications

T8 lamps have the same medium
bipin bases of T12 lamps, allowing
them to fit into the same sockets.
T8 lamps operate on a reduced
current (265mA) and, therefore.
must be operated using a ballast
designed for T8 lamp operation. T8
lamps are available in 2', 3', 4', 5',
and 8' straight tubes, and 2' U-tubes.
You can select either the standard 6"
leg spacing for retrofit or the 1.625"
leg spacing for new applications.

All T8 lamps use tri-phosphor
coatings that improve color
rendering performance.

One manufacturer produces a 36W
T8 lamp for 4' luminaires that
produces over 30% more lumens
than standard 32W T8 systems
when used with a dedicated higher-
output electronic ballast. This
system may be used to partially
offset light reductions associated
with delamping strategies, while
providing approximately 90 lumens
per watt.

Qualifica tions

Because converting to T8 lamps
requires new ballasts, you should
include the cost of new ballasts in
the project cost estimate. Consider
installing electronic T8 ballasts for
maximum efficiency.

Although T8 lamps are classified as
rapid-start lamps, electronic ballasts
can start these lamps in either rapid-
start or instant-start mode. There is
a tradeoff to consider when choosing
between rapid-start and mstani-stan
T8 electronic ballasts T8 lamps
operating on instant-start ballasts
will produce about 6% more lumens
per watt (more efficient) but will
result in a reduction in lamp life
The amount of lamp life reduction
depends on how frequently you
switch the system on and off At 3
hours per start, the lamp life
reduction is 25%. but at 12 hours per
start, the reduction is negligible
Frequently, the financial advantage
of using the more efficient instant-
start ballasts more than offsets the
costs associated with reduced lamp
life. However, when occupancy
sensors will result in frequent
switching, consider using rapid-start
ballasts. Use the Quikalc analysis
software to assess the effects of
lamp life and efficiency on the total
financial return.

The National Lighting Product
Information Program (NLPIP) has
published an issue of Lighting
Answers entitled, "T8 Fluorescent
Lamps" which provides general
performance information about T8
fluorescent systems.
Effect of Burning Periods
on T8 Lamp Life
Source: NLPIP
6 10 '3 '8
Burning PenoO [hours per start]
Com
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
T-8
40W T10 Lamps

The T10 lamp is a high-efficiency,
high lumen output (approx. 3600
lumens) F40 fluorescent lamp.
Using T10 lamps instead of standard
40-watt cool-white T12 lamps will
increase light levels about 17%.
Sometimes, the efficacies of T10
applications can exceed those for T8
applications.

Applications

You can use T10 lamps with
conventional T12 ballasts.

Because T10 lamps have a color
rendering index of 80 or more, they
improve the color rendering quality
of the lighting system. T10 lamps
are currently available as straight
four-foot lamps.

T10 lamps are commonly used for
increasing light levels, usually after
strategically removing one or more
lamps from a multi-lamp luminaire
and/or installing reflectors.

Qualifications

Check with your ballast supplier if
you want to operate four T10 lamps
on a 4-lamp electronic ballast. This
combination is not recommended for
older 4-lamp electronic ballast
designs.

Although advertised as 40W lamps,
they actually consume about 42
watts. This added current may
increase ballast temperature,
affecting ballast life.

Conduct a trial installation to see the
effect of the increased light output
from these lamps. Remember to
allow the lamps to "burn in" for 100
hours before measuring initial light
levels. Refer to Lighting Evaluations
for more guidance regarding trial
installations.
,S
Q
T-12
Rapid Start and
Preheat Lamps
Instant Start
(Slimline) Lamps
High Output (HO)
Rapid Start Lamps
40W T12 High-Lumen
Lamps

These high-lumen lamps are
standard-size T12 F40 lamps with a
thick tri-phosphor coating that
produces 6-8% more light with no
increase in energy consumption
compared to standard 40-watt
lamps.

Applications

Use high-lumen T12 lamps where
you want a modest increase in light
output and improved color rendering
(CRI 70-85).

Alternatives

Depending on luminaire thermal
characteristics, you may achieve
higher efficacies with either T8 or
T10 lamps.

Reduced-Wattage T12
Fluorescent Lamps

The 34-watt "energy saver"
fluorescent lamp is essentially a
standard 40-watt fluorescent lamp.
It is filled with an argon-krypton gas
mixture (rather than just argon),
causing the lamp to draw only 34
watts.
Similar reduced wattage versions
exist to replace the following eight-
foot lamps.

«• 60W vs. 75W slimline

«• 95W vs. 110W high-output
(HO/800mA)

«- 185W vs. 215W very-high-
output (VHO/1500mA)

Applications

These lamps can replace standard
T12 lamps in spaces that are
currently over-illuminated. The
energy savings is roughly
proportional to the lamp wattage
reduction. No ballast upgrades are
required when converting to the
energy saver lamps.

Qualifications

Although the unit wattage is
reduced, the resulting light output is
also reduced. In most applications,
energy saver lamps do not increase
the system efficacy.

The 34W and 60W energy-saver
lamps cannot be dimmed as easily
as standard 40W and 75W T12
lamps, and they are more sensitive
to temperature. The minimum
starting temperature of 34W and
60W energy saver lamps when used
with electronic ballasts is 60°F
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Alternatives

For maximum energy savings and
efficiency in four-foot commercial
applications, consider installing T8 or
T10 lamps with electronic ballasts as
an alternative. The lamp-ballast
tables at the end of this section list
system wattage, ballast factors,
lumen outputs, and system efficacies
of various lamp-ballast systems.

32W Heater Cutout
Fluorescent Lamps

These lamps are energy-saver
fluorescent lamps, incorporating a
pair of thermally-activated switches
that open after the normal rapid-start
ignition sequence. This process
results in an additional 2-watt
savings per lamp.

Applications

F40 lamp applications, subject to the
following qualifications.

Qualifications

You should use heater cutout lamps
only on rapid-start circuits and not in
luminaires with electronic ballasts,
current limiters, or starters.

The thermally-activated switches
require a restrike time of about one
minute after the lamp is turned off.
This may present a limitation when
used in frequently-switched areas or
in systems controlled with occupancy
sensors. In addition, heater cutout
lamps should not be used in
emergency lighting luminaires.

Heater cutout lamps have up to a
25% shorter rated life than other
F40T12lamps.

Alternatives

For maximum energy savings and
efficiency, consider installing T8 or
T10 lamps and electronic ballasts as
an alternative.
Fluorescent Luminaire
Upgrades

Delamping

Delamping is simply the removal of
one or more lamps from a luminaire.

Applications

You can use two approaches to
delamping.

&" uniform delamping for reducing
light levels throughout the space

^ task-oriented delamping to place
more light directly in the work
area and less light in the
circulation areas

Relocating lamps so that they are
centered on each half of the
luminaire will improve light output
and distribution, and will result in a
more acceptable upgrade
appearance.

You can combine delamping with
the use of higher output lamps,
reflectors, lens upgrades, luminaire
cleaning, and task lighting to
minimize light output reduction.

The number of lamps removed
directly determines light level
reduction. However, in enclosed
luminaires, delamping will result in a
5-10% increase in efficacy (lumens
per watt) due to the cooler operating
temperature and reduced lamp
shadowing that results. Depending
on ambient temperature, delamping
an open strip luminaire may either
increase or decrease efficacy.

Qualifications

If you do not relocate the remaining
lamps, the appearance of a
delamped luminaire may not be
acceptable. You should disconnect
rapid-start ballasts that operated the
removed lamps. In addition,
removing the unused sockets will
prevent "snap-back" (re-installing
lamps where they have been
removed).

Alternatives

Delamping may not be feasible in
series-wired two-lamp luminaires
where the removal of one lamp
extinguishes the other lamp. In such
cases, consider installing partial-
output (low ballast factor) electronic
ballasts to operate both lamps at
reduced wattage and reduced
output.

Specular Reflectors with
Delamping

You can improve luminaire
efficiency by as much as 17% by
removing one or more lamps and
installing a specular "mirror-like"
reflector in the luminaire behind the
lamps. In fact, you can improve
efficiency by more than 17% when
you install reflectors in older
luminaires where the finish is dull or
has deteriorated. In addition to
specular aluminum and silver
reflector materials, highly reflective
white retrofit reflector kits are now
available for upgrading deteriorated
luminaire surfaces.

Applications

Typically, the remaining two lamps
in a 2'x4' luminaire are relocated to
positions centered on each side of
the luminaire for maximum use of
the reflector. This enhances light
output and distribution and will result
in a more acceptable luminaire
appearance. Specular reflectors
may be an economical means of
restoring the efficiency of an older
luminaire.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Source: EPRI
You should disconnect all rapid-start
ballasts that operated the removed
lamps to save additional energy.

Reflectors may be combined with
installation of higher output lamps,
ballasts and/or improved lenses to
minimize light output reduction (and
sometimes, increase light output).

To maintain the increase in
luminaire efficiency that results from
a specular reflector installation,
reflector surfaces should be cleaned
at regular intervals.

Qualifications

When using 50% of the original
lamps in 2'x4' troffers, average light
levels are typically reduced by 30-
45% (assuming comparable
conditions of luminaire dirt and lamp
age). If existing luminaires show
some surface deterioration (reduced
efficiency that cleaning cannot
improve), reductions in light output
resulting from installing reflectors
and delamping will be lessened.. To
assess the performance of specular
reflectors, set up a trial installation
comparing the lighting in a room
with clean, delamped luminaires to
one with reflectors. See Lighting
Evaluations for specific procedures
to follow for conducting a
photometric evaluation both before
and after a trial installation.

Even a well-designed reflector may
affect light distribution. You should
evaluate potential effects using
either luminaire photometric data
(primarily spacing criteria) or a trial
installation (See Lighting
Evaluations). Retrofit reflectors
concentrate the light distribution
downward. Although this
concentration can reduce glare and
brightness, it can also reduce the
uniformity of illuminance throughout
the space. "Imaging" reflector
designs -- those that make the
luminaire appear to have all four
lamps installed -- may reduce both
light distribution and output.
Without reflector
Lrgnt unoergoes muitioe ttttuse reflections ana
loses intensity before leaving ihe future
With reflector
Lrgnt reflections are minimized ov ine soecuiar
reliective sunace 'educing horn loss wnnv 25-40° 0
If lamps need to be relocated or if
the reflector is being used as part of
an electrical enclosure, specify only
UL-classified reflectors and
accessories. These include
installation instructions for your
specific luminaire's make and
model.

Check the design for accessibility to
the ballast compartment.

Differences between manufacturers'
reflector designs and materials can
cause wide variations in reflector
performance.

For independently measured
performance data for specific name-
brand reflectors, refer to Specifier
Reports, "Specular Reflectors,"
Volume 1 Issue 3, National Lighting
Product Information Program, July
1992.

Power Reducers

Power Reducers (also called
"current limiters") are retrofit devices
for fluorescent luminaires that
reduce light output with a
corresponding reduction in power
consumption.
Applications

Most power reducers achieve a
preset light output reduction — and
energy savings — of 20, 33, or 50%.
In addition, power reducers extend
magnetic ballast life by reducing
ballast operating temperature.
Power reducers enable light-output
reductions as an alternative to
delamping. They may be preferred
to delamping in applications
involving 2-lamp series-wired
systems where the removal of one
lamp will also extinguish the other
lamp.

You can install power reducers
directly inside the ballast
compartment or as a companion
lamp. The use of the companion
lamp design is discouraged because
it can be easily removed from the
luminaire, eliminating future energy
savings.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
For maximum energy savings and
efficiency, however, consider partial-
output electronic ballasts as an
alternative.

Qualifications

Power reducers do not improve the
inherent efficacy of the lamp-ballast
system. However, due to the
relationship between operating
temperature and fluorescent
efficacy, slight increases in efficacy
may result with power reducers
installed in enclosed luminaires.

Power reducers cannot be used with
electronic ballasts.

Most power reducers increase total
harmonic distortion in rapid start
systems to over 32%, which is
considered an unacceptable level by
most building engineers, utility
companies, and ANSI. In addition,
some power reducers can increase
the lamp current crest factor to over
1.7 in rapid start systems, which can
void lamp warranties. Check with
the manufacturers of your lamps and
ballasts to find out if the installation
of power reducers will have any
effect on their warranties.

Consider performing two
comparative trial installations:
Install power reducers and compare
their measured performance with
partial-output electronic ballasts.
Verify that the resultant light levels
will be satisfactory. Refer to Lighting
Evaluations regarding trial
installations.

Not all power reducers perform
identically. For independently
measured performance data for
specific name-brand power
reducers, refer to Specifier Reports,
"Power Reducers," Volume 1 Issue
2, National Lighting Product
Information Program, March 1992.
2-FOOT X 4-FOOT TROFFER SHIELDING MEDIA
Shielding Material
Standard Clear Lens
Low-Glare Clear Lens
Deep Cell Parabolic Louver
Translucent Diffuser
White Metal Louver
Small Cell Parabolic Louver
Efficiency Range (%)
60-70
60-75
50-65
40-60
35-45
35-45
VCP Range (%)
50-75
75-85
75-95
40-50
65-85
99
Lens/Louver Upgrade

You can significantly improve
luminaire efficiency by replacing
inefficient or deteriorated shielding
materials. Clear acrylic lenses
provide maximum efficiency, and
deep-cell parabolic louvers provide
a good combination of efficiency and
glare control. Low-glare acrylic
lenses are now available that reduce
luminaire brightness at high viewing
angels (VCP>80) while maintaining
high efficiency.

Applications

The least efficient glare shielding
materials — such as translucent
diffusers or small-cell louvers —
should be replaced with either clear
acrylic lenses or large-cell parabolic
louvers.

To assess impacts on visual comfort
(glare control capability), refer to the
product's visual comfort probability
(VCP) data or perform a trial
installation. Visual comfort is
improved when light emitted at
higher angles is shielded.

Qualifications

Smaller cell parabolic louvers (2" or
smaller cells) provide high visual
comfort (>90 VCP) but significantly
reduce efficiency.

If sufficient plenum space is
available above the ceiling grid,
deep-cell parabolic louver upgrades
can be installed in many kinds of
existing fluorescent luminaires.
Alternatives

Alternately, consider installing new
deep-cell parabolic louver luminaires
or low-glare clear lenses.

Replace with New Efficient
Luminaires

Instead of upgrading individual
luminaire components, consider the
labor savings and quality
improvements you can achieve by
other means. For example, you can
replace existing luminaires with new
ones featuring high-efficiency
components such as T8 lamps,
electronic ballasts, deep-cell
parabolic louvers, and optional
daylight-dimming controls.

Applications

Several conditions enhance the
cost-effectiveness of new luminaires.

* multiple luminaire component
replacements (e.g., new lamps,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, etc.)

* deep-cell parabolic louvers or
indirect lighting systems desired
for combined efficiency and
glare control

* space will be remodeled or the
luminaire locations will be
changed

You should consider new luminaires
in offices where computers are used.
Luminaires in these areas should
provide shielding of high-angle light
that causes objectionable reflections
in VDT screens, especially in large,
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10
open offices. The Illuminating
Engineering Society (IES) has
published their Recommended
Practice No. 24 (RP-24) which
addresses appropriate methods for
lighting offices containing computer
visual display terminals. Luminaires
that meet the glare shielding criteria
of RP-24 have the following
luminance (brightness) limits at
specific angles.
Viewing
Angle
(above nadir)
>55°
>65°
>75°
Source:
Maximum
Luminance
(brightness)
850 cd/m2
350 cd/m2
175 cd/m2
IES RP-24
Qualifications

Before installing new luminaires, ask
a lighting consultant to verify the
correct number and spacing of the
luminaires based on published
photometric data and the desired
illumination level.

Indirect Luminaires

Indirect luminaires distribute at least
90 percent of the emitted light
upwards to reflect off the ceiling,
providing uniform, diffuse lighting on
ceilings, walls, and tasks. Because
occupants cannot see the light
sources, indirect systems provide
high visual comfort. Compared with
direct lighting systems, indirect
lighting can create the illusion of a .
more spacious and pleasant
environment because ceilings and
walls are uniformly illuminated.

Applications

Indirect fluorescent lighting is an
excellent application for offices with
computers. Indirect luminaires
provide a uniform lighting
distribution on the ceiling and walls,
helping eliminate the distracting
glare of light sources on display
screens. Properly installed, indirect
luminaires meet the performance
criteria of IES RP-24 for illuminating
spaces with personal computers
(see section above).

Another common application for
indirect lighting is in partitioned
spaces. Because the light reflected
off the ceiling is more diffuse than
light from direct systems, shadowing
effects caused by the partitions are
reduced.

Indirect luminaires are usually
suspended from the ceiling, although
some luminaires are available that
can be directly mounted on systems
furniture. Indirect lighting can also
be used with compact fluorescent
task lights for an energy-efficient
task/ambient lighting system.
The combined use of both direct and
indirect lighting can create a
pleasing aesthetic effect. The direct
lighting system can provide the
needed ambient illumination in the
interior area of a large space, while
the indirect luminaires can provide
perimeter illumination and wall
washing. Some spaces with purely
indirect systems have been
described as "washed out" or "bland"
without the contrast-enhancing
qualities of direct lighting.
Qualifica tions

Indirect systems yield a slightly
lower workplane lumen efficacy
(workplane lumens per system watt)
than direct systems using the same
lamp-ballast combination. However,
upgrading to a more efficient lamp-
ballast combination can offset this
decrease in efficacy.

A highly reflective ceiling is essential
for indirect systems. Workplane
lumen efficacy will significantly
decline when ceiling reflectances are
below 80 percent. In addition, walls
should have a high reflectance (at
least 50 percent reflectance).

Indirect lighting systems are more
susceptible to dirt depreciation.
Dust can settle on the lens or inside
surfaces, so regular cleaning is
strongly recommended to minimize
these effects.

When installing indirect luminaires,
mount them according to
manufacturer's specifications. The
correct suspension distance is
critical for indirect lighting system
performance. If the sources are
mounted too close to the ceiling, the
resulting "hot-spots" will cause
unwanted glare on computer
screens. Suspending the luminaire
too far from the ceiling will decrease
the efficiency of the system.

Because indirect systems need to
Typical Three-Lamp Parabolic Troffer
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11
be suspended below the ceiling,
areas with low ceilings may be
unacceptable. In such areas,
consider installing indirect systems
with a wide lighting distribution
lateral to the lamp axis. You should
evaluate user acceptance first in a
trial installation.

Most indirect systems are installed in
new construction and renovations,
although retrofit indirect lighting kits
are available. Indirect lighting is
generally more expensive than
direct systems, but check with local
suppliers and contractors for
installed costs in your area.

Task Lighting with
Delamping

You can achieve significant energy
savings and lighting quality
improvements by providing light
sources at specific task locations
while reducing ambient (overhead)
lighting. Compact fluorescent task
lighting with delamping increases
visual comfort, saves energy, and
provides users with greater control
over their workstation illuminance.

Applications

"Task/ambient" lighting designs are
best suited for office environments
with significant VDT usage and/or
where modular furniture can
incorporate task lighting under
shelves.

In other cases, desk lamps may be
used to provide task illumination.

In most workplaces, employees
perform a variety of visual tasks. In
addition, workers have varying
visual capabilities and preferences.
Task lighting can enhance user
acceptance of the lighting system,
because you can adjust task lights to
higher levels of illuminance at your
discretion. In situations where older
workers require higher light levels,
you could provide an additional task
light.
Qualifications

Energy savings result when the
energy saved from delamping
exceeds the added energy used for
the task lights. Sometimes, the use
of incandescent task lights may add
more load than can be eliminated
from the ambient lighting system.
Compact fluorescent task lights are
very efficient sources for task
lighting.

Non-adjustable task light strips that
are permanently mounted under
cabinet shelves can cause reflected
glare on work surfaces. To reduce
reflected glare, specify compact
fluorescent task lights that allow
users to position the light to the side
of the task.

When adding task lights, consider
the electrical loads added to your
distribution system. Be careful not
to overload the amperage rating of
your building circuits.

Group Relamping and
Cleaning with Delamping

Planned maintenance involves
relamping and cleaning luminaires
according to a schedule determined
by lamp life, lumen depreciation
characteristics, and ambient dirt
conditions. Refer to Lighting
Maintenance for a complete
discussion of group relamping and
cleaning.

Applications

Periodic group relamping and
cleaning will significantly improve
luminaire efficiency and reduce
maintenance costs. The resulting
increased light output from properly
maintained luminaires may justify
delamping, use of partial-output
electronic ballasts, or relamping with
fewer lamps.
INCANDESCENT

UPGRADES

Wherever feasible, you should seek
alternatives to incandescent lamps.
With recent advances in compact
fluorescent and halogen lamps, the
continued use of standard
incandescent lamps is difficult to
justify.
Compact Fluorescent
Lamps

Compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs)
are energy-efficient, long-lasting
substitutes for incandescent lamps.
They are available in many
configurations including the most
common twin-tube, quad-tube, and
triple-twin-tube configurations. CFLs
can be purchased as self-ballasted
units or as discrete lamps and
ballasts. Several retrofit adapters
are available for convenient retrofit
in existing incandescent sockets.
Many CFL products are now
manufactured with electronic ballasts
which provide 20% higher efficacies
as well as instant starting, reduced
lamp flicker, quiet operation, smaller
size, and lighter weight.
Screw-In Compact Fluorescent
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
12
Applications

CFLs may be used in many
applications including downlights,
surface lights, pendant luminaires,
task lights, compact troffers,
sconces, exit lights, step lights, and
flood lights. Although some CFL
packages are too bulky to fit in
standard table lamps, plug-in (wall
outlet) ballasts are now available.
They enable the use of screw-in
compact fluorescent lamps in table
lamps without a ballast attachment.

Qualifications

Because compact fluorescent lamps
are not point sources (like
incandescent or HID lamps), CFLs
are not as effective in projecting
light over distance. The light output
from CFLs is much more diffuse;
lumens easily stray from the
intended target in directional lighting
applications. As such, these lamps
may not be suitable in high ceiling
downlighting applications (greater
than 15') or where tight control of
beam spread is necessary.

Where dimming is important,
compact fluorescents may not be
appropriate for lighting retrofits.
Compact fluorescent lamps cannot
be dimmed using conventional
dimming equipment without a fire
risk. Some dimming CFLs are
available, but they usually require a
new luminaire.
Some CFLs have difficulty starting
when ambient temperature drops
below 40°F, while others start at
temperatures below freezing. Refer
to manufacturer specifications.

The light output of CFLs is
significantly reduced when used in
luminaires that trap heat near the
lamp or when exposed to cold
temperatures. However, when a
mercury amalgam is incorporated,
the light output at temperature
extremes is typically within 85% of
maximum.

In addition, the orientation of the
lamp can also significantly affect
lumen output. Depending on the
lamp design and ambient
temperature, the light output in the
base down orientation may be 15%
less than in the base up position.
You should try a trial installation
before purchasing large quantities.

Most lamps operating on magnetic
ballasts require one to three seconds
to start and rise to full output. If you
require instantaneous lighting, use
compact fluorescent electronic
ballasts or T5 rapid start lamp-
ballast systems.

Some compact fluorescent systems
with electronic ballasts may be
incompatible with occupancy
sensors that use solid-state switches
(triacs) instead of air-gap switches or
relays. In these situations, the
occupancy sensor may not function
Common Compact Fluorescent Lamp Types
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
with electronically-ballasted lamps
unless a ground wire is available
Check with your occupancy sensor
supplier to verify compatibility.

The total,harmonic distortion (THD)
from most magnetically ballasted
compact fluorescents is in the range of
15-25%. However, the THD from
electronically ballasted compact
fluorescents can be significantly higher
(up to 140%). When using many
electronically ballasted compact
fluorescent lamps on a circuit, consider
specifying "low-harmonic" electronic or
Integral
Modular
magnetic ballasts which produce less
than 32 percent THD.
To achieve the compact size and low
cost of compact fluorescent ballasts,
many are produced with a normal power
factor (NPF) rating in the range of 40-
60%. This causes the ballast to draw
more current (amps), but not more
energy (watts), than the high power
factor type. When using a large number
of NPF ballasts in a given location,
consult your utility representative or a
professional engineer. They can help
evaluate the impact of power factor on
your utility bill.

For independently measured
performance data for specific name-
brand CFLs, refer to Specifier Reports,
"Screwbase Compact Fluorescent
Lamp Products," Volume 1 Issue 6,
National Lighting Product Information
Program, April 1993.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
13
Compact Halogen
Lamps

Compact halogen lamps consist of a
small tungsten-halogen capsule
lamp within a standard lamp shape
similar to PAR lamps or general
service A-type lamps. These lamps
are adapted for use as direct
replacements for standard
incandescent lamps. Halogen lamps
are more efficient, produce a whiter
light, and last longer than
conventional incandescent lamps.

Applications

Generally, compact halogen lamps
should be considered for replacing
incandescents wherever compact
fluorescents would not be a better
choice. (See the qualifications listed
under CFLs above.) Compact
halogen lamps can be dimmed, and
their performance is independent of
temperature and orientation. In
addition, they project light efficiently
over long distances, and they
present no power quality or
compatibility concerns.

The best applications are in accent
lighting and retail display lighting,
especially where tight control of
beam spread is necessary. Other
good applications include high-
ceiling downlighting and "instant-on"
power floodlighting. An optional
infrared (IR) coating applied to the
halogen capsule or specially
designed reflectors can further
increase the efficacy of this light
source in PAR lamp applications.

You can use compact halogen
lamps in full-range dimming
applications, but constant dimming
below 35% of full light output may
reduce lamp life.

Qualifications

Lamps with optional diodes (for
improving lamp optics) can flicker
and have adverse effects on
dimming and power quality.

Due to their lower efficacy, you
should not use compact halogen
lamps in applications where compact
fluorescent lamps would serve
satisfactorily.
Exit Sign Upgrades

Exit sign upgrades can potentially
reduce energy and maintenance
costs significantly. To replace up to
40 watts of incandescent power per
exit sign, consider the following light
sources.

Retrofit

* light-emitting diode (LED)
* electroluminescent
* low-wattage incandescent
assembly
* compact fluorescent

New Exit Signs

» LED
» electroluminescent
* tritium or self-
luminous
* compact fluorescent
Applications

All emergency exit signs
should illuminate 24
hours per day and
continue operation in
case of power failure.
You can achieve
significant energy sav-
ings by simply replacing
or upgrading the exit
signs with a low-energy
model.
Common to all retrofit kits are
adapters that screw into the existing
incandescent sockets to make
installation simple. However to
avoid snap-back, retrofit kits are
available for hard-wire installation.
Whatever connection methods you
select, installation is easy, usually
taking fifteen minutes or less per
sign.

Of the retrofit options, light-emitting
diode (LED) sources are the most
cost-effective. Combined with the
extremely long rated life of LED
sources, this option is an economical
retrofit based on life cycle cost. The
LED retrofit consists of a pair of LED
strips that follow the side panels of
the exit sign enclosure. Reflective
film or a diffusing panel is used to
direct the LED output to the face of
the sign.

Another low-cost retrofit solution is
the incandescent assembly. A series
of low-voltage, low-wattage, long-life
incandescents are available in a
variety of configurations (such as a
luminous rope or cluster). These
Cut-Away View Showing
Tungsten-Halogen Capsule
Within a PAR Lamp
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
14
EXIT SIGN TECHNOLOGIES
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE
Source
Typical
Wattage
Life
(yrs)
Replacement
Source
Annual
Energy
Cost ($)
Annual
Mamt.
Cost ($)
Upgrade
Cost ($)
NPV($)
per Sign
New Fixtures
Incandescent
CFL
Electroluminescent
Self Luminous (Tritium)
LED
40
10
1
0
5
0.8
2
10
10-20
80+
lamp
lamp
light panel
tube console
circuit board
28.00
7.00
0.70
0
3.50
19.50
9.5
20.50
10.50
0
N/A
116.00
190.00
247.00
116.00
N/A
296.00
166.00
25200
466.00
Retrofit Light Sources
Reduced Wattage Incan.
CFL
LED
8
10
4
10
1.2
80+
light tube
lamp
LED kit
5.60
7.00
2.80
4.00
9.50
0
30.00
30.00
45.00
46700
37700
540.00
Note: Material, labor, and energy costs and lamp performance can vary. Contact local suppliers for specific prices and performance data.

ASSUMPTIONS

One-sided exit sign
Ten year life used for tritium signs
Maintenance costs based on materials and labor for source replacement on a spot relamping basis
$0.08 per kWh, labor = $15 per hour
Upgrade cost includes labor and materials
Financial analysis based on 20-yr life cycle with 3% inflation and discount rate of 12%
devices simply screw into the
existing incandescent sockets.

Until recently, electroluminescent"
(EL) exit signs had only been
available as replacement signs.
Now you can upgrade your existing
exit sign enclosures with EL panels
that consume less than one watt!

Compact fluorescent lamps have
been recommended for years as an
energy-efficient retrofit for exit signs.
However, the LED, EL, and low-
wattage incandescent technologies
discussed above exceed CFL life
and efficacy.

Several choices exist for replacing
exit signs. Among these choices,
tritium or self-luminous sources are
the most energy efficient,
consuming no electricity. Note,
however, that the spent tritium tubes
must be disposed of as a radioactive
waste. Other new fixture choices
include LED, electroluminescent,
and compact fluorescent.
To select the most financially
attractive exit sign upgrade, consider
all of the costs that will occur during
the life cycle, including installation,
energy, maintenance, and disposal.
The table above compares new
fixture and retrofit options to an
incandescent base case.

Note that for new fixtures and
retrofits, LED sources have the
highest net present value (NPV).
That is, LED retrofits can yield the
most net profit. Use Quikalc and
your specific financial assumptions
to calculate the life-cycle net present
value of replacing incandescents
with an energy-efficient exit sign
technology. (See Financial
Considerations for more information
about financial analysis.)

Qualifications

Check with local building codes for
accepted emergency exit sign
illuminance and retrofit sources.
Verify that the exit sign illumination
sources are UL-listed for use in your
exit sign.

Reliability is important for exit signs.
For example, sources with a shorter
life are more likely to be burnt out
when an emergency occurs. Of all
the new technologies, LED sources
have the longest rated life. Most
claims state that LED sources will
last 80 years, although some reports
have rated their life at more than
100 years. Self-luminous and
electroluminescent sources also
have long life spans. The table
above identifies the expected life of
each technology.

Note that the light output of
electroluminescent light sources
depreciates significantly overtime.
Request information about the
lumen depreciation performance of
the electroluminescent product that
you are considering, and evaluate
whether the maintained light output
will be acceptable.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
15
Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium Lamp Construction
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Outer
Bulb
(Columbium)
or Ceramic Plug
Tungsten Electrode
Since tritium is radioactive, expired
tritium tubes must be disposed of as
radioactive waste. To insure proper
disposal of the luminous tubes,
manufacturers will specify an
address on the tube console,
indicating where to send it for
disposal.

For more technical information and
independently measured
performance data for specific name-
brand exit signs, refer to Specifier
Reports, "Exit Signs," Volume 2,
Issue 2, National Lighting Product
Information Program, January 1994.
Compact HID Sources

New manufacturing methods have
produced low-wattage (<150-watt)
metal halide and high pressure
sodium lamps.

Applications

Primarily intended for new
construction or remodeling
applications, compact high-intensity
discharge (HID) lamps are high-
efficiency point sources that lend
themselves to projection and
floodlight applications as well as
general illumination.

Qualifications

All metal halide lamps are
susceptible to lamp-to-lamp color
differences and color shift over life.
Compact "white" high pressure
sodium lamps offer improved color
rendering (80-85 CRI) compared to
standard HPS lamps. After their
"color life," the color quality
becomes similar to standard HPS
lamps (25 CRI). In addition, the
efficacy of white HPS lamps is 36-53
lumens per watt, comparable to
compact fluorescent lamps.

All HID lamps require warm-up and
restrike periods, so they should not
be used in frequent switching
installations.
HID UPGRADES

The primary method of improving
the efficiency of high-intensity
discharge (HID) systems is replacing
the light source with a more
efficacious system. Other retrofit
options include reduced-wattage HID
lamps, retrofit reflectors, HPS lamps
for mercury ballasts, and bi-level
HID luminaire switching.
Conversion to High-
Efficiency HID System

Metal halide (MH), high pressure
sodium (HPS), or low pressure
sodium (LPS) systems can replace
(1) existing high-bay or outdoor
lighting systems using incandescent,
mercury vapor or (2) fluorescent
lamps (in some cases). These
retrofits normally include a complete
luminaire replacement, including the
lamp, ballast and optical assembly.
Refer to Lighting Fundamentals for a
complete discussion of these lamps
and their characteristics.

Applications

The most cost-effective upgrades
involve replacing less efficient
sources such as incandescent, VHO
fluorescent, or mercury vapor with
MH, HPS, or LPS systems. This
may involve a one-for-one luminaire
replacement or a new layout of
luminaires to take advantage of the
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
16
different light distribution
characteristics of HID luminaires.

Qualifications

You should select a HID luminaire
and its lamp based on the following
criteria pertaining to the task.

^ color rendering quality
^ efficiency
•/ lamp life
^ lumen maintenance
v' light distribution

Refer to Lighting Fundamentals for a
complete discussion of these
characteristics.
Reduced-Wattage HID
Lamps

Reduced-wattage metal halide and
high-pressure sodium lamps are
available that deliver comparable
illumination with up to 10%
reductions in energy use. At least
one manufacturer produces "energy
saver" versions of standard high-
pressure sodium lamps. Advertised
as 360W and 225W replacements
for 400W and 250W HPS lamps,
these lamps save 27 watts and 20
watts (respectively) after accounting
for increased ballast losses. This
translates to an 8% boost in efficacy.
According to the manufacturer, no
reductions in light output will result.

Applications

The 360W and 225W lamps can
directly replace 400W and 250W
standard high pressure sodium
lamps. Reduced-wattage metal
halide lamps are available to replace
175W, 250W, and 400W metal
halide lamps.

Qualifications

You should try a simple trial
installation to compare the light
output and quality of these new
lamps. Remember to correct for
lamp lumen depreciation when
comparing the old and new lamps.
Refer to Lighting Maintenance for a
complete discussion of lamp lumen
depreciation effects.

Make sure that any retrofit lamp
under consideration is UL-listed.
Retrofit HID Reflectors

Conventional HID reflectors can be
retrofit or replaced with specular or
transparent reflectors to enhance
luminaire efficiency.

Applications

In clean environments, retrofit HID
reflectors can increase illuminance
on task surfaces without increasing
energy consumption. Sometimes,
you can remove or de-energize
luminaires due to the efficiency
improvement. In addition, proper
applications of retrofit reflectors can
reduce glare.

Qualifications

The installation of retrofit reflectors
may alter the lighting distribution
from your existing HID luminaires.
When performing a trial installation,
check for uniformity of illuminance,
visual comfort (glare), illuminance
on vertical surfaces, color shift, and
aesthetic effects such as darkness of
ceilings and walls.
HPS Lamps for Use on
Existing Mercury
Ballasts

High pressure sodium lamps can be
used for specific wattages of
mercury vapor lamps, without
requiring a ballast change.
Applications

These lamps provide an inexpensive
means for significantly improving
light output (by 76-106%) while
saving 6-14% in energy
consumption in existing mercury
vapor luminaires.

Qualifications

Make sure that any retrofit lamp
under consideration is UL-listed.

Verify that your existing mercury
vapor ballasts are compatible with
the retrofit HPS lamp.

Conduct a trial installation to find out
if resultant light levels and visual
comfort will be acceptable.

Alternatives

For greater energy savings and
wattage selection, consider replacing
the mercury vapor luminaire with a
new high-pressure sodium or
mercury vapor luminaire.
Capacitive Switching
HID Luminaires (Bi-
Level)

Capacitive switching (or "bi-level" or
"hi/lo") HID luminaires are designed
to provide either full light output or
partial light output based on inputs
from occupancy sensors, manual
switches, or scheduling systems.
Capacitive-switched dimming can be
installed as a retrofit to existing
luminaires or, more commonly, as a
direct luminaire replacement.
Capacitive switching HID upgrades
can be less expensive than installing
a panel-level variable voltage
control to dim the lights, especially
in circuits with relatively few
luminaires. In addition, it allows for
control of individual luminaires,
rather than entire circuits.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Wallbox Occupant Sensors
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Applications

The most common applications of
capacitive switching are occupancy-
sensed dimming in parking lots,
athletic facilities, and warehouse
aisles. General purpose transmitters
can be used with other control
devices such as timers and
photosensors to control the bi-level
luminaires. Upon sensing motion,
the occupancy sensor will send a
signal (typically by low-voltage
wiring) to the bi-level HID ballasts.
The system will rapidly bring the
light levels from a standby reduced
level to about 80 percent of full
output, followed by the normal
warm-up time between 80 percent
and 100 percent of full light output.

Depending on the lamp type and
wattage, the standby lumens are
roughly 15-40 percent of full output
and the standby wattage is 30-60
percent of full wattage. When the
space is unoccupied and the system
is dimmed, you can achieve energy
savings of 40-70 percent.

Qualifications

Lamp manufacturers do not
recommend dimming below 50% of
the rated input power. Check with
your lamp supplier to learn whether
the hi/low system will affect your
lamp warranty.
OCCUPANCY

SENSORS

Reducing watts represents only half
of the potential for maximizing
energy savings. Reducing operating
hours through automatic controls is
the other half. Occupancy sensors
are cost-effective devices that
ensure lights are energized only
when occupants are present.
Overview

Occupancy sensors save energy by
automatically turning off lights in
spaces that are unoccupied. When
the sensor detects motion, it
activates a control device that turns
on the luminaires. If no motion is
detected within a specified period,
the lights are turned off until motion
is sensed again.

Occupancy sensors are suitable for
a very wide range of lighting control
applications and should be
considered in every upgrade
decision. You can install occupancy
sensors to provide on/off control in
several situations. You can use
them with incandescent or
fluorescent loads, with bi-level
control capacitive-switching HID
luminaires (which idle in a low-
17

output mode during periods of
unoccupancy). Refer to the HID
upgrades section for a complete
discussion of capacitive switching
HID luminaires.

Most occupancy sensors have
adjustable settings for both
sensitivity and time delay. The
sensitivity setting enables you to fine
tune the sensor for the activities that
occur in the space. In this way, you
can ensure that normal motion is
•detected without triggering
responses to extraneous signals.
The time delay setting refers to the
amount of time that elapses with no
motion detected before the
luminaires are turned off. The time
delay prevents the luminaries from
switching off when people are in the
room, but are moving too little or too
slowly for the sensor to detect.

Some occupancy sensors provide
daylight switching with their
occupancy switching control.
Typically, these sensors will not shut
off the lighting system due to
sufficient daylight while the space is
occupied. Rather, they will prohibit
the lights from turning on when an
occupant enters a space where the
daylighting is sufficient. A trial
installation is recommended to
assess user acceptance of this
technology.
Mounting Locations

Occupancy sensors are available in
both ceiling-mounted and wall-
mounted versions, using either
infrared or ultrasonic sensing
technologies.

Wall-Mounted Sensors

Common applications for wall-
mounted sensors include separately
switched areas such as conference
rooms, classrooms, individual
offices, and storage rooms.
Because these devices are mounted
in existing light switch locations,
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
18
Ceiling-Mounted Occupant
Sensors
Source CEC'DOE/'EPRl
©
check the coverage pattern provided
by the sensor to see if it will
adequately detect motion throughout
the room. In addition, verify that the
type of motion in the space will be
detected, given the sensor type and
location (see discussion of infrared
and ultrasonic technologies below).
Besides the more common
"automatic-on/automatic-off
occupancy sensors, some prefer the
"manual-on/automatic-off sensors.
You must manually switch these
sensors to energize the luminaires;
however, the unit automatically turns
off the luminaires when motion is no
longer detected.

Ceiling-Mounted Sensors

Ceiling-mounted sensors should be
used in two circumstances: (1)
areas where wall-mounted switches
would be inadequate, such as
corridors, rest rooms, open office
areas, warehouse aisles, and-(2)
spaces where objects obstruct the
coverage of a wall-mounted sensor.
These sensors are usually wired to a
separate control module and one or
more relays that perform the actual
switching function in the ceiling
plenum. Multiple sensors and
lighting circuits can be controlled by
one control module, but
manufacturers specify a maximum
distance between the sensors and
the control module for reliable
operation. Ceiling-mounted sensors
are available in a variety of
detection patterns to provide
flexibility in mounting locations.
With ceiling-mounted sensors in
place, existing wall switches may be
used to turn off the lights while
occupants remain in the space.
Motion Sensing
Technologies

Two motion-sensing technologies
are commonly used in occupancy
sensors: passive infrared and
ultrasonic. Either technology can be
housed in ceiling-mounted or wall-
mounted sensors. Some
manufacturers combine these two
technologies into one product — a
hybrid or dual technology sensor.

Passive Infrared Sensors

Passive infrared (PIR) sensors
respond to motion between
horizontal and vertical cones of
vision defined by the faceted lens
surrounding the sensor. As an
occupant moves a hand, arm, or
torso from one cone of vision to
another, a positive "occupancy"
signal is generated and sent to the
controller. Because these cones of
vision radiate from the sensor, a
greater range of motion is required
at greater distance in order for the
sensor to detect motion. Most PIR
sensors are sensitive to hand
movement up to a distance of about
10 feet. They sense arm and upper
torso movement up to 20 feet, and
full-body motion up to about 40 feet.
The PIR sensors require an
unobstructed view of the motion and
are more sensitive to motion
occurring perpendicular to the line-
of-sight of the sensor. Because
infrared sensors require a direct line-
of-sight to the moving object,
obstructions impair their
performance. For example, they will
not operate properly in spaces where
furniture, partitions or other objects
are between the sensor and the
occupant.

Ultrasonic Sensors

Ultrasonic sensors emit and receive
high-frequency sound waves
between 25-40 kHz. well above the
range of human hearing. These
pressure waves reflect off people,
objects, and room surfaces, and the
sensor measures the frequency of
the waves that return to the receiver
If there is motion within the space,
the frequency of the reflected waves
will shift; the change is detected by
the receiver and the luminaires are
turned on. Ultrasonic sensors are
much more sensitive to movement
directly toward or away from the
sensor, compared to lateral
movements. To ensure accuracy,
the sensor should have a clear view
of the area to be controlled. High
partitions, especially those over 48
inches, can block its ability to detect
people. In addition, plush carpet
and fabric partitions may absorb the
waves and decrease effectiveness.

Installation

Occupancy sensors — when
properly specified, installed, and
adjusted — should provide reliable
operation of lighting systems during
periods of occupancy and should not
disrupt normal business activity.
Most failed occupancy sensor
installations result from improper
product selection and placement.
By following the guidelines below,
your occupancy sensor installation
should provide significant energy
savings.

Use professional services.

The specification and placement of
occupancy sensors should be done
by an experienced professional to
ensure adequate occupancy sensing
coverage.

Occupancy sensor systems must be
"tuned" after installation. This
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
19
involves adjusting sensitivity and
time delay settings as appropriate
for the space. Most suppliers offer
this post-installation service. As part
of your agreement with your
supplier, require a minimum 24-hour
response time to address occupant
complaints that may arise after the
sensors have been installed and
tuned. Occasionally, the placement
of sensors may need to be adjusted
to provide reliable coverage.

Select products with adequate
coverage areas.

Specifiers should pay particular
attention to the coverage area,
which defines the physical limits of
the sensor's ability to detect motion.
Most occupancy sensor
manufacturers publish their
coverage areas for the maximum
sensitivity setting, although product
literature may be unclear.
Sometimes, you may need more
than one occupancy sensor in a
space to extend the coverage area
(e.g., a large open office area).

Design sensor installations to
avoid false signals.

Both infrared and ultrasonic sensors
are susceptible to activation by false
signals.

Ultrasonic sensors can be activated
by vibrations (e.g., the starting of an
air conditioner). Also, ultrasonic
sensors can be activated by moving
air and should not be used in areas
where strong air currents exist.
Ceiling-mounted ultrasonic sensors
should be located at least 4 to 6 feet
from ventilation diffusers.

Infrared sensors are sometimes
located in positions that allow the
sensor to have line-of-sight into an
adjacent corridor, keeping lights on
unnecessarily. By applying a
masking material to the appropriate
facets of the PIR sensor's lens, you
can avoid this potential problem. In
addition, a mirrored image or direct
sunlight may provide a signal to the
PIR sensor that a space is occupied.

Select infrared or ultrasonic
technologies based on room
geometry and activities.

Infrared

^ requires line-of-sight — does not
work well where partitions may
block direct viewing of
occupants

v' magnitude of required motion is
directly proportional to distance
from the sensor

s least sensitive to motion toward
and away from the sensor, most
sensitive to motion lateral to
sensor
of-sight in large open office
plans with fabric partitions

s magnitude of required motion
increases with distance from the
sensor

/ least sensitive to motion lateral
to the sensor, most sensitive to
motion toward and away from
the sensor

s requires an enclosed space —
not for use outdoors or in high-
bay areas

Verify compatibility with
electronic ballasts.

Mechanical relays typically used in
older-technology occupancy sensors
may become damaged by high in-
rush currents. These currents result
from the occupancy sensor making
and breaking electrical contact in
electronically-ballasted fluorescent
systems.

Mechanical relays that were
commonly used with the earliest
occupancy sensor models were
rated for inductive and resistive
loads, characteristic of magnetic and
incandescent lighting systems,
respectively. However, changes
came with the introduction of more
complex harmonic filtering with
electronic ballasts. For instance, the
wave form generated when
switching electronically ballasted
^ does not
Energy Saving Potential with Occupancy Sensors
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI

Application Energy Savings

Offices (private) 25-50%
Offices (open spaces) 20-25%
Rest Rooms 30-75%
Corridors 30-40%
Storage Areas 45-65%
Meeting Rooms 45-65%
Conference Rooms 45-65%
Warehouses , 50-75%

'Note: Figures listed represent maximum energy savings potential
under optimum circumstances. Figures are based on manufacturer
estimates. Actual savings may vary.
require an
enclosed
space —
works well
outdoors and
in high-bay
areas

Ultrasonic

•/ does not
require line-
of-sight in
enclosed

spaces, may
rnrtt 1 i r*rt lifi*-t

fluorescent systems typically
includes a combination of resistive,
inductive, and capacitive loads.
With the use of a triac, the switching
system is protected to provide long
life.
Contact your supplier to verify that
their occupancy sensors are
compatible with electronic ballasts.

Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
20
Time Scheduling System Components
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Override Switcnes
_ Outputs
Low-Voltage Control
Wiring
Conduct a trial installation and
evaluate the sensor's
performance.

Not all sensors perform comparably.
Before purchasing a specific name
brand of sensor, conduct a simple
trial installation of all products under
consideration — simultaneously.
Follow the procedure below for
conducting your test.

*• Install the ceiling-mounted
sensors temporarily in a
strategic location as suggested
by the sensing coverage pattern.

<* Connect these sensors to a
power supply. They should not
be connected to the lighting
circuit.

&• Notice the LED indicator light
that illuminates when the sensor
detects motion. At various
locations in the test room,
, perform several types of
motions, varying the magnitude,
speed, and direction of motion.
Also, include a test that
evaluates the sensors ability to
detect motion behind obstacles.

<*• Note which sensors were most
successful in detecting minor
motion (with and without
obstacles) and which were most
affected by false signals.

For independently measured
performance data for specific name-
brand occupancy sensors, refer to
Specifier Reports, "Occupancy
Sensors," Volume 1 Issue 5,
National Lighting Product
Information Program, October 1992.
SCHEDULING
CONTROLS

Besides occupancy sensors,
scheduling controls help eliminate
unnecessary use of lighting.
Timed Switching
Systems

You can install timed switching
controls to ensure that lighting
systems are turned off or dimmed
according to an established
schedule. These devices range
from simple timers to programmable
"sweep" systems.

Applications

Timers can be used to control
lighting systems with predictable
operating periods, such as security
lighting and corridors. In addition,
more sophisticated scheduling
controls can be programmed for
facilities having different daily
operating schedules.

Sweep systems are an advanced
form of programmable switching
control. These systems establish a
programmed schedule for
sequentially turning off lights
throughout a floor or an entire -
building. A typical application is
found in office buildings, where the
systems ensure that lighting is not
unnecessarily left on by the
occupants. For example, if most
occupants leave by 6:00 p.m., then
the system will provide a warning
signal (such as flickering lights) a
few minutes before turning the lights
off. This warning signal allows any
remaining occupants to override the
scheduled lighting "sweep" in their
location. Typically, this override
needs to be repeated periodically
until the space is unoccupied.

Lighting sweep systems have
several components.

* The central processor, which
can independently control
several output channels. Each
group of luminaires controlled
together is assigned to a single
output channel.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
21
» Relays are simple switches that
are controlled electrically. They
are series-wired to the controlled
lighting zones and are
controllable from the central
processor.

» Overrides to the system can be
activated by either a local
override switch or a touch-tone
telephone code. '

Qualifications

Unlike occupancy sensors, timed
switching systems do not have the
flexibility to eliminate wasted energy
consumption during normal business
hours.

You should supply 24-hour
emergency lighting in areas with
sweep systems to provide safe
access to lighting control override
switches.
Daylight Switching
Systems

Photocells or scheduling systems
may be used to automatically turn
off lighting systems when sufficient
daylight is available.

Applications

All outdoor lighting should be
controlled using a daylight switching
system. Often, photocells have
been used to automatically provide
"dusk-to-dawn" operation. This
approach results in about 4,100
hours of operation per year under
photocell control, because the lights
are typically turned on about 20
minutes after sundown and before
sunrise.

In applications where you do not
need outdoor lighting for dusk-to-
dawn illumination, you can wire a,
timed switching system in series with
the photosensor. The timed-
switching system switches off the
circuit before dawn. For example,
suppose a retail establishment
requires high-level parking lot
illumination from dusk until one hour
after closing — say 11:00 p.m.
Then, the lighting system may be
switched off by the timed switching
system.

Compared to mechanical photocells,
new solid-state electronic
photosensors combine longer
service life with more accurate
daylight sensing to yield significant
energy and maintenance cost
savings.

As an alternative to photosensors,
consider installing a microprocessor-
based timed switching system for
controlling outdoor lighting.
Systems can be programmed to
predict seasonal dusk and dawn
switching times and automatically
switch the outdoor lighting systems
according to this schedule. Such
systems must have extensive
battery backup and memory to
ensure that the "solar schedule" will
remain properly programmed in
case of power failure.
Microprocessor-based daylight
switching systems can also
incorporate "pre-dawn" scheduled
switching functions. Many systems
provide the capability to program
various lighting schedules over a
multi-year period.

Qualifications

Mechanical timers are not
recommended for daylighting
switching control because they can
be inaccurate in scheduling on/off
functions, and may get "off
schedule" if not properly maintained.

Photocells should be properly
calibrated and maintained to
eliminate wasteful "day-burning."

Daylight switching indoors has been
applied with varying degrees of
success. In low mounting heights,
users may object to automatic
switching of the indoor lighting
system. During daylight hours it
draws attention to sudden changes
in illumination. The most successful
indoor applications for daylighting
control usually involve dimming
instead of switching. (See next
section.)
DIMMING
CONTROLS

Dimming controls can be used to
vary the intensity of lighting system
output based on ambient light levels,
manual adjustments, and
occupancy.

Daylight Dimming &
Lumen Maintenance
Control

Daylight dimming systems consist of
photosensors that are wired directly
to specifically designed controllable
(dimmable) electronic ballasts.
Some manufacturers provide a
photosensor to control every ballast,
while others provide a single
photosensor that can control many
Daylighting Control System
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Power
] Controller
Sensor
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
22
ballasts simultaneously. Because
the low-voltage wiring can be run
between the photosensors and the
ballasts in the plenum above a
dropped ceiling, retrofit applications
can be cost-effective. In addition,
the daylighting "zone" (consisting of
the luminaires to be dimmed) is
defined by the low-voltage wiring
circuit, which is independent of the
power circuits. A manual
adjustment on the photosensor
allows you to select the light output
to be maintained in the absence of
daylight and during the dimming
process.

Applications

Ceiling-mounted photosensors
should be installed a specific
distance from window areas,
according to manufacturer
instructions. As daylighting be-
comes available, the photosensor
will reduce the light output from the
lamp-ballast systems that are
directly connected to the
photosensor via low-voltage wiring.
The photosensor dims the
luminaires to maintain the same light
level normally provided by the
luminaires without daylight.
However, the controllable ballasts
typically can reduce output to 10-
20% of full light output. When this
minimum output level is reached,
increasing daylight contributions
may further elevate light levels
beyond the manually adjusted
setpoint.

Because dimming (low-voltage)
circuits are usually separate from.
existing power circuits, users have
great flexibility in determining which
luminaires will be controlled by the
photosensor.

The same equipment used for
daylight dimming may also be used
in non-daylit areas for adjusting
system light output to compensate
for aging lamps and accumulated
dirt on luminaires. This approach is
known as lumen maintenance
control. When lamps are new and
luminaires are clean, the manual
adjustment on the photosensor
should be tuned to lower the
illuminance by 25-30%. This is the
amount of lamp lumen depreciation
and luminaire dirt depreciation that
is expected during the maintenance
cycle. As lamps age and dirt collects
on the luminaire, the photosensor
will increase the system output,
maintaining the illuminance setpoint.
In order for a lumen maintenance
control strategy to save energy, the
luminaires must be cleaned and
relamped regularly. See Lighting
Maintenance for more information.

Light levels should be maintained in
accordance with standards
established by the Illuminating
Engineering Society of North
America. (Refer to Lighting
Fundamentals.)

Qualifications

The proper placement of
photosensors is critical to the
success of the daylight dimming
installation. Follow manufacturer
specifications carefully.

If architectural structures or
partitions reduce the amount of
available daylight in selected spaces
within the daylighting zone, exclude
the affected luminaires from
daylighting control. Alternatively, if
daylighting contributions vary widely
within the daylighting zone, consider
installing a daylighting system that
provides a photosensor to control
each luminaire.
Tuning

Using manual dimming controls, the
light output from individual
luminaires or groups of luminaires
can be reduced to match the area's
visual requirements. This reduction
is normally accomplished with
controllable electronic ballasts, using
built-in potentiometers or compatible
wallbox manual dimming devices.

Applications

The most common application of
tuning is in spaces where the visual
task changes frequently (e.g.,
bookkeeping and VDT usage).
Other applications include adjusting
light level for various occupants of a
space based on age and visual task
requirements, such as in a
conference room.

You can tune by manually adjusting
the potentiometer on a dimmable
electronic ballast, or by installing an
appropriate manual dimmer control
at the switch location.

Qualifications

Compact fluorescents, HID lamps,
and full-size fluorescents operating
on magnetic ballasts require
specialized dimming controls.
Panel-Level Dimming

This strategy involves installing a
control system at the electric panel
to uniformly control all light
luminaires on the designated
circuits.

Applications

You can control circuit dimming
manually or by inputs from
occupancy sensors, photosensors,
timers, or energy management
systems. Panel-level dimming is a
method for dimming HID systems as
well as both electronically and
magnetically ballasted fluorescent
systems. Continuous dimming is
accomplished using a variable
voltage transformer that reduces the
voltage to the HID or fluorescent
circuit.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
23
For example, suppose you are using
photosensors in a warehouse with
skylights. The high-pressure sodium
lighting system could be uniformly
dimmed in response to the available
daylight from the skylights, saving
substantial amounts of energy.

Another application would include a
wholesale merchandising outlet that
requires higher light levels during
normal business hours, and reduced
light levels during routine
maintenance and stocking
operations. The scheduling control
system would automatically adjust
the light levels based on the
business operating schedule.

Qualifications

Although slight improvements in
efficiency can result from the
dimming of fluorescent systems,
slight reductions in efficiency result
from the dimming of HID systems.
Light output reductions are about 1.2
to 1.5 times the power reduction in
metal halide systems and about 1.1-
1.4 times the power reduction in
high-pressure sodium systems.
Manufacturers can provide the
specific lumen-wattage performance
curves for the specific systems
being controlled.

Note that some panel-level dimming
systems are incompatible with
electronic ballasts. Check with the
manufacturer to find out if their
variable voltage system is
compatible with electronic ballasts
and whether the system introduces
harmonic currents.

Dimming HID lamps below 50%
power may result in a significant
reduction in lamp life.
PHOTOVOLTAIC
SYSTEMS
Photovoltaic cells are constructed in
an array that converts direct sunlight
into an electrical (DC) current. The
electrical energy converted by the
photovoltaic system can be stored in
a battery and used later for
overnight lighting applications.
Applications

Photovoltaic systems have been
installed to power streetlights,
billboard lighting, and retail signs.
The primary advantage from solar-
powered illumination is the
maintenance cost savings from the
use of direct current ballasts. When
powered with direct current,
fluorescent and HID lamps will last
significantly longer.

Qualifications

Solar technology is not cost-
effective based on energy savings
alone. Photovoltaic applications
may be cost-justified due to the
additional savings in maintenance
costs resulting from the use of direct
current ballasts to operate the
illumination system. Sometimes
where electrical distribution systems
are not available or trenching costs
are high, photovoltaic systems may
be the only economic choice for
illumination.

A backup electrical supply may be
needed to provide battery recharging
during cloudy days.
PERFORMANCE

When performing lighting and
energy calculations, refer to the
following performance tables. They
list system wattage, ballast factor,
lumen output, and efficacy for
existing and proposed lighting
systems. These tables address a
variety of systems.

«• 2-lamp, 4-foot systems
«• 3-lamp, 4-foot systems
"• 4-lamp, 4-foot systems
«• 2-lamp, 8-foot systems
^ systems for 2'x2' luminaires
-f compact fluorescent systems
:s~ directional lamps
*- HID systems

Luminaire type also affects the
wattage of fluorescent systems. The
open strip fluorescent luminaire
typically operates at ANSI wattage.
When you use lensed or parabolic
fixtures, lamp temperature increases
and power usage and light output
decrease. The ANSI Correction
Table presents correction factors
you can use to determine actual
wattage based on the type of
luminaires you select.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
24
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR 2-LAMP 4-FOOT SYSTEMS
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Ballast and Lamp Watts
Lamp Types
Old Standard Magnetic
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12/ES 34
Standard EE Magnetic
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T10 42
2-F32T8 32
Magnetic Heater Cutout
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T10 42
2-F40T10 42
2-F32T8 32
Electronic Rapid Start
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T10 42
2-F40T10 42
2-F32T8 32
2-F32T8 32
Electronic Instant Start
2-F32T8 32
Input Watts

96
82

88
72
92
70

69
80
58
66
74
84
61

72
61
62
52
74
63
62
51

63
Lamp
Lumens

3200
2800

3200
2800
3700
2900

3200
3200
2800
2800
3700
3700
2900

3200
3200
2800
2800
3700
3700
2900
2900

2900
Ballast
Factor

0.94
0.87

0.94
0.87
0.95
0.94

0.83
0.95
0.81
0.88
0.85
0.95
0.86

0.88
0.73
0.88
0.73
0.85
0.73
0.88
0.71

0.95
System
Efficacy

63
59

68
68
76
78

77
76
78
75
85
84
82

78
77
79
79
85
86
82
81

87
System
Lumens

6016
4872

6016
4872
7030
5452

5312
6080
4536
4928
6290
7030
4988

5632
4672
4928
4088
6290
5402
5104
4118

5510
Relative
Lumens (%)

100
81

100
81
117
91

88
101
75
82
105
117
83

94
78
82
68
105
90
85
68

92
Electronic 2-Level Rapid Start (50%/100%)
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T10 42
2-F32T8 32
Electronic Adjustable Output
2-F40T12 40
2-F40T12/ES 34
2-F40T10 42
2-F32T8 32
37/69
40/72
38/65
3200
3700
2900
(to 15%) Performance at Full
73
60
73
73
3200
2800
3700
2900
0.40/0.86
0.40/0.86
0.50/0.94
Output
0.89
0.86
0.87
1.04
69/80
74/88
76/84

78
80
88
83
2560/5504
2960/6364
2900/5452

5696
4816
6438
6032
43/91
49/106
48/91

95
80
107
100
Ballast factors for electronic ballasts can vary in the range of 0.47-1.30 among manufacturers.
Wattages are based on ANSI test conditions.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
25
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR 3-LAMP 4-FOOT SYSTEMS
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Ballast and
Lamp Types
Old Standard
3-F40T12
3-F40T12
3-F40T12/ES
3-F40T12/ES
Standard EE
3-F40T12
3-F40T12
3-F40T12/ES
3-F40T12/ES
3-F32T8
3-F32T8
No.
Ballasts
Magnetic
2
T
2
T
Magnetic
2
T
2
T
2
T
Lamp
Watts

40
40
34
34

40
40
34
34
32
32
Input
Watts

148
144
134
122

134
129
112
108
106
105
Lamp
Lumens

3200
3200
2800
2800

3200
3200
2800
2800
2900
2900
Ballast
Factor

0.94
0.94
0.87
0.87

0.94
0.94
0.87
'0.87
0.94
0.94
System
Efficacy

61
63
55
- 60

67
70
65
68
77
78
System
Lumens

9024
9024
7308
7308

9024
9024
7308
7308
8178
8178
Relative
Lumens
(%)

100
100
81
81

100
100
81
81
91
91
Magnetic Heater Cutout
3-F40T12
3-F40T12
3-F40T12/ES
3-F40T12/ES
T
T
T
T
40
40
34
34
104
120
87
99
3200
3200
2800
2800
0.83
0.95
0.81
0.88
77
76
78
-75
7968
9120
6804
7392
88
101
75
82
Electronic Rapid Start
3-F40T12
3-F40T12/ES
3-F32T8
3-F32T8
1
1
1
1
40
34
32
32
107
92
90
76
3200
2800
2900
2900
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.73
79
80
85
84
8448
7392
7656
6351
94
82
85
70
Electronic Instant Start
3-F32T8
3-F32T8
1
1
32
32
96
86
2900
2900
0.95
0.87
86
88
8265
7569
92
84
» Ballast factors for electronic ballasts can vary in the range of 0.47-1.30 among manufacturers.

» Wattages are based on ANSI test conditions.

» Lamp lumens are initial.

« T = tandem-wiring three ballasts to serve pairs of 3-lamp luminaires (1.5 ballasts per fixture).

• The above assumptions apply to the tables on the following page as well.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
26
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR 4-LAMP 4-FOOT SYSTEMS
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
Ballast and No. Ballasts
Lamp Types
Old Standard Magnetic
4-F40T12
4-F40T12/ES
Standard EE Magnetic
4-F40T12
4-F40T12/ES
4-F32T8
Magnetic Heater Cutout
4-F40T12
4-F40T12
4-F40T12/ES
4-F40T12/ES
4-F32T8
Electronic Rapid Start
4-F40T12
4-F40T12/ES
4-F32T8
Electronic Instant Start
4-F32T8
4-F32T8

2
2

2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2

1
1
Lamp Watts

40
34

40
34
32

40
40
34
34
32

40
34
32

32
32
Input Watts

192
164

176
144
140

138
160
116
132
122

144
124
124

124
111
Lamp
Lumens

3200
2800

3200
2800
2900

3200
3200
2800
2800
2900

3200
2800
2900

2900
2900
Ballast
Factor

0.94
0.87

0.94
0.87
0.94

0.83
0.95
0.81
0.88
0.86

0.88
0.88
0.88

0.95
0.85
System
Efficacy

63
59

68
68
78

77
76
78
75
82

78
79
82

89
89
System
Lumens

12032
9744

12032
9744
10904

10624
12160
9072
9856
9976

11264
9856
10208

11020
9860
Relative
Lumens

100
81

100
81
91

88
101
75
82
83

94
82
85

92
82
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR 2-LAMP 8-FOOT SYSTEMS
Source: Manufacturer Literature
Ballast and
Lamp Types
Old Standard Magnetic
2-F96T12
2-F96T12/ES
2-F96T12/HO
2-F96T12/HO/ES
2-F96T12/VHO
2-F96T12/VHO/ES
Standard EE Magnetic
2-F96T12
2-F96T12/ES
2-F96T12/HO
2-F96T12/HO/ES
2-F96T12A/HO
2-F96T12/VHO/ES
Electronic Rapid Start
2-F96T12
2-F96T12/ES
2-F96T12/HO
2-F96T12/HO/ES
2-F96T8
Lamp Watts

75
60
110
95
215
185

75
60
110
95
59
Input Watts

173
138
257
227
450
390

158
123
237
207
450
390

136
108
195
164
107
Lamp
Lumens

6150
5500
7740
6960
13500
12500

6150
5500
7740
6960
5800
Ballast Factor

0.94
0.87
0.94
0.87
0.94
0.87

0.88
0.86
0.85
0.85
0.85
System
Efficacy

67
69
57
53
56
56

73
78
61
59
56
56

80
88
67
72
92
System
Lumens

11562
9570
14551
12110
25380
21750

11562
9570
14551
12110
25380-
21750

10824
9460
13158
11832
9860
Relative
Lumens (%)

100
83
126
105
220
188

94
82
114
102
85
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
27
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR 2X2 SYSTEMS
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI and Manufacturer Literature
Ballast and Lamp No.
Types Ballasts
Old Standard Magnetic
3-FB40T12/U3
3-FB40T12/U3
3-FB40T12/U3/ES
3-FB40T12/U3/ES
2-FB40T12/U6
2-FB40T12/U6/ES
2-F20T1 2 (preheat)
Standard EE Magnetic
3-FB40T12/U3
3-FB40T12/U3
3-FB40T12/U3/ES
3-FB40T12/U3/ES
3-FB31T8/U
3-FB31T8/U
3-FT40W/T5
2-FB40T12/U6
2-FB40T12/U6/ES
2-FT40W/T5
2-F20T1 2 (preheat)
Magnetic Heater Cutout
Refer to the 2-lamp 4-foot
Electronic Rapid Start
3-FB40T12/U3
3-FB40T12/U3/ES
3-FB31T8/U
2-FB40T12/U6
2-FB40T12/U6/ES
2-FB31T8/U
2-FT40W/T5
2-F17T8
Electronic Instant Start
3-FB31T8/U
3-F17T8
2-FB31T8/U
2-F17T8

3
3
3
3
2
2
2

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2

2
T
2
T
1
1
1

2
T
2
T
2
T
2
1
1
1
1

table for

3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2

3
3
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
Lamp
Watts

40
40
34
34
40
34
20

40
40
34
34
31
31
40
40
34
40
20

representative

40
34
31
40
34
31
40
17

31
17
31
17
Input
Watts

148
144
134
122
96
82
50

134
129
112
108
105
104
130
88
72
86
46

values.

100
91
90
67
62
62
71
33

88
43
61
29
Lamp
Lumens

3200
3200
2800
2800
3200
2800
1260

3200
3200
2800
2800
2800
2800
3150
3200
2800
3150
1260

3200
2800
2900
3200
2800
2900
3150
1350

2900
1350
2900
1350
Ballast
Factor

0.94
0.94
0.87
0.87
0.94
0.87
0.94

0.94
0.94
0.87
0.87
0.94
0.94
0.93
0.94
0.87
0.93
0.94

0.84
0.88
0.88
0.84
0.88
0.88
0.83
0.93

0.95
0.87
0.88
0.89
System
Efficacy

61
63
55
60
63
59
47

67
70
65
68
75
76
68
68
68
68
51

81
81
85
80
79
82
74
76

94
82
84
83
System
Lumens

9024
9024
7308
7308
6016
4872
2369

9024
9024
7308
7308
7896
7896
8789
6016
4872
5859
2369

8064
7392
7656
5376
4928
5104
5229
2511

8265
3524
5104
2403
Relative
Lumens
(%)

100
100
81
81
100
81
39

100
100
81
81
88
88
97
100
81
97
39

89
82
85
89
82
85
87
42

92
39
85
40
» Ballast factors for electronic ballasts can vary in the range of 0.47-1.30 among manufacturers.
» Wattages are based on ANSI test conditions.
* Lamp lumens are initial..
» T = tandem-wiring three ballasts to serve pairs of 3-lamp luminaires (1.5 ballasts per fixture).
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
28
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
(NON-DIRECTIONAL SOURCES)
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI and NLPIP
Lamp Types
Lamp Watts
System Watts
Average Lamp
Lumens
Average
System
Lumens
System
Efficacy
Rated Life
Incandescents (reference)
A19
A19
A19
A19
A19
A23
TB19 (halogen)
TB19 (halogen)
Integral Units
Enclosed
Enclosed
Enclosed
Open Quad Tube
Open Quad Tube
Open Quad Tube
Open Quad Tube
Open Quad Tube
Triple Twin Tube
T-4 Twin Tube
4.00-inch
5.25-inch
6.50-inch
7.50-inch
T-4 Quad Tube
4.50-inch
6.00-inch
7.00-inch
7.50-inch
T-5 Twin Tube
10.50-inch
12.75-inch
22.50-inch
22.50-inch
25
40
60
75
100
200
50
90

11
15
18
7
11
15
20
26
20

5
7
9
13

9
13
18
26

18
27
40
50
25
40
60
75
100
200
50
90

15
20
24
11
15
20
26
32
26

9
11
13
17

13
17
25
31

22
32
43
54
215
495
860
1180
1720
4010
830
1680

incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.
incl.

225
360
540
810

540
774
1125
1620

1125
1620
2835
4320
215
495
860
1180
1720
4010
830
1680

405
630
990
360
540
810
1080
1350
1020

216
324
432
792

440
756
1070
1540

1013
1458
2552
3888
9
12
14
16
17
20
17
19

27
32
41
33
36
41
42
42
39

24
29
33
47

34
44
43
50

46
46
59
72
1000
1000
1000
750
750
750
2000
2000

10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000

10000
10000
10000
10000

1200
1200
2000
2000
Average lumens for compact fluorescents assume 0.90 lamp lumen depreciation.
T-5 data are based on the use of electronic ballasts.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
29
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE VALUES FOR DIRECTIONAL LAMPS
Source: GE and Osram/Sylvania
Lamp Types System Watts
Incandescents
R30
R30
ER30
ER30
ER40
R40
R40
PAR38/ES/Spot
PAR38/ES/Flood
PAR38/Spot
PAR38/Flood
PAR38/ES/Spot
PAR38/ES/Flood
PAR38/ES/Spot
PAR38/ES/Flood
PAR38/Spot
PAR38/Flood
Compact Halogen
PAR30/Spot/IR
PAR30/Flood/IR
PAR30/Spot
PARSO/Flood
PAR38/Spot/IR
PAR38/Flood/IR
PAR38/Spot
PAR38/Flood
PAR38/Spot
PAR38/Flood
PAR38/Spot/IR
PAR38/Flood/IR
Compact Fluorescent
Integral/Reflector
Integral/Reflector
Integral/Reflector

45
60
50
75
120
75
100
65
65
75
75
85
85
120
120
150
150

50
50
75
75
60
60
75
75
90
90
100
100

15
17
20
Average System CBCP Candelas
Lumens

485
775
— replaces
— replaces
— replaces
890
1190
675
675
765
765
930
930
1370
1370
1740
1740

1000
1000
1100
1100
1150
1150
1070
1070
1270
1270
2000
2000

540
720
810

N/A
N/A
100Win deep
150W in deep
250W in deep
N/A
N/A
5900
1750
4400
1750
6800
2000
9200
3600
12000
3100

19500
2400
15000
2500
18500
3650
18400
4000
18500
4000
30000
5500

315
N/A
335
Beam Degrees

N/A
N/A
cans —
cans —
cans —
N/A
N/A
14
30
17
33
15
37
18
30
16
36

7
33
11
36
10
29
8
26
10
30
10
33

70
N/A
80
Rated Life

2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000

3000
3000
2000
2000
3000
3000
2500
2500
2000
2000
3000
3000

10000
10000
10000
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
30
TYPICAL HID SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Mercury Vapor Metal Halide High Pressure Sodium Low Pressure Sodium
Lamp System System
Watts Watts Lumens
40 50 1140
50 75 1575
75 95 3150
100 120 4400
175 205 8500
250 290 13000
400 455 23000
1000 1075 63000
Lamp System System
Watts Watts Lumens
32 40 2500
50 62 3400
70 95 5600
100 125 7800
150 195 13500
175 210 15000
250 300 20500
400 460 36000
1000 1080 107000
1500 1620 155000
Lamp System System
Wans Watts Lumens
35 45 2250
50 65 4000
70 95 6300
100 130 9500
150 195 16000
200 245 22000
250 300 27500
310 365 37000
400 465 50000
1100 1100 140000
Lamp System System
Watts Watts Lumens
18 35 1800
35 60 4800
55 80 8000
90 125 13500
135 178 22500
180 220 33000
APPROXIMATE ANSI WATTAGE CORRECTION FACTORS
Source: CEC/DOE/EPRI
40W/T12/Magnetic
34W/T12/Magnetic
40W/T12/Electronic
34W/T12/Electronic
T8/Magnetic
T8/Electronic
Parabolic
0.92
0.98
0.94
1.00
0.95
0.94
Lens
0.91
0.95
0.92
0.97
0.92
0.90
Air Return
0.99
1.00
0.99
1.02
0.98
0.98
Strip
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Actual System Wattage = ANSI Wattage x Correction Factor
* These values are approximate. For specific values, refer to the 1993 Advanced Lighting Guidelines.
* All luminaires except strip are assumed to be recessed in insulated ceilings.
* For luminaires in other conditions, refer to the 1993 Advanced Lighting Guidelines.
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
31
INDEX Scheduling controls 20
Spacing criterion 3
4 , „_, Specifier Report 2,5,8,9,12,
Automatic controls 17 ..^ -n
Ballast efficiency factor 2 Specu|ar ref|ectors 7-8
Color rendering 6, 16 T8 , 2 3 5 9
Compac HID sources 15 T10 , 6 7
Compact halogen lamps 13 T12 |amps 235-7
Compact fluorescent lamps 11-13 Tandem wiring::;:;;;;:~ 2
Contrast 10
?ntn,ls...., : 4, 9, 17, 20-22
Current lim.ters 8 Tunj 22
Daylight switching systems 21 Twin-tube 11
Delamping 3> 5' 7-*< \\ Visual comfort probabi'lity.'.'.'.9"l1,"l6
Plffusers ; 9'19 White HPS 15
Dimming controls 21-23
Downlights 12
Efficacy...1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14,
15, 16,23
Electroluminescent 13, 14
Electromagnetic interference 4
Electronic ballasts.. 1-5, 7, 9, 11, 12,
19,21,22, 23
Exit sign upgrades 13-14
Fluorescent lamps 1-7, 11-15
Footcandles 3
Glare 3,8-11, 16
Group relamping and cleaning 11
HID upgrades 15-17
Harmonic distortion 2, 4, 9, 12
High pressure sodium lamps...15, 16
Incandescent upgrades 11-15
Instant start 5, 11
Lamp lumen depreciation 16, 22
Lenses 8, 9
Louvers 9
Lumen 3-7, 10-12, 14-17, 21-23
Luminaire dirt depreciation 22
Luminaire efficiency 7-9, 11, 16
Luminaires...2, 3, 5, 7-12, 15-18, 20,
22,23
Luminance 10
Magnetic ballasts 1-5, 12, 22
Mercury vapor lamps 16
Metal halide lamps 15, 16
Occupancy sensors 4, 5, 7, 12,
16, 17-22
Maintenance costs 11-14, 23
Panel-level dimming 22-23
Photovoltaic systems 23
Power factor 12
Power reducers 8-9
Quad-tube 11
Quikalc :....5, 14
Rapid start 5, 9, 13
Reflectance 10
Reflectors :.6, 7, 15, 16
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Upgrade Technologies is one of a series of
documents known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade
Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

S (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202)775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202) 775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
[All oreen
Lights
Lighting Upgrade Technologies • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • April 1994
-------
Maintenance
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
LIGHTING
MAINTENANCE
EPA 43C-B-95-009
January 1995
een
Lights
Proper lighting system maintenance is essential to
high quality, efficient lighting. Systematic lighting
management methods and services from lighting
specialists can help organize the process and assure
continued high performance of any lighting system.
ACTION CHECKLIST
Group relamp to reduce lumen depreciation and
maintenance costs.

Clean fixtures at the time of relamping, more
often in dirty locations.

Write a lighting maintenance policy.

Design your lighting upgrade projects to
incorporate effective maintenance.

Get help when needed from the following
resources.

• lighting management companies
• consultants
• distributors
• manufacturers
INTRODUCTION
Lighting maintenance is more than simply replacing
lamps and ballasts when they fail. Facility managers
today must manage their lighting resources (i.e.,
fixtures, lamp/ballast inventory, labor, energy) to
sustain the quality of a lighting system.

The light output of a luminaire decreases with age and
use, yet the energy input remains unchanged. (See
Exhibit 1 on the next page.) Because the human eye
is extremely adaptive to gradually changing lighting
conditions, most occupants do not notice the gradual
CONTENTS
ACTION CHECKLIST .
INTRODUCTION
LIGHT LOSS FACTORS
MAINTENANCE PLANNING
GETTING HELP
EXAMPLE

n
i
1
5
7
7

decline in light levels. Eventually, however, the
reduction will affect the appearance of the space and
the productivity and safety of the occupants.

In the past, lighting designers have dealt with this
problem by increasing the number of fixtures or lamps
to compensate for the future light loss. While this
simplifies maintenance, it is not an acceptable solution
due to the added initial equipment cost, energy cost,
and energy-related pollution.
LIGHT LOSS FACTORS

Three factors cause light loss.

<*• lamp and ballast failure

«• lamp lumen depreciation

"• luminaire dirt depreciation

Light loss gradually decreases system efficiency over
time. In combination, these factors commonly reduce
light output by 20-60%. No corresponding energy
reduction is associated with light loss, except with
lamp and ballast failure.
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------

Exhibit 1
Lost Efficiency Over Time
II

Light Output
I I I I I I I I
I i
Time

Lamp and Ballast
Failures

When lamps and ballasts fail, they
no longer provide light for the space.
Often, failed lamps and ballasts
remain in fixtures for months.

Lamp Failures

Lamp manufacturers list the
"average rated life" for their
products. The average rated life is
the number of operating hours after
which one-half of the lamps can be
expected to have failed. A few
lamps may fail soon after
installation, and the rate of failure
will increase as the time in use
increases (see Exhibit 2). Several
factors affect lamp life.

«• average operating time between
starts
^ type of ballast circuit
«• improper installation
replacement of lamps at 70% of
rated life will reduce the light loss
caused by lamp failure and will
reduce the time, effort, and
complaints associated with spot
replacement of lamps. In addition,
expired lamps left in the luminaire
can cause ballasts to fail
prematurely. The few lamps that fail
between group replacements can be
tolerated or spot-replaced as
needed.
the first 70% of average life and
increase beyond that point. By
monitoring ballast failures in a
facility, it may be possible to predict
the value of the potential
maintenance savings achievable by
replacing ballasts before failure.
Exhibit 2
Lamp Failure Rates
Typical
Lamp Life

Incandescent 1-2,000hrs
Halogen 2-3,000 hrs
: Fluorescent 12-20,000 hrs
| Sodium 12-24,000+hrs
Metal Halide 8-20,000 hrs
Mercury 20-24,000+ hrs
Percent Cumulative
Failure*
100
80 ~
60 -
40
20
Fluorescent
Metal Halide and
High Pressure Sodium
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

Percent Rated Life
Ballast Failures

Ballasts last much longer than
lamps. The operating temperature
of the ballast primarily determines
ballast life. But operating
temperature varies with the type of
ballast, the heat retention
characteristics of the luminaire
enclosure, and the fixture mounting
method. This variation makes
ballast life more difficult to predict
than lamp life. Electronic ballasts
can be'expected to operate longer
than magnetic ballasts because
electronic ballasts produce less heat.
While there are no reliable long-term
test data available, ballast life is
generally described by ballast
manufacturers as shown in the box
below.

Similar to lamps, the ballast failure
rate can be expected to be small in
Lamp Lumen
Depreciation (LLD)

As a lamp ages (through use), the
amount of light it produces declines.
This change is called lamp lumen
depreciation (LLD) and is expressed
as a percentage of initial lamp light
output. Several factors can cause
LLD, such as carbon deposits inside
the bulb wall or deterioration of the
phosphor coating inside the bulb.
Incandescent and high pressure
sodium lamps have minimal LLD
(i.e., they maintain a high
percentage of their initial output
and the operating conditions, it is
possible to predict lamp failure rate
accurately. Such predictions enable
you to schedule the replacement of
all the lamps just before substantial
failures begin. This group
Typical Ballast Life
Magnetic 10-1 4 yrs
Efficient Magnetic 1 2-1 5 yrs
Cathode Cutout 15-1 7 yrs
Electronic 1 5-20 yrs

Fluorescent, mercury and metal
halide lamps, however, exhibit
significant lumen depreciation (See
Exhibit 3).
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Exhibit 3
Lamp Lumen Depreciation
Source: US Department of Energy
100
90 -
Percent go
Relative
Light
Output 70
60 -
50
To calculate average light levels, a
lighting designer considers the light
output of a lamp at the average age
the lamp is expected to reach in use.
By replacing lamps earlier, it is
possible to achieve the same light
Hours of Operation in Thousands

levels with fewer lamps and less
energy. While this has little value
for incandescent and high pressure
sodium, it can result in significant
savings in fluorescent, metal halide
and mercury systems.
EXHIBIT 4
Procedures for Determining Luminaire Maintenance
Categories
Source: IESNA
Maint.
Category
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
Top Enclosure
» None
» None
» Transparent with 1 5% or more
uplight through apertures
* Opaque with 1 5% or more
uplight through apertures
» Transparent with less than 1 5%
upward light through apertures
» Translucent with less than 1 5%
upward light through apertures
* Opaque with less than 1 5%
uplight through apertures
» Transparent unapertured
» Translucent unapertured
• Opaque unapertured
» Transparent unapertured
» Translucent unapertured
• Opaque unapertured
» None
» Transparent unapertured
» Translucent unapertured
• Opaque unapertured
Bottom Enclosure
» None
* None
» Louvers or baffles
» None
» Louvers or baffles
» None
» Louvers
» Transparent unapertured
» Translucent unapertured
» Transparent unapertured
» Translucent unapertured
• Opaque unapertured
Luminaire Dirt
Depreciation (LDD)

Dust, smoke film, oil and dirt
accumulates on the reflective
surfaces of fixtures, lenses and
lamps. As a result, less of the light
produced by the lamps is delivered
into the room. This depreciation can
be very minor in closed fixtures
located in clean rooms, but it can be
very severe in open fixtures in dirty
environments. Estimating the effect
of dirt depreciation is important for
determining fixture cleaning
schedules. The following
Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America (IESNA) tables and
graphs are used for determining
LDD.

* Use Exhibit 4 to identify the
luminaire category.
* Use Exhibit 5 to identify the dirt
condition for the space.
* Use Exhibit 6 to estimate the
luminaire dirt depreciation factor
once the luminaire category, dirt
conditions, and cleaning cycle
have been established.
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 5
Five Degrees of Dirt Conditions
Source: IESNA
Generated Dirt
Ambient Dirt
Removal or
Filtration
Adhesion
Examples
Very Clean
None
None (or none
enters area)
Excellent
None
High grade offices
(not near
production),
laboratories, clean
rooms
Clean
Very little
Some (almost
none enters)
Better than
average
Slight
Offices in older
buildings or near
production, light
assembly,
inspection
Medium
Noticeable but not
heavy
Some enters area
Poorer than
average
Enough to be
visible after some
months
Mill offices, paper
processing, light
machining
Dirty
Accumulates
rapidly
Large amount
enters area
Only fans or
blowers if any
High — probably
due to oil,
humidity, or static
Heat treating, high
speed printing,
rubber processing
Very Dirty
Constant
accumulation
Almost none
excluded
None
High
Similar to Dirty but
luminaires within
immediate area of
contamination
Exhibit 6
Dirt Depreciation Graphs
Source: IESNA
CATEGORY I
CATEGORY
0 3 4 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 34
MONTHS
CATEGORY Ml
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 34
MONTHS MONTHS
CATEGORY IV
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 34
MONTHS
CATEGORY V
0-3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 34
MONTHS
CATEGORY VI
\
\
\
\
0 3 4 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 3 33 34
MONTHS
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
I Advantages of Group Relamping and Cleaning

* Saves money, time, and energy
* Improves overall system efficiency
* Reduces maintenance time and costs
* Technician does not have to wait for service requests
* Technician does not have to 'search1 for a lamp and ladder
* Technician does not have to travel to two or more remote sites to
replace only a few lamps
* Technician does not have to return the ladder and dispose of the
lamps, one-by-one
* Efficiently utilizes maintenance personnel
* Reduces lamp and ballast inventory
* Reduces material costs through bulk purchasing practices
* Provides higher maintained light levels
* Prevents unnecessary ballast degradation caused by ballasts
trying to start expired lamps
MAINTENANCE

PLANNING

Many maintenance managers are
hesitant to replace lamps that are
still operating. But group relamping
and cleaning can be less expensive
than sporadic spot maintenance.
Through strategic planning and
performance management of the
overall lighting system, costs can be
reduced and lighting quality
improved.

Group relamping is analogous to
changing the spark plugs in your car.
All of the spark plugs are changed at
the same maintenance interval.
This saves time and money and
improves the overall efficiency of
your car. As the spark plugs age,
gas mileage of the car declines.
Similarly with lighting, the efficiency
and output of the system will
decrease as lamps age. This
change could decrease worker
productivity. The most efficient
maintenance method is to group-
replace your lamps, just as you
would group-replace the spark plugs
in your car.
Stepl:
Define Existing
Condition

The first step in planning a lighting
maintenance strategy is to define
the existing condition of the lighting
systems. You must evaluate the
following.

S type of lamps and ballasts in use
f average age of the
lamps/ballasts
S total annual hours of lighting
operation
S product costs
S spot replacement labor costs
a? group replacement labor costs
-------
Although room surface dirt
depreciation (RSDD) is a
recoverable factor, it is often ignored
in lighting calculations and
maintenance programs.
Since most offices today are smoke-
free, the RSDD is minimal relative to
the other light loss factors.
However, in manufacturing and
other dirty environments, RSDD can
have a significant effect and should
not be ignored. Refer to the 8th
edition of the /ES Lighting Handbook
for more information on calculating
RSDD.
Step 4:
Develop a Maintenance
Method

There are several factors to consider
when planning a lighting
maintenance strategy.

«• Use existing staff, hire new staff,
or use a contractor.

<*• Complete during regular hours,
nights, weekends.

v Manage quality control.

•*• Dispose of lamps and ballasts
responsibly.

^ Re-lamp building-wide or in
stages.

&" Establish product types.

®- Establish testing procedures for
exit and emergency lighting.
Step 5:
Budget for Maintenance

Budgeting is the most difficult part of
planning a maintenance program.
Spot maintenance of a lighting
system can be sporadic on a daily
basis, but the annual cost will be
constant after the first few years.
Strategic maintenance, on the other
EXHIBIT 7
CALCULATING MAINTAINED LIGHT LEVEL

fc = rated lumens x CU x BF x LSD x RSDD x LLD x LDP x LBO
area of room (ft,)

CU = coefficient of utilization
BF = ballast factor
LSD = luminaire surface depreciation
RSDD=room surface dirt depreciation
LLD = lamp luminaire depreciation
LDD=luminaire dirt depreciation
LBO =lamp burnouts (%)
hand, is easier to manage on a daily
basis and may cost less overall, but
the cost fluctuates each year.

Suppose you want to maintain the
fluorescent lighting on a spot basis
in a facility that operates 4,000
hours per year. This approach
would require replacing about 20%
of the lamps every year. To
maintain the same facility on a
group basis would require minimal
replacement for two years, and then
100% replacement every third year.

Because budgets are often
established a year in advance, it is
necessary to predict relamp timing
and budget accordingly. As an
alternative, lighting maintenance
budgets can be leveled by
completing an equal portion of the
group maintenance each year. In
the example above, for instance,
completing a group relamp of 33%
of the facility each year will level the
annual cost.
Step 6:
Write a Lighting
Maintenance Policy

For a lighting maintenance program
to be most effective, it needs to be
carried out regularly over the life of
the lighting system. You can write a
lighting maintenance policy once
you have completed a lighting
management analysis, developed a
method, and established a budget.
This will help in getting the program
approved and will enable the plan to
be carried out by other personnel in
the future or in other facilities.
Include justification for the
maintenance plan, so that future
managers can understand the
importance of effective
maintenance. Most important, it will
assure a systematic continuation of
the program.
Step 7:
Implement the Strategy

A well-planned strategy can be easy
to implement. Many companies use
outside contractors to complete
major tasks and then use inside staff
to provide spot maintenance.
Others contract with an outside
lighting or electrical company to
completely manage the lighting.
Similarly, an outside company can
designate and train a lighting
management team within the
company.

Whichever method you select,
strategic lighting will also make
lighting maintenance a predictable
task and reduce unscheduled
maintenance requirements.
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GETTING HELP

As the demand for planned lighting
maintenance has increased, so have
the services offered by the lighting
industry. The following are some
resources available to help analyze,
plan and implement efficient lighting
maintenance.
Lamp Manufacturers

Although strategic lighting
management can save energy and
labor costs, group maintenance will
usually require the use of more
lamps. As a result, lamp
manufacturers have an interest in
providing assistance in analyzing
lighting management strategies.
Most of this assistance is valuable
and reliable and offered free (or at
low cost). Contact your lamp
supplier or manufacturer for
information. Many manufacturers
are also Green Lights Manufacturer
Allies. Assistance from lamp
manufacturers is available from
several sources.

* local factory representatives
* distributors
» software tools
» training programs
Lighting Management
Companies

Lighting management companies
(LMCs) are maintenance or
electrical contractors that specialize
in lighting installation, upgrade,
management, and maintenance.
Many offer a free or low cost service
to identify optimum lighting
maintenance programs.

Some LMCs may offer consulting
services to help develop in-house
lighting management programs, but
most are interested in providing
upgrade installation and
maintenance contract services.
Many of these are Green Lights
Lighting Management Company
Allies.
EXAMPLE

The following example shows how
strategically planned lighting
maintenance can reduce energy
consumption, prevent pollution, and
control costs. The assumptions for
this example are as follows.

• old office building
• 25,000 square feet
• 250 luminaires
(category V, CD = 0.70)
• 4F40T12/CWIampsper
luminaire
• no luminaire cleaning for the
existing system
• 20,000 hr lamp life
• 4,000 hr/yr operation
Stepl:
Calculating Relamping
Frequency

The first step is to determine the
average number of lamps replaced
per year. This will depending on the
type of relamping practice chosen.

A verage Annual Re/amps
for Spot Relamping

The average annual relamps for
spot relamping is calculated as
follows.

• 20,000 hrs life/4,000 hrs per yr =
5 year life

• 1,000 lamps/5 years = 200
average annual relamps
A verage Annual Relamps
for Group Relamping

The average annual relamps for
group relamping is calculated as
follows.

• (20,000 hrs life)x(0.70 group
relamping factor)/4,000 hrs per
yr = 3.5 years

• use 3 year relamping interval

• 1,000 lamps/3 years = 333
relamps per year

• (1,000 lamps)x(0.07 premature
spot failures)/3 year interval =
23 spot failures per year

• 333 + 23 = 356 average annual
relamps
Step 2:
Determining Light Loss
Factors

The next step is determining the
light loss factors -- LLD and LDD. A
value of 1.0 will be used for LBO,
which assumes that lamps that burn
out will be spot-replaced without a
long delay. Exhibit 8 summarizes
the light loss factors used in this
example. Following is the rationale
for the use of the various factors.
Note that group versus spot
relamping practices will affect these
factors significantly

LLD

Spot Relamping

LLD for spot relamping is the
average value of the lumen
depreciation. The value for this
example is chosen from the graph in
Exhibit 3 at 40% rated life (or 8,000
hours). The T12 graph indicates
that the LLD value is 0.82 at 8,000
hours.
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Group Relamping

LLD for group relamping is the
lumen depreciation at the time of the
group relamp. This is at 14,000
(20,000 x 0.70) hours life for both
the T8 and the T12 lamps.
Referring to Exhibit 3, the lamp
lumen depreciation at 14,000 hours
for the T8 is 0.93, and for the T12 is
0.78.

LBO

Spot Relamping

After 20,000 hours, half of the lamps
will have failed. The LBO for spot
relamping can vary significantly
depending on the promptness of the
maintenance staff. For this example
the LBO is 1.0 which assumes
prompt replacement of failed lamps.

Group Relamping

According to Exhibit 2,
approximately seven percent of the
lamps will fail at 70 percent of their
rated life. However, again an LBO
factor of 1.0 is used. Note the spot
replacement costs of the 7%
premature failures is accounted for
in the financial analysis of Exhibit 9.

LDD

Spot Relamping

Fixture cleaning is not typically
included in spot relamping practices.
This example assumes that the
fixtures will be cleaned at least once
during their 20 year expected life.
Therefore, a ten year cleaning cycle
is used. To find the LDD for this
extended period, the luminaire dirt
depreciation equation is used. For
simplicity reasons, the equation is
not presented in this text but can be
found in the 1993 /ES Lighting
Handbook. For this example a value
of 0.65 was calculated.
Group Relamping

Refer to the graphs in Exhibit 6 to
determine the LDD. based on the
following assumptions.

• a three-year cleaning cycle
• luminaire type V
• a clean environment

The LDD is 0.80 for both the T12
and T8 systems.
Step 3:
Calculating Light Levels

The following light level calculations
are based on the equation in Exhibit
7 and the factors for LLD, LDD, and
LBO are tabulated in Exhibit 8.
These factors were determined in
the previous step.

T12 Spot Relamping

•s, 3,050 lumens per lamp x 250
luminaires x 4 lamps per
luminaire x 0.70 CD x 0.53
LLF/25,000 SF = 45 fc

T12 Group Relamping

*a. 3,050 lumens per lamp x 250
luminaires x 4 lamps per
luminaire x 0.70 CU x 0.62
LLF/25,000 SF = 53 fc

T8 Group Relamping

^ 2,900 lumens per lamp x 250
luminaires x 4 lamps per
luminaire x 0.70 CU x 0.74
LLF/25,000 SF = 60 fc
EXHIBIT 8
LIGHT LOSS FACTORS
LLD
LBO
LDD
Total LLF*
T12
Spot
0.82
1.00
0.65
0.53
T12
Group
0.78
1.00
0.80
0.62
T8
Group
0.93
1.00
0.80
0.74
* LLF = LLD x LDD x LBO
Results

Group relamping and fixture
cleaning can reduce maintenance
and energy costs (see Exhibit 9).
The T8 system has increased light
levels while reducing energy
consumption and pollution.

A further measure to reduce energy
consumption would be to delamp the
T8 option from four to three lamps
per fixture. This would produce
approximately 44 maintained
footcandles, and decrease energy
costs by an additional 10 percent.
There would also be additional
material and labor savings due to
the smaller number of lamps.
A T8 and T12 system with
group relamping and cleaning
provides 18 to 33 percent
more light than the T12 base
case of spot relamping only.

The T8 system reduces energy
consumption by 35 percent
as compared to both T12
systems.

The T8 system reduces O&M
costs by 31 percent as
compared to the T12 group
relamping case.

Group relamping and fixture
cleaning save $811 annually in
labor costs.
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
EXHIBIT 9
AVERAGE ANNUAL O&M COSTS
772 SpOf
Relamping
T12 Group
Relamping
T8 Group
Relamping
Lamp Costs
T12 Lamps (spot) 200 @ $1.50/lamp
T12 Lamps (group) 356 lamps @ $1.50/lamp
+ spot relamping of premature failures, 23 @$1,50
T8 Lamp (group) 356 lamps @ $2.00/lamp
+ spot relamping of premature failures, 23 @$2.00
$300
$534
S34
$712
$46
Labor Costs
T12 Relamp Labor (spot) 200 @ $7.50/lamp
T12 Relamp Labor (group) 356 lamps @ $0.75/lamp
+ spot relamping of premature failures, 23 @$7.50
T8 Relamp Labor (group) 356 lamps @ $0.75/lamp
+ spot relamping of premature failures, 23 @$7.50
$1500
$267
$172
$267
$172
Fixture Cleaning Costs
Fixture Cleaning (group) 333 @ $0.75/fix.
$250
$250
Energy Costs
T12 Energy, 192W/fix. @$.07/kWh (assumes LBOI)
T8 Energy, 124W/fix. @$.07/kWh (assumes LBO=1)
$13,440
$13,440
$8,680
TOTAL ANNUAL O&M COST
ANNUAL O&M SAVINGS
$15,240
BASE
$14,697
$543
$10,127
$5,113
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10

NOTES:
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Maintenance is one of a series of documents
known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

8 (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
nil oreen
Lights
Lighting Maintenance • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Evaluations
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
LIGHTING
EVALUATIONS
EPA430-B-95-010
January 1995
reen
Lights
This section focuses on the questions you need to ask
when evaluating any lighting upgrade and the methods
of answering those questions. A checklist at the end
of this section outlines suggested methods for
evaluating a lighting upgrade project.
ACTION CHECKLIST
Assess current lighting system

• Measure light levels
• Determine existing user satisfaction
• Survey lighting system to determine
potential lighting upgrade options

Evaluate lighting upgrade options

• Perform trial installation and measure
illuminance and/or energy consumption
• Estimate first cost, operating costs, and
disposal costs

Verify lighting upgrade performance

• Measure user acceptance
• Measure system energy consumption
INTRODUCTION
Lighting product literature often tells glowing stories of
cost and energy savings. But how do Green Lights
Partners know that they will realize the claimed cost
and energy savings if they use the advertised
products? Although reputable manufacturers rarely
make claims in product literature that are untrue,
product literature sometimes omits information about
a complete evaluation of lighting system performance.
To gain confidence in the decision to upgrade lighting
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLIST

INTRODUCTION

ESTIMATING PERFORMANCE.
1

1
FIELD MEASUREMENTS 4

EVALUATION CHECKLIST 7
equipment, the Green Lights Partner should make
assessments of estimated (calculated) and actual
(measured) performance.

In addition, user acceptance is an important part of
the lighting upgrade evaluation. No calculations or
computer simulations can adequately model human
response to lighting, so you should assess occupant
reactions.
ESTIMATING
PERFORMANCE
Estimates of expected performance can be
considered at three levels.

<*• The product level. You can easily obtain
information on the expected performance of
lighting from manufacturer's literature. However,
you should validate this information by reading
independent literature and verified information
from the product manufacturer.
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
The system level. A lighting
system is typically a fixture
composed of lamps, ballasts,
and optical components (lens or
reflectors). You can evaluate
the expected performance of
lighting systems through
calculations of illuminance and
energy consumption.

The whole-building level.
Whole-building evaluations
address the effect of lighting
systems on the building
environment (e.g., the
interaction of the lighting with
the HVAC systems). You can
obtain information on expected
whole-building energy
performance through computer
simulation using thermal and
lighting modeling software.
Estimating Lighting
Product
Performance
Although you can easily obtain
lighting product information from
manufacturers, you should also use
independent information. Two
useful sources of independent
information exist.

• Specifier Reports, Lighting
Research Center (co-funded by
EPA), 1991-4 (ongoing).

• Advanced Lighting
Guidelines: 1993, California
Energy Commission,
Department of Energy, Electric
Power Research Institute.

Specifier Reports are bulletins that
provide product-specific testing
information. They also examine
how well lighting products work in
combination with other lighting
products and how lighting products
affect whole-building performance
and occupant response. The
Specifier Reports provide data
obtained using standard and
"benchmark" test methods. As
reports are published, Green Lights
will distribute them to Partners and
Allies.

The 1993 Advanced Lighting
Guidelines contain a series of
publications that presents
application guidelines for state-of-
the-art lighting upgrade
technologies. Refer to Lighting
Fundamentals for more information
about these references,
Estimating Lighting
System Performance

You can also evaluate lighting
upgrades at the system level. To
evaluate any lighting upgrade
system, you will need estimates of at
least four quantities.

S illuminance provided on the
work surface

S power taken to provide that
illuminance

S energy consumed to produce
that illuminance overtime

X cost of the lighting system

You should estimate these quantities
before installation and measure
them after. A later section covers
some methods for performing field
measurements.
Quikalc calculates all costs
and savings associated with
a lighting system upgrade.
Estimating Illuminance

The proper light level (illuminance)
is necessary to enable people to
work quickly, accurately, and
comfortably. Accordingly, the one
lighting criterion that should always
be checked is the illuminance on the
task. For a regular array of fixtures,
you can estimate the illuminance on
a horizontal plane (work surface) by
using simple arithmetic and
manufacturers' photometric data. If
the proposed lighting installation is
not a regular array of fixtures, you
will need, a computer program to
calculate the illuminance. Most
lighting consultants and
manufacturers can make the
necessary calculations (Note that
the Decision Support System does
these calculations while selecting
the appropriate upgrade
technologies.)

Compare the estimated illuminance
with the values recommended by the
Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America (IESNA) in their 7993
Lighting Handbook. 111 u m i n a n ce
levels greatly above the
recommended values are wasteful
and may contribute to visual
discomfort. Illuminance levels
markedly below the recommended
values are unwise. Defining a large
deviation from the recommended
illuminance is a judgment call, but
as a rough guide, a 20% difference
is usually considered acceptable.
For example, if the recommended
illuminance is 50 footcandles, then
illuminance between 40 to 60
footcandles will be acceptable. After
completing the project, you should
take actual measurements of
illuminance.

Although illuminance is important to
occupant acceptance, it is not the
only significant aspect. Other
aspects such as glare, flicker, veiling
reflections, color rendering, and
shadows are important. None of
these can be estimated by simple
numerical calculation. You can find
a discussion of these factors in
Lighting Fundamentals.

Estimating Electrical Load

To obtain an estimate of the
electrical load of an installation, first
add the wattage of all the lamps and
ballasts installed.
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program 'January 1995
-------
The total wattage of different
lamp/ballast combinations can be
found in Lighting Technologies.
Remember to consider factors such
as delamping, power reducers, and
phantom tubes — all of which
reduce electrical load.

Obviously, the electrical load of the
installation will vary with the total
area of the space to be lit.
Therefore, for comparison purposes,
you may need to calculate the
lighting power density by dividing
the electrical load of the installation
(watts) by the area to be lit (ft2).
Example

* The electrical load of a
50' x 30' office is 2,160
watts. Therefore, the
lighting power density for
this installation is 1.44
watts/ft2 (2,160
watts/1,500 ft2).
You can use the lighting power
density (expressed in watts per
square foot) to compare alternate
lighting systems, if each system
produces the same illuminance and
maintains comparable lighting
quality. Most commercial and
industrial lighting installations will
have lighting power densities
between 1.0-2.5 watts/ft2. Lower
values are more desirable as long as
you do not compromise occupant
acceptance and productivity.

If the different lighting systems to be
compared produce different
illuminance, you will need to
calculate the workplane lumen
efficacy to make comparisons.
Workplane lumen efficacy measures
the quantity of lumens falling on the
workplane for each watt of power
applied. Obtain the workplane
lumen efficacy by dividing the
average illuminance produced by
the installation by the lighting power
density of the installation.
Example

* In the 50' x 30' office
considered previously,
the installation produces
an illuminance of 50
footcandles and has a
lighting power density of
1.44 watts/ft2. Therefore,
the workplane lumen
efficacy of this installa-
tion is 34.7 lumens/watt
(50 fc/1.44 watts/ft2).
As a guideline, workplane lumen
efficacies should be at least 20
lumens/watt. In principle, higher
values are more desirable. Note
that workplane lumen efficacy is
only applicable to uniform lighting,
where the whole working plane is lit
to the same illuminance. This
measure is not meaningful when you
use supplemental task lights, such
as desk lamps.

Estimating Energy
Consumption

Estimates of the energy consumed
by the installation are deduced over
an assumed period. Estimate
energy consumption by multiplying
the electrical load of the installation
times its hours of use.

The hours of use will vary with the
organization. If your organization
has rigid hours of operation, you can
probably predict the hours of use
Example

* Assume that the 50' x 30'
office is used for 2,080
hours each year (40
hours/week x 52
weeks/year). The annual
energy consumption for
the lighting installation is
4,493 kilowatt-hours
[(2,160 watts x 2,080
hours)/1,000
watts/kilowatt].
accurately If the hours vary you
can survey or use direct
measurement to obtain a reliable
measure.

Effect on HVAC Energy
Consumption

Lighting systems generate heat that
must be removed by the air
conditioning system. Therefore, as
you upgrade lighting systems you
can reduce lighting energy and air-
conditioning costs. Usually, these
savings far outweigh any increases
in heating costs that may result from
reduced lighting system heat output.

The actual savings in air
conditioning that result from reduced
lighting use depends on several
factors.

S geometry and thermal
characteristic of the building

^ efficiency and type of HVAC
system

X heating and cooling loads (full-
load operating hours)

y lighting system operating hours

The US Department of Energy
(DOE) and the Electric Power
Research Institute (EPRI) are
conducting ongoing studies on the
interaction of lighting and HVAC.
While general rules have many
exceptions, the typical range of
HVAC savings in a commercial
building is 6-30% of the lighting
kilowatt-hour savings. Climate is the
key determinant of this range.
Methodologies for estimating air-
conditioning savings have been
published in Strategic Planning for
Energy and the Environment (Vol.
11, No. 1, Association of Energy
Engineers, 1991), in an article
entitled "The Domino Effect:
Lighting/Air Conditioning/
Energy/Environment" by Gary
Mendelssohn and Robert A.
Rundquist. Quikalc software uses
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program "January 1995
-------
this method to calculate air-
conditioning savings.

Estimating Cost

The total cost of any proposed
lighting installation is the sum of
three costs.

* equipment installed cost
» operating and maintenance
costs
* disposal cost

Equipment Installed Cost

Financial Considerations discusses
methods of estimating the installed
cost of a proposed lighting
installation.

Operating and Maintenance
Costs

Operating costs are more difficult to
estimate than first costs, because
they depend on factors that may
need to be estimated as well. To
estimate operating costs, first assess
the values of the following factors.

* electrical load (kilowatts), which
can be the (1) installed wattage
(kilowatts) or (2) effective
wattage when dimming or power
reducing equipment is used
(kilowatts)

» hours of use over a relevant
period (hours)

* unit cost of electricity for each
period (dollars/kilowatt-hour)

» electricity maximum demand
costs (dollars)
• times when use occurs
• electricity usage during
maximum demand
periods (kilowatts)
• electricity maximum
demand charges
(dollars/kilowatt)

* maintenance costs, such as
cleaning and relamping

Next, use the formula to evaluate
the electricity cost over the relevant
period.

The electricity cost is the product of
load, use, and unit cost of electricity
added to the lighting cost for periods
of maximum electricity demand.
Contact your utility representative
for electricity rates for your
organization and for methods of
calculating the electricity maximum
demand cost. Utilities use various
methods of calculating the demand
costs.

Finally, calculate the total operating
cost of the installation by adding
electricity and maintenance costs.
Total Operating Cost

* electricity cost +
maintenance costs
Maintenance costs typically include
the material and labor for replacing
lamps and ballasts, as well as the
labor for cleaning and repairing
luminaires. Refer to Lighting
Maintenance for more information.
Annual Electricity Cost

* (electrical load x hours of use per year x unit cost of electricity for
each period) + electricity maximum demand costs
Disposal Cost

Disposal costs consist of the costs of
removing the lighting equipment and
disposing it. You incur these costs
when you upgrade or maintain your
lighting system. Lighting Waste
Disposal discusses many disposal
issues you should consider.
FIELD
MEASUREMENTS
You can use field measurements at
various stages of a lighting upgrade
project.

0 Before proceeding with the
upgrade, use field
measurements to assess the
existing lighting installation.

0 In a thai installation, use field
measurements to guide the
decision of whether to cancel or
modify the proposed
specification, or to proceed with
the upgrade in all proposed
locations.

0 After completing the lighting
upgrade, use field
measurements to verify that the
upgrade meets it objectives.

Field measurements address four
questions.

o- Do the light levels meet IES
recommended levels?

*• How can the energy efficiency of
the installation be improved?

*• Is energy being wasted in
unoccupied spaces?

«• Is the lighting acceptable to the
people who use it?

Sometimes, field measurements can
be complex; this section gives
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
guidance for carrying out simple
field measurements.
Measuring Light Levels

The most widely available
instrument used to measure light
levels is an illuminance meter. With
this instrument and a degree of
common sense, anyone can carry
out a simple photometric survey. To
accurately assess light levels before
and after a trial installation, follow
the steps outlined below.

Start with new lamps and
clean fixtures.

The age of lamps and dirtiness of the
fixture can affect light output.
Although you can measure light level
with lamps and fixtures "as is," these
readings should not be used as a
baseline for comparison purposes.

You should measure baseline light
level only after taking the following
steps.

* clean the existing fixtures in the
trial installation area

* use new lamps (same wattage
and type used in existing
system); allow for a 100-hour
"burn-in" period before taking
measurements

After completing the trial installation,
measure light level under the SAME
conditions.

* clean any optical surfaces that
have not been replaced with
new or clean components

» use new lamps burned in for 100
hours
Allow time for system
warm-up.

Most lighting installations take some
time to reach a stable condition after
switch-on. Installations using
fluorescent lamps typically require
twenty minutes: installations using
high-intensity discharge lamps may
take longer. Allowing thirty minutes
between switch-on and the first
measurement is good practice.

Eliminate daylight effects.

Daylight and sunlight can produce
very large variations in lighting. To
evaluate an electric lighting
installation without any daylight
contribution, make the photometric
survey after dark or with the blinds
closed.

Check supply voltage.

Supply voltage directly affects light
output. At the time of the survey,
you should measure the supply
voltage to verify that it is not below
acceptable levels (check with your
electric utility).

Properly position the
illuminance meter.

When measuring illuminance, put
the meter at the proper height on the
work surface, being careful not to
shadow the meter with your body.
Also be careful to avoid reflections
off clothing that could influence the
measurement.

Record light level readings.

Use the illuminance meter to
measure the illuminance at a variety
of locations.

<*• measure light levels at specific
task locations

«• check uniformity of illumination
by measuring light levels at the
work plane height (usually 30"
above the floor) at various
locations

• directly under fixtures
• between fixtures (both
laterally and
longitudinally)
• next to walls
• in corners

<*" measure light levels on vertical
task surfaces (if applicable);
evaluate aesthetics of resulting
light levels on walls (check for
shadows on walls due to fixture
shielding angle)

Be certain to record the locations of
readings for the baseline case so
you can repeat the procedure when
evaluating the upgrade in a trial
installation. The use of adhesive
labels on task surfaces can help
ensure identical locations of
readings.

The average measured illuminance
should be corrected for lamp and dirt
depreciation effects to assess the
average maintained illuminance.
(Refer to Lighting Maintenance for
guidance in determining light loss
correction factors.) The average
maintained illuminance should be
compared with recommendations
made in the IES Lighting Handbook.
Measuring Energy
Efficiency

You can measure the energy
efficiency of a lighting installation at
three levels.

S electrical load
X energy consumed
//" useful energy consumed

Measuring Electrical Load

You can directly measure wattage
on fixtures using "clip-on"
instruments. These eliminate the
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program "January 1995
-------
Measuring Savings from Variable Controls

* kWhsaved = [(kW)before x (hrs)after] - (kWh)after
ore = measured kilowatts of static load (before upgrade) on
circuit to be metered
(hrs)atter = hours of equipment "ON" time during test period
(after upgrade)
(kWh)after = measured kilowatt-hours (after upgrade) on metered
circuit
need to dismantle the fixture but still
require the services of an
electrician. Direct measurement
may be the only option in
installations where power reducers
or dimming control systems are used
(See equation above).

Measuring Energy
Consumed

Direct measurement of energy
consumption is achieved by
metering the lighting circuit
separately — a procedure known as
sub-metering. However,
sub-metering requires a detailed
knowledge of the electrical system
to ensure that the lighting installation
is the only load connected to the
metered circuit. It will also require
the services of a qualified
electrician.

Alternatively, you can estimate the
energy consumed by multiplying the
electrical load of the installation
times the system hours of use. You
can obtain the electrical load using
the methods described above. The
hours of use can be measured by
installing a light-activated elapsed
time meter in one or more sample
fixtures.
Measuring Useful Energy
Consumed

While energy consumed is a
meaningful measure, it begs the
question of whether the energy is
consumed for any purpose. If the
lighting is on in an unoccupied area,
the energy is being wasted. To
figure out the amount of useful
energy consumed, measure the
lighting use when the space is
occupied.
Most occupancy sensor
manufacturers rent or sell kits that
contain an occupancy sensor and an
elapsed time recorder. The device
compares the total time that lights
are on to the time that a space is
occupied. The difference between
these two values represents the
potential savings you could achieve
by installing automatic switching
controls.
Measuring User
Acceptance

There are two methods of measuring
user acceptance.

• questionnaire survey
• complaint analysis

Questionnaire Survey

You can use a simple questionnaire
to measure user acceptance of the
lighting system before and after the
completion of a lighting upgrade.

The questionnaire should address a
variety of user issues.

s light levels
s discomfort glare (direct and
reflected)
v' color rendering
^ physical effects (eyestrain,
headaches)
•/ convenience and safety
^ architectural/aesthetic appeal
s importance of energy efficiency
^ general acceptance rating

You should conduct a survey of user
response to the new system several
weeks after the installation has been
completed. This period allows users
to adapt to the new system.
Educating employees before the
upgrade about the benefits of
energy-efficient lighting also
enhances user satisfaction.

When reviewing the results, keep in
mind that the assessments are
largely subjective; look for trends
that characterize the general level of
acceptance of the users as a whole.
To address unique complaints from
individuals, refer to the following
information on complaint analysis.

Complaint Analysis

Another approach to assessing user
acceptance is to collect complaints
of eyestrain or discomfort related to
the lighting and analyze of the
nature of the complaints. The origin
of complaints often gives clues
about their cause.

If the complaints come from people
doing different tasks in different
parts of the installation, then the
whole installation may be at fault. If
the complaints are from a specific
area, then whatever distinguishes
that area from the rest of the space
may be the cause of the complaints.
Distinguishing features can include
the work done in the area and the
lighting of the area.

Try to attribute the complaints to
task difficulty or limited visual
capabilities. For example, if the
complaints relate to a specific task,
then either the'task is inherently
difficult or the lighting is
inappropriate for the task. If only a
few people complain about a task,
then individual visual capabilities
may be at fault rather than the
lighting. In that instance, you can
make special provisions, such as
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
providing task lights, to fit the
lighting needs of that individual.

Once you have eliminated inherent
task difficulty and limited visual
capability as sources of complaints,
then lighting is likely to be the cause.
Any lighting installation that
consistently produces complaints of
eyestrain and headaches cannot be
considered satisfactory.

If a questionnaire survey or the
incidence of complaints has shown
some dissatisfaction with the
lighting, the next question to answer
is what aspect of the lighting is
wrong. Using a photometric survey
followed by comparison with
recommended lighting standards
can answer this question.

If the measured illuminance levels
are satisfactory according to the
recommendations, but the
questionnaires and/or complaints
show dissatisfaction with the
lighting, you probably need outside
help. Among the other possible
sources of complaints about a
lighting installation are glare,
shadows, veiling reflections, flicker,
and luminance distributions.
Professional consultants can identify
these conditions, decide how to
eliminate them, and assess the
psychological impact of the lighting
changes.
EVALUATION
CHECKLIST
This checklist shows how the
different techniques of evaluating
lighting upgrade performance can be
used in a lighting upgrade project.

The checklist is divided into three
parts.

0 Part 1 identifies the viability of
an upgrade project.
0 Part 2 covers the detailed
design of the lighting upgrade.

0 Part 3 verifies that the upgrade
is satisfactory to the occupants
and is performing as expected.
Parti:
Assess Current Lighting
System

v' Measure the illuminance
provided by existing lighting.
Compare existing lighting with
current standards.

^ Measure user satisfaction with
existing lighting.

•/ Survey your existing lighting
system with assistance from
lighting professionals and/or the
Green Lights Decision Support
System.

•/ Make preliminary estimates of
energy and cost savings to
assess the viability of possible
lighting upgrades.
Part 2:
Evaluate Lighting
Upgrade Options

S Obtain specific upgrade options
from consultants or the Green
Lights Decision Support System.
Be sure that qualitative aspects
of lighting have been
considered.

v' Select lighting upgrade options
to be pursued.

^ Check compliance of proposed
upgrade with federal, state, and
local codes.

^ Estimate first cost, operating
cost, and disposal cost.

s Evaluate financial viability of
lighting upgrade.

^ Construct budget for lighting
upgrade project.
PartS:
Verify Lighting Upgrade
Performance

^ Measure occupant acceptance
of lighting upgrade.

-/ Measure electrical load of
installation.

s Measure energy consumed by
installation over known period.

^ Estimate energy wasted over a
known period.
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program "January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
Lighting Evaluations is one of a series of documents
known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

a (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202)775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
nil oreen
Lights
Lighting Evaluations • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program "January 1995
-------
Survey
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
EPA 430-8-95-011
January 1995
THE LIGHTING
SURVEY
• EPA
[ftW Green
^ Lights
The lighting survey is an interactive process of
collecting information, assessing lighting conditions
and needs, and analyzing solutions. Comprehensive
surveys and analyses identify lighting upgrades that
profitably maximize energy savings and pollution
prevention, while maintaining or improving lighting
quality.
ACTION CHECKLIST
>^ Identify components and count fixtures

v' Assess appropriate light level and condition of
fixtures and room surfaces

•/ Evaluate task lighting opportunities and control
applications

•/ Analyze lighting upgrade options

^ Evaluate cash flow resulting from upgrades and
cost-effectiveness (using IRR and NPV)
INTRODUCTION
Green Lights participants agree to survey all indoor
and outdoor lighting systems in facilities that they own
or lease. This agreement covers facilities with at least
five years remaining on a lease at the time of joining
Green Lights. Facilities with greater than 75 percent of
their space leased have special obligations under the
Memorandum of Understanding (MOU), which are not
discussed here.

The lighting survey process consists of three steps.

• pre-survey data collection
• room survey data collection
• lighting assessment and upgrade analysis
CONTENTS

ACTION CHECKLIST 1

INTRODUCTION 1

PRE-SURVEY 2

ROOM SURVEY 3

TECHNOLOGY SELECTION 4

ANALYSIS 5

GREEN LIGHTS ANALYSIS SOFTWARE 6
While these tasks are generally completed
consecutively, there is substantial interaction among
the steps. Therefore, you should organize the survey
process to reduce complexity and duplication of effort.

There are many useful tools available to help in the
building survey and analysis process.

Software

• GUDecision Support System (GUDSS)
• Quikalc
• lighting equipment databases
• lighting design and analysis software

Hardware

• programmed lighting calculators
• light meters
• ultrasonic or viewfinder measurement devices
• runtime meters
• watt meters
• occupancy measurement devices
• mechanical counters
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
This document discusses general
issues common to all lighting survey
approaches. The GL/DSS User's
Manual provides specific details on
the survey approach using the
GL/DSS.
PRE-SURVEY
Before beginning the actual room-
by-room survey of the buildings, the
following data should be collected.

S facility and building-wide
information
y financial information
X upgrade decision preferences
Facility and Building
Information

A facility means a building or a
group of buildings in a single
location having a common owner.
Some required survey data listed
below may be common to the entire
facility; other data may be common
to individual buildings but may differ
from other buildings in the facility.

• location

• electric rates
- demand charges
- kWh charges
- time-of-use rate schedules

• lighting system voltage

• occupancy hours

• existing lighting control systems

• age and type of existing lighting
system
- fixtures
- ballasts
- lamps
• maintenance methods
- spot maintenance
- group maintenance

• future use of the building(s)
Financial Information

Before (or during) the building
survey, you need to define several
financial parameters for use in the
financial analysis of proposed
lighting improvements.

• inflation rates
- labor
- materials
- electricity

• corporate tax rates
• cost of capital or financing
• availability of rebates or other
incentives
• equipment depreciation
schedules
Upgrade Decision
Preferences

Some building owners may have
specific preferences that suggest the
selection of lighting upgrade
technologies. You should identify
these preferences before conducting
the analysis of lighting upgrade
options. The examples below
illustrate how user preferences can
shape upgrade decisions.

Some building owners may specify
preferences regarding the adoption
of specific types of lighting designs
or technologies. Use the following
checklist to verify that you include in
the analysis only the lighting designs
and technologies that are acceptable
to the decision maker. Note,
however, that the exclusion of a
design or technology may result in
reduced energy savings.
Possible User
Preferences

>s. retrofit existing fixtures (instead
of replacing)

>s. replace existing fixtures (instead
of retrofitting)
one to one replacement
- new layout

•s. conversion to a task/ambient
lighting design can be
considered

>s. painting or remodeling room
surfaces to improve light
reflectance can be considered

•&. conversion to an indirect lighting
design can be considered

-s. using parabolic louvers can be
considered

Decision makers may also choose to
exclude certain technologies from
Example 1

* The building is scheduled for
remodeling in the near
future.

* New deep cell parabolic
louver fixtures are the
building standard.

* In this case, consideration of
other luminaire types or
retrofits should be
eliminated.

Example 2

* The existing fixtures are in a
deteriorated condition.

* The building owner may
specify a preference to
replace them with new
fixtures, rather than to
upgrade the lamps, ballasts
and lenses of the old
fixtures.
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
consideration.
specular reflectors
electronic ballasts
hybrid ballasts
partial-output electronic ballasts
T12 lamps
T10 lamps
T8 lamps
U-shaped T8 orT12 lamps
T5 twin tube lamps
compact fluorescent lamps
occupancy sensors
timer controls
central controls
exit sign replacement
exit sign conversion
current limiters or power
reducers
lens or louver replacement
ROOM SURVEY
Most surveys require you to invest a
significant amount of time collecting
and compiling information about the
lighting in each room. Therefore, it
is very important to understand what
information you need to make
informed upgrade decisions. In
some buildings with accurate "as-
built" drawings or consistent,
homogeneous lighting systems, the
room survey can be simple. Other
buildings with remodeled areas may
have widely varying lighting
conditions and will require more
effort to survey.
Information to Collect
Identify the task performed
in the room

Look for averages, but consider the
most critical tasks that require higher
light levels and quality.

Identify the appropriate
light levels

Target light levels should be based
on the tasks performed in the space
and the IBS recommendations for
illuminating such tasks. You should
also consider the size and criticality
of the task, quality of the lighting,
and age of the occupant.

Measure existing light
levels

This step is optional with GL/DSS,
because the program calculates
average maintained light levels.
When measuring light levels, be
sure to measure average light levels
at the height of the work plane
(where the seeing task takes place).
Avoid unusually shadowed,
reflected, or day-lit areas. Refer to
Lighting Evaluations for more details
on conducting a photometric survey.

Assess fighting quality

Consider the effects of glare, lamp
color temperature, color rendering,
uniformity, and illuminance
(footcandles) at visual task
locations.

Count the number of
fixtures

In small rooms, counting fixtures is a
very simple task. However, in larger
spaces, you may need the
assistance of a manually operated
mechanical counter.
Collect fixture data
y nominal size (e.g., 2'x4', 2'x2')
y number of lamps per fixture
y type of lamps
y type of ballasts
y age of ballasts
y type of lens or louver

Assess the condition of the
lighting fixtures

The following parameters influence
the light condition.

y physical condition
^ dirt accumulation
^ number of lamp outages
^ transparency of lens

Assess the condition of the
room

y room dimensions
^ reflectance of walls, floor, and
ceiling
y task (work plane) height
^ availability of daylight

Decide if task lighting is in
use or feasible

The following factors enhance the
feasibility of task lighting.

y the existence of modular or
systems furniture

y feasibility of partially delamping
ceiling fixtures

^ extensive use of VDTs in the
area

^ user acceptance or preference
for task lighting
During the Room Survey The following data are necessary.
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Identify switching methods
and patterns

Answer the following questions
about use patterns.

•*• Can the lights be manually
turned off?

•s~ Are lights turned off when not in
use?

•^ Are the lights automatically
controlled?

•*• Can the lights be automatically
controlled?
TECHNOLOGY
SELECTION
You can improve lighting efficiency
without reducing lighting quality.
Often, efficiency improvements will
also improve lighting quality. There
are four principles of maximizing
savings to prevent pollution. By
applying these principles in lighting
upgrades (where feasible), you can
maximize energy savings.

Adjust lighting levels and
quality

Put the correct amount of quality
light where needed. Improve the
effectiveness of the lighting by
reducing glare and improving color
rendering.

Improve fixture component
efficiency

Upgrade with high-efficiency lamps
and ballasts to increase the
efficiency of converting electricity to
light.
CREAM SKIMMING
MAXIMIZING SAVINGS
Sample Technologies

34W ES fluorescents
hybrid ballasts

Sample Economics

% savings 15-45
IRR 50%
NPV (10yr @ 12%) $768,000
Investment S0.80/SF
Pollution prevention 15-45%
Sample Technologies

32W T8 fluorescents
low-watt electronic ballasts

Sample Economics

% savings 45-75
IRR 25%
NPV(10yr@ 12%) $1.043,000
Investment $1 00/SF
Pollution prevention 45-75%
Improve luminaire
efficiency

Get more of the light out of the
fixture by retrofitting or replacing the
fixture to improve the performance
of the reflector and/or shielding
materials. In addition, routine fixture
cleaning improves luminaire
efficiency.

Control burning hours

Using automatic lighting controls,
turn the lights off when not needed.

The GL/DSS will select technologies
that will maximize energy savings as
required by the Memorandum of
Understanding. More information on
this software is included at the end
of this document. Also, refer to
Lighting Upgrade Technologies for
brief descriptions of currently
available lighting upgrade
technologies.

Maximize Savings

When selecting the technologies,
bear in mind that Partners and Allies
have agreed to maximize energy
savings in their lighting upgrade
projects. This approach involves
combining efficiency improvements
with controls that will yield the
greatest reduction in energy use.
The resulting package of installed
upgrade technologies — analyzed
as a system — should earn an
internal rate of return exceeding
twenty percent.

"Cream skimming" refers to
approaches that fall far short of
maximizing savings. For example
installing the least expensive
technologies to get faster paybacks
produces lower savings. This
approach is dangerously short-sight-
ed. It may extract the highest return
on investment in the first year;
however, it ultimately results in a
less efficient upgrade, yielding lower
net profits during the useful life of
the lighting system.

"CREAM SKIMMING" DOES NOT
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF
THE GREEN LIGHTS MOU.

The figure on this page compares
the "cream skimming" approach to
the Green Lights "maximizing
savings" approach that ultimately
yields higher profits and maximum
pollution prevention.
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
ANALYSIS
Financial Analysis
Calculating IRR
To justify an investment in energy-
efficient lighting technologies, an
analysis must include the following
detailed calculations: project cost,
energy cost savings, maintenance
cost impacts, disposal costs, tax
considerations, and internal rate of
return.
Calculating Savings

You should base savings
calculations on changes in cash flow
resulting from the upgrade. For
example, changes in the cost of
lamps and maintenance methods
will influence maintenance costs
over the life of the system. Both
Quikalc and GUDSS produce and
compare cash flows for determining
energy and maintenance savings, as
well as calculating internal rate of
return. Additionally, both analysis
tools can calculate energy and
maintenance cost savings in detail.

Refer to the text at the end of this
document for more information
about these software programs. The
GUDSS User's Manual provides
complete details on the survey
procedures required for using the
GUDSS. Also, Lighting Evaluations
provides direction on calculating
energy and demand savings.
Once you identify a qualified lighting
upgrade, you can assess its
profitability through a financial
analysis. EPA uses internal rate of
return (IRR) to find out whether a
Green Lights upgrade is profitable.
If a lighting upgrade is not profitable
according to EPA guidelines, Green
Lights participants may choose a
less aggressive upgrade option that
generates higher returns.

Definition of IRR

IRR is the discount rate at which the
net present value of a project's
expected net cash flow equals zero.

IRR is comparable to the after-tax
interest rate earned on an
investment. EPA chose IRR over
other investment criteria for three
reasons.

<*• It is a standard accounting
measure used to assess the
profitability of investments.

<*~ It captures savings and costs
that occur long after the "simple
payback" period.

<*" It considers variations in cash
flow during the period.

The Green Lights
Profitability Test

If the IRR (^savings interest rate) is
higher than the cost of capital
(^borrowing interest rate), the
project is profitable. In Green
Lights, the IRR is calculated for each
new project, while the cost of capital
is defined to be twenty percent.
Most large companies can borrow at
or below this rate.

If project IRR is greater than
twenty percent, then the project is
profitable.
The cash flows (cost and savings) of
a project overtime determine IRR.
To calculate the IRR for lighting
upgrades, it is necessary to estimate
both the amount and the timing of
the following.

* the initial cost of the project

» utility rebates or other
incentives, if any

» the cost of financing

* annual energy savings

* annual maintenance costs

* annual inflation rates

» the effect on income taxes (due
to depreciation, expenses,
interest)

t the cost of performance
guarantees, if any

Because IRR is like a compound
interest rate, the IRR calculation is
an iterative process that is difficult to
perform on most calculators.
Instead, it can be calculated using a
variety of computer programs.

H GL/DSS
a Quikalc
B IRRkalc
B standard spreadsheet programs
B programmable financial
calculators

The example below shows the
Green Lights Financial Analysis of a
proposed lighting upgrade. For
more information on financial
analysis, see Financial
Considerations. This document
contains detailed descriptions of
financial terms, graphs and tables,
and sample calculations.
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
Lighting Cost Projections
Year
0
1
2
20
TOTAL
Existing
Cost ($)
--
58,956
58,956
58,956
1,179,120
Upgrade
Cost ($)
68,700
31,589
31.589
31,589
700,480
Net Cash
Flow ($)
(68,700)
27,367
27.367
27,367
478,640
Example

A proposed lighting improvement
project involves upgrading one
thousand 2'x4' four-lamp fixtures.
The lamps and standard magnetic
ballasts will be upgraded to
electronic ballasts and T8 lamps,
and one occupancy sensor will
control every two fixtures. The box
above identifies yearly costs and
cash flows.

The estimated cost to complete the
project — including all materials,
disposal costs, labor, and rebates —
is $68,700. The reduced energy
costs yield a net saving of $27,367
each year. Given the cash flow
projections shown in the table below,
the IRR is 40 percent. Assuming
that taxes will reduce the IRR by
one-third, the post-tax IRR is 27
percent, (which is comparable to an
investment paying an after-tax
interest rate of 27% annually.)
GREEN LIGHTS
ANALYSIS
SOFTWARE

The Green Lights program has
developed two unique software
programs to help Partners and Allies
analyze upgrade options and
determine profitability: Green
Lights/Decision Support System and
Quikalc. This section provides brief
descriptions of these software
programs.
Green Lights Decision
Support System

The GL/DSS is a convenient tool for
Partners and Allies to use in
surveying their facilities. It helps in
identifying applicable lighting
upgrade technologies and
quantifying costs and benefits. The
GL/DSS is a software package that
is designed to meet the following
objectives.

"f organize and reduce the effort
involved in collecting building
data

*• provide room-by-room lighting
upgrade recommendations,
which maximize pollution
prevention and profitability as
defined by the Green Lights
Memorandum of Understanding
(MOU)

&- improve the ability of Partners to
work with consultants, designers,
lighting management companies
and vendors to achieve upgrades
that meet Green Lights program
goals
Based on user-entered lighting
survey data, the GL/DSS assesses
existing lighting conditions and
selects appropriate upgrade
technologies from large databases
that include performance and cost
data. The lighting upgrade
packages recommended by the
GL/DSS will maximize energy
savings and maintain or improve
lighting quality.

GL/DSS users also have the
opportunity to identify preferences
for specific lighting technologies or
approaches that either should or
should not be applied to a building or
designated areas of a building.
Preferences can be specified for the
following.

S fixture replacement versus
modification

-------
2± Executive Summary Report -
high level summary of key
financial, energy, and equipment
information
2T Financial Report - projected
financial results for the
recommended upgrade,
including IRR, NPV, percent
energy savings, and project
costs

& Facility Manager's Report -
descriptions of upgrade
packages selected for each
space, including the quantity,
kilowatts avoided, and annual
kilowatt-hour savings

& Room Definition and Analysis
Summary Report - description
of every room in the building,
including the number, wattage,
and layout for existing and
upgrade fixtures, footcandle
levels, analysis method used,
and unit power density

& Equipment Specifications
Guideline Report -
specifications for each type of
upgrade equipment, quantities
of equipment needed, and the
rooms where the equipment will
be installed

& Building Survey Report -
comprehensive listing of all
information collected during the
lighting survey data collection
process

& User Preference Report -
description of the User
Preferences that have been
applied to an analysis

The GUDSS comprises two
modules: Office and
Warehouse/General Retail.

The Office Module

The Office Module of the GUDSS
was the first module to be
introduced. This module covers the
following types of facilities and
equipment.

• commercial office buildings,
including office and meeting
spaces, hallways, rest rooms,
lobbies, and typical support
spaces (mechanical, electrical,
and storage closets)

• lighting equipment typically
found in office buildings,
primarily lensed and parabolic
fluorescent fixtures, downlight
cans, and exit signs

The Office Module of the GUDSS
uses a "hole-in-the-ceiling" approach
to defining lighting upgrades. It
does not attempt to redesign the
fixture layout, but it simply maintains
the same number and size of
fixtures.

To select fixture upgrades, the
GUDSS searches databases of
applicable options to find the
package of lamps, ballasts, and/or
fixtures that maintains target light
levels at the lowest wattage. Energy
savings are maximized in the Office
Module using the following
approach.

Spaces with Evenly-Spaced
Ceiling Fixtures

Such spaces include offices,
conference rooms and hallways.

*• Based on the building survey
data and databases of fixture
performance, existing light
levels are calculated,
incorporating light loss factors
(for lumen depreciation from
dirt, aging lamps, etc.). The
existing light levels are then
compared with task-specific
targets defined with guidance
from recommendations by the
Illuminating Engineering Society
of North America (IESNA).

<»• Upgrade technologies are
selected that maximize energy
savings while ensuring that
existing light levels are either
maintained or reduced to user-
specified light level targets

&" Opportunities for controls —
such as occupancy sensors and
timed switching — are
considered for reducing the
operating hours of the lighting
system.

®" In offices with systems furniture
and/or extensive computer use,
opportunities for task lighting
and lower ambient light levels
are identified.

Other Spaces

Such spaces include stairwells, rest
rooms, and non-uniformly lit offices.

«• Lighting upgrades are chosen
that maximize energy savings
while maintaining existing light
levels.

«• Opportunities for controls —
such as occupancy sensors and
timed switching — are
considered for reducing the
operating hours of the lighting
system.

The Warehouse/General
Retail Module

The second and most recent
GUDSS module developed is the
Warehouse/General Retail Module.
This module covers the following
types of facilities and equipment.

• warehouse/general retail
buildings, including distribution
centers, transfer stations,
stockrooms, supermarkets,
general retail (high volume)
sales floors, and other types of
spaces with similar lighting and
visual requirements
• lighting equipment typically
found in these space types, such
as fluorescent strip and
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
industrial fixtures, incandescent
and high intensity discharge
(HID) fixtures, and exit signs

The Warehouse/General Retail
Module is not appropriate for
evaluating high-end retail sales
floors, display cases, track lighting,
and other environments with special
lighting needs.

This module uses two approaches to
lighting upgrades. It assesses the
wattage savings achieved by (1)
using the same number or fewer
fixtures (50% or 25% of existing)
with the same layout and wiring, and
(2) by redesigning the fixture layout.

The most cost-effective option with
the highest wattage savings will be
the recommended upgrade.

To select fixture upgrades, the
GL/DSS searches databases of
applicable options to find the
package of lamps, ballasts, and/or
fixtures that maintains target light
levels at the lowest wattage. Energy
savings are maximized in the
Warehouse/General Retail Module
using the following approach.

®- Based on the primary visual task
identified in the building survey
data, target light levels are
assigned, using Illuminating
Engineering Society of North
America (IESNA) guidance.
;?" Based on building survey data,
spaces are categorized as
having either open or aisle
layouts. This triggers either a
horizontal or vertical footcandle
analysis, as applicable.

&• Upgrade technologies are
selected that maximize energy
savings while ensuring that
target light levels are achieved.

<*" Opportunities for controls —
such as occupancy sensors and
timed switching —: are consid-
ered for reducing the operating
hours of the lighting system.

Availability of the GL/DSS

The GL/DSS software is distributed
only to those who attend one of the
EPA-sponsored training workshops
held in cities throughout the country.
The software is designed to work on
most PCs in use today. The system
has minimum hardware
requirements.

a IBM PC or compatible
a DOS version 3.3 or higher (not
4 X)
a 512KRAMfree
a hard disk with at least 10
megabytes free

For more detailed information about
the Green Lights/Decision Support
System, refer to the GL/DSS User's
Manual, or contact the Software
Support Hotline at (703) 934-3150.
Quikalc

Quikalc is a PC-based computer
program designed to accurately
estimate the energy, environmental,
and financial results of a specific
lighting upgrade. Quikalc compares
the existing and upgrade option
performance of a lighting system. It
is important to note however, that
unlike the GL/DSS, Quikalc only
calculates the performance of one
fixture type at a time. Therefore, to
analyze the lighting in a building that
contains several fixture types
requires several "runs" of Quikalc.
The cash flows from each fixture
type can then be manually
aggregated into a combined project
cash flow.

Existing fixture, upgrade, and
operating data are entered on up to
24 input screens. The results can be
immediately displayed in a "results
window" that appears at the bottom
of the screen. The results window
enables the user to see how
changes in the input data affect the
projected performance of the
upgrade. The following key results
are displayed in the results window.

• internal rate of return (IRR)
• net present value (NPV)
• annual kilowatt-hour savings
(kWh/yr)
• percent lighting energy savings
(%)
• percent change in lumen output
• project cost ($)

Users can also view or print financial
and pollution prevention reports, as
well as a summary of the lighting
systems selected.

Although Quikalc calculates the
performance of an upgrade selected
by the user, it does not recommend
any specific upgrades. Therefore,
knowledge of lighting quality and
compatibility issues is essential for
selecting efficient, high-quality
upgrade options.

QUIKALC WILL NOT PREVENT
THE USER FROM SELECTING
INCOMPATIBLE OR INFERIOR
UPGRADES.

For example, Quikalc will allow you
to calculate the energy and pollution
results of replacing four 2x4 troffers
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
with one 400-watt industrial high
pressure sodium luminaire, even
though it would be an unwise
upgrade choice.

Note that Quikalc is designed to
evaluate lighting retrofit and
renovation applications only (as
opposed to new construction
applications where no prior system
existed).

Hardware Requirements

Quikalc requires an IBM-compatible
DOS-based computer with at least
640K of installed RAM, 560K of
available RAM, and a hard drive. A
286 or higher processor is
recommended. Quikalc does not
support the use of a mouse.
Most monitors are supported. Some
monochromatic monitors require the
DOS command MODE BW80 before
the program will display. (If the
screen is blank after running the
program, return to the DOS prompt
by pressing F, and type MODE
BW80; then start Quikalc again.)

Quikalc will support most printers. It
has been tested on HP LaserJet-
compatible printers but should also
print on other types.
Using Quikalc
Installation

Installing and using Quikalc is
simple. To install Quikalc, follow the
instructions included on the Quikalc
diskette in the "readme. 1st" file (by
typing TYPE A:README.1ST at the
DOS prompt with the diskette in your
A: drive).

The readme,1st file will provide the
following instructions.

®- To install Quikalc, type
QINSTALL from the A:>
prompt. The installation
program will create the
C:\QUIKALC subdirectory (or
allow the user to change the
location or name of the
subdirectory, if desired). The
program will then load the
Quikalc files into the
subdirectory.

•*• To start the program, type RUN
QUIKALC at the DOS prompt
for the directory where Quikalc
has been installed. After a few
moments, an introductory screen
appears, along with a function-
key menu at the bottom of the
screen. If the title screen and the
flashing "Loading... Please wait"
message remains on the screen
indefinitely, there is not enough
memory available to run the
program. Reboot the computer
and make more memory
available.

«• To exit the program and return
to DOS, press the F7 key.

User Manual

The User Manual provides full
instructions on the use of Quikalc.
After installing Quikalc, print the
User Manual by typing PRINT
INSTRUCT.Q at the C:\QUIKALC
prompt (or where you have installed
the program). Please refer to this
text before contacting technical
support with questions.
Help Screens

Quikalc provides extensive on-line
help screens for guiding users
through data entry, analysis,
viewing/printing results, and saving
files. You can access help screens
using the F1 key.

<*• Press F1 at the opening menu
for information about the
Function Keys.

•*• Press F1 at any time during data
entry for specific information
about data entry. User help
relating to the current data
screen will appear and will
provide comprehensive
information about what data is
needed and how it is used in the
calculations.

For technical support, call the Green
Lights Software Support Hotline at
(703)934-3150.
Comparison of Quikalc
and GL/DSS

Both programs do the following.

• assist users in identifying
upgrade options that maximize
energy savings and calculate the
internal rate of return

• calculate annualized
maintenance costs and light
output based on group or spot
relamping

• calculate energy and pollution
reductions (in kW, kWh, $, CO2l
SO2, and
• calculate benefits from the use
of automatic controls
(occupancy sensors and/or
timed switching)
• allow users to input rebates
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
10
• allow users to choose either new
fixtures or retrofit of existing
fixtures

• calculate IRR and NPV based
on cash flows that may
incorporate user-entered
inflation factors

Neither program will analyze
daylighting or dimming applications.

Other Important
Differences

• The analysis term (in years) can
be modified in Quikalc, but not
in GL/DSS (fixed at 20 years).

• Quikalc computes an upgrade's
relative light output (based on
lamp lumens, ballast factor,
fixture efficiency, and
depreciation effects), while
GL/DSS calculates the average
maintained horizontal
illuminance (fc) based on an
internal database of luminaire
photometries.
Quikalc allows users to input
costs for individual components,
while GL/DSS provides a single
lump sum material cost for the
upgrade system(s) which can be
edited by the user.

Quikalc allows users to
determine approximate savings
in air conditioning operation
costs resulting from reduced
cooling loads; GL/DSS
conservatively ignores air
conditioning savings.

Prime Advantages of
Quikalc

^ one-to-one comparison of
exisitng lighting system and
upgrade option

^ quick and easy to use for
screening or selecting lighting
upgrade options

^ excellent for performing
sensitivity or "what-if" analyses
by changing the values of key
variables

>^ provides a thorough, pre-tax life-
cycle cost analysis of a given
lighting upgrade project

Important Limitations of
Quikalc

* does not suggest upgrades to
the user

* does not compile a building-wide
survey; only one fixture type at a
time

x requires 560 bytes of RAM

x does not directly analyze
- task/ambient lighting

Prime Advantages of
GL/DSS

^ recommends upgrades to the
user that maximize energy
savings, given user inputs
regarding tasks and desired light
levels

^ very comprehensive, after-tax
analysis

s educates users regarding
energy-efficient technologies
(such as partial-output electronic
ballasts, task/ambient lighting,
etc.)

^ facilitates the building-wide
survey effort required by the
Green Lights MOD

Important Limitations of
GL/DSS

* requires 10 megabytes of hard
disk space

x requires additional effort during
survey (but achieves labor
savings during analysis step)

* the GL/DSS output cannot be
edited; specific lighting upgrade
solutions cannot be chosen and
analyzed with GL/DSS
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
11

NOTES:
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the Environment

For more information contact the Green Lights
program office.

Green Lights Program
US EPA
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460
The Lighting Survey is one of a series of documents
known collectively as the Lighting Upgrade Manual.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
Green Lights Information Hotline

9 (202) 775-6650
Fax: (202) 775-6680
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202)775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
publications.
till oreen
^ Lights
The Lighting Survey • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • January 1995
-------
APPENDICES
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Air and Radiation
6202J
Green Lights for
Federal Participants
EPA430-B-94-001A
December 1994
Jfll/ ureen
^Lights
When EPA launched Green Lights - its flagship
voluntary pollution prevention program - it engaged
the free market by promoting profitable investment in
energy-efficient lighting. Since 1991, more than 1,500
organizations across the country have joined Green
Lights to conserve energy, cut their electricity bills, and
reduce the amount of air pollutants released into the
atmosphere. This dynamic program continues to grow
and meet the energy needs of the country. Currently,
Green Lights is helping Federal agencies comply with
mandated energy conservation goals.

The Federal government is a major consumer of
energy, using over 2 percent of all energy consumed
in the US. Two mandates — The Energy Policy Act of
1992 (EPAct) and Executive Order 12902 (EO 12902)
— require Federal agencies to cut energy use. Green
Lights provides mechanisms for Federal agencies to
meet these mandates by offering extensive technical
expertise and planning support.
FEDERAL ENERGY
CONSERVATION MANDATES

The Energy Policy Act of 1992
(EPAct)

EPAct requires Federal agencies to reduce energy
consumption per gross square foot 20 percent by the
year 2000 (compared to 1985). It also requires that
agencies install energy conservation measures with
less than 10-year payback periods. Certain buildings
are excluded from this mandate (see box). EPAct
encourages Green Lights participation in Section 543
(paragraph b.4).

"An agency may participate in the EPA's Green
Lights program for purposes of receiving
technical assistance in complying with the
requirements of this section."
CONTENTS

FEDERAL ENERGY
CONSERVATION MANDATES.
.1
FEDERAL GREEN LIGHTS 3

EVALUATING UPGRADE OPTIONS 4

FINANCING OPTIONS 5
Executive Order 12902

EO 12902 requires Federal agencies to reduce energy
consumption 30 percent per gross square foot by the
year 2005 (as
compared to
1985). It also
Buildings exempt from
EPAct

• Federal agency facilities
that generate or transmit
electric energy
• Uranium enrichment
facilities operated by DOE
• Buildings in which
compliance with the
requirements would be
impractical
requires a 20
percent
reduction in
energy
consumption in
industrial
facilities by
2005
(compared to
1990). The
order compels
agencies to
conduct
comprehensive
facility audits and install cost-effective energy
conservation measures. Agencies should audit about
10 percent of their facilities each year. However, if a
facility has had a comprehensive audit within the last
three years, it counts as current. Agencies must use
"no-cost" audits wherever practicable. The actions
required of Federal agencies by EO 12902 are
summarized below.
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
Goals for Energy Use/SqFt Reduction
in Existing Federal Buildings

EPACT, 1992 20% by 2000 relative to 1985

EO 12902, 1994 30% by 2005 relative to 1985
Activities Required by EO 12902

September 1994

^ Begin implementing cost-effective
recommendations from comprehensive facility
audits performed within the last three years to
install energy efficiency, water conservation, and
renewable energy technologies

^ Designate one major building to showcase energy
or water efficiency (and other renewable energy
technologies if possible)

^ Develop showcase implementation plan

March 1995

^ Identify high priority facilities to
audit
v' Complete first 10 percent of
comprehensive facility audits

Within six months of each
audit

^ Begin installing cost-effective
recommendations (i.e., those
with less than 10 year
payback) for energy efficiency,
water conservation, and
renewable energy technologies

September 1995

^ Complete prioritization surveys
for all facilities
December 1995

^ Reclassify "exempt" or "industrial" facilities
based on prioritization surveys, and report to the
Federal Energy Management Program and the
Office of Management and Budget
Interaction Between EPActand
EO 12902

Both EPAct and EO 12902 require Federal agencies
to reduce energy consumption per gross square foot
and to implement energy conservation measures.

EO 12902 effectively extends the EPAct timeline for
Federal energy conservation measures to 2005 and
requires additional energy savings by that time. It
also requires energy conservation in industrial
facilities. Finally, while EPAct allowed exemptions of
entire facilities due to specialized, energy-intensive
activities, EO 12902 requires agencies to designate
specific buildings as exempt and implement cost-
effective conservation measures wherever possible in
other parts of those facilities.
EPAct

.S reduce energy consumption per gross ft210 percent by 1995 (compared
to 1985)
S reduce energy consumption per gross ft2 20 percent by 2000 (compared
to 1985)
y install all energy and water conservation measures with payback periods
of less than 10 years in Federally owned buildings
y exempt buildings in which energy intensive activities are carried out

EO 12902

S reduce energy consumption per gross ft2 30 percent by 2005 (compared
to 1985)

-------
To assist in overcoming many of the
obstacles that may have stalled lighting
upgrades in the past, participants will
receive extensive support materials and
services from EPA. We currently provide
participants with the following products,
information, and services.

* Information Hotlines
* Green Lights Electronic Bulletin Board
* Energy Star Fax-Line System
* 'Specifier Reports"
* Lighting Answers"
* Light Briefs"
* Lighting Upgrade Manual
* Lighting Upgrade Workshops
* Green Lights Financing Directory
* Lighting Waste Disposal Information
* Decision Support System
* ProjectKalc
* ReportKalc
* Directories of Green Lights Allies
* Implementation Planning Assistance
* Communications Assistance
FEDERAL GREEN LIGHTS

In Federal buildings, approximately 25 percent of the
energy consumed is for lighting. Retrofitting such
systems could result in substantial energy savings,
providing cost-effective options for meeting Federal
energy mandates.

EPAct encourages participation in Green Lights
because it provides Federal agencies with many of the
tools they need to get moving on lighting retrofits. It
offers comprehensive, up-to-date lighting information
and responsive support services. The program also
has analytic tools to help participants rapidly analyze
lighting systems and select appropriate upgrade
solutions. Additionally, Green Lights helps
participants effectively plan upgrades and publicize
their successes once upgrades are complete.
Who Can Be a Federal Partner?

Green Lights is open to any Federal organization
(including sub-agencies) that has control over its own
facilities and budget, and has its own management
structure. In other words, legislative branch agencies,
executive branch departments, and administrations,
bureaus, and services within departments can join. A
diverse mix of Federal Partners has already joined the
program, including the Bureau of Reclamation, Kelly
Air Force Base, the National Security Agency, and
several Department of Energy and Department of
Defense facilities.
What Do You Agree to Do
by Joining?

Federal Partners agree to reduce lighting energy use
by 50 percent, provided lighting quality is not
compromised. In the Memorandum of Understanding
(MOU), Federal Partners agree to conduct a variety of
energy saving activities in owned facilities:

* Survey all agency facilities and identify lighting
upgrades that will reduce energy use 50 percent
without compromising lighting quality.

* Upgrade 90 percent of the square footage of
agency facilities no later than January 1, 2005.

* Implement all lighting projects with payback
periods of less than 10 years by January 1, 2005.

* Re-survey and, if necessary, upgrade each facility
within five years of the initial surveys and
upgrades.

* Appoint an implementation director who oversees
participation in the program.

* Document annual energy efficiency
improvements.

» Encourage regulatory reform and public
awareness efforts.

Design new facilities in compliance with applicable
codes and regulations (e.g., 10 CFR Part 435 Subpart
A).

EPA encourages organizations to look at lighting as
an investment opportunity, not as an overhead cost.
Green Lights asks federal participants to cut lighting
energy use 50 percent, contributing to the overall 30
percent energy reduction required by EPAct. This
goal is achievable, because Green Lights participants
are accomplishing average returns of over 40 percent
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
and reducing their lighting electricity
use by an average of 46 percent.
Upgrading Leased Space

Federal Partners also agree to
upgrade leased facilities. However,
several factors can limit their ability to
upgrade these facilities: the length of
the lease, the cooperation of the
landlord and tenants, and whether the
building is federally owned. The
following MOD agreements take these
limits into account.

* Survey leased facilities where the
agency pays directly for electricity
or where the General Services
Administration (GSA) delegates
management authority
Definitions of Financial Terms*

LCC = (investment costs - salvage values) + (non-fuel O&M costs) +
(replacement costs - salvage costs) + (energy costs)

NPV = LCC without project " LCC wj(h project

Savings to Investment Ratio

= PV Savings in energy and non-fuel O&M costs
PV Costs in investment and replacement costs - salvage values

IRR = [(terminal value of savings/present value of costs)1/n -1], where
n = the number of years in the study period

Simple Payback

= Number of years required for investment costs to equal
(cumulative energy cost savings - non-fuel costs), not
considering future price changes or discount rates

* as defined in 10 CFR Part 436
* Identify lighting upgrades in
applicable facilities that will reduce energy use 50
percent without compromising lighting quality

» Upgrade 90 percent of the square footage of
qualifying leased facilities no later than January 1.
2005.

Non-delegated GSA buildings are the responsibility of
the GSA, not the Federal Partner. However, Partners
agree to work with the GSA to expedite surveys and
upgrades of these buildings. If landlords or tenants
refuse to cooperate, EPA will conduct meetings to
identify the benefits of Green Lights and to seek GSA
cooperation.

Three circumstances generally preclude upgrades in
leased spaces:

* payback period exceeds the remaining duration of
the lease term

* lease expires less than five years from the date
the MOD is signed

* Federal Partner does not pay utilities directly
EVALUATING UPGRADE

OPTIONS

Green Lights encourages Partners to choose
profitable lighting alternatives that are the most
energy-efficient, thereby maximizing energy savings.

As they begin their upgrades, participants use the
Decision Support System (DSS) to select the mix of
technologies that maximize energy savings. Next
they use internal rate of return (IRR) and net present
value (NPV) to measure profits from lighting
investments. A Green Lights upgrade is considered
profitable if the IRR is equal to or greater than 20%.
Green Lights chooses this hurdle rate because of the
low risk involved in lighting upgrades and the added
benefit of pollution prevention. NPV calculations help
participants select the most profitable project among
several that meet the IRR test. ProjectKalc (another
Green Lights analytical tool) can analyze NPV on a
system- or building-wide basis. For more information,
see Financial Considerations, a section of the Lighting
Upgrade Manual.
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
Internal rate of
return (IRR) is an
acceptable LCC
method provided
that the IRR (as
described in 10
CFR 436.22) is
greater than the
discount rate as set
by DOE.
Life-Cycle Costs

EPAct refers to 10 CFR Part 436 to specify life-cycle
cost calculations. According to these regulations,
Life-Cycle Costs (LCC) refer to the total costs of
owning, operating, and maintaining a building over its
useful life, and are determined by evaluating and
comparing
alternative building
systems. For
leased buildings,
the LCC are
calculated over the
effective
remaining term of
the lease. The
method of
calculating LCC,
specified in 10
CFR 436, is a
systematic
analysis of
relevant costs -- excluding costs incurred before the
analysis - producing a discounted cash flow and
calculating the net present value. Future versions of
the DSS and ProjectKalc will calculate LCC.

Cost-Effectiveness

Building energy conservation measures are deemed
cost-effective if one of the following criteria is met.

•/ LCC are estimated to be lower than other
alternatives.

^ NPV is estimated to be positive.

^ Savings-to-investment ratio is estimated to be
greater than one.

^ Adjusted IRR is estimated to be greater than the
discount rate as set by DOE.

^ Simple payback is significantly less than the life of
the system and the federal building in which it is
installed.

Investments are not deemed cost-effective for
buildings that are...

* under a short-term lease, with less than one year
remaining and without a renewal option or with a
renewal option that is not likely to be exercised.
occupied under a lease that includes utilities in the
rent and does not provide a pass-through of
energy savings to the government.

scheduled to be demolished or retired from
service within one year or less.
FINANCING OPTIONS

Besides third-party financing and traditional
procurement routes, Federal agencies have several
options for financing lighting upgrades. They are:

* utility financing
» energy savings performance contracts
* Federal Energy Efficiency Fund

The Federal MOU includes a financial disclaimer
stating that "both parties agree that the commitment
to survey buildings and complete lighting upgrades is
contingent upon the availability of appropriated funds
or third-party financing resources."
Utility Financing

EPAct authorizes agencies to participate in utility
programs that increase energy efficiency, conserve
water, or manage electricity demand. According to
EPAct, agencies may accept rebates or other
incentives to increase energy efficiency and may not
be denied them if they satisfy the criteria other
customers must meet. Agencies may also enter into
negotiations to address any unique needs of their
facilities.
Energy Savings Performance
Contracts

Energy savings performance contracts (ESPCs) are
also authorized by EPAct. ESPCs are contracts with
energy service companies that guarantee energy
savings to an agency and require annual energy
audits. The contractor incurs the costs of
implementing energy savings measures -- including
the costs of audits, equipment installation, and training
-- in exchange for a share of the energy savings. The
head of a federal agency may enter into these
contracts to achieve energy savings and benefits.

The term -- which may not exceed 25 years -- and
conditions of any government payments and
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
performance guarantees are specified in the contract.
Aggregate annual payments to utilities and contractors
cannot exceed the amount an agency would have paid
for utilities without an ESPC. Additionally, Federal
agencies may incur debt to finance energy
conservation measures using ESPCs, provided
guaranteed savings exceed payments.

To facilitate the selection of contractors, DOE has
developed an annually-updated list of qualified energy
service firms. Federal agencies are required to use
contractors from this list.
Federal organizations that make the commitment to
Green Lights are profiting by reducing their energy
consumption and electricity bills, improving lighting
quality, and increasing worker productivity. By using
energy-efficient lighting, they are also reducing the air
pollution caused by power generation (particularly
carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, and
heavy metal emissions). As one of the first market-
driven, non-regulatory programs sponsored by EPA,
Green Lights is revolutionizing the way America
cleans up the environment.
Federal Energy Efficiency Fund

The Federal Energy Efficiency Fund was established
by EPAct to provide grants to assist agencies in
meeting its requirements. Guidelines for submitting
proposals were issued on June 30, 1993.

Funds have been appropriated through 1995. Up to
$6 million was available for fiscal year 1994, and up to
$50 million is available in fiscal year 1995. These
funds will be distributed to agencies based on a
combination of several factors:

4 cost-effectiveness of project

* amount of energy and cost savings anticipated

« amount of funding committed to the project by the
agency

* the extent to which proposals leverage financing
from non-Federal sources
FEDERAL AGENCY ACCOUNTING
REQUIREMENTS

To encourage energy efficiency, EPAct mandates that
some of the energy and water cost savings remain
available to Federal agencies. An amount equal to 50
percent of the cost savings (from utility rebates or
ESPCs) remains available for additional energy
efficiency programs, particularly at those facilities
where energy savings are achieved. To maintain
these savings, agencies must establish a fund and
maintain strict financial controls, documenting savings
realized and expenditures made. These records must
be made available for public inspection upon request.
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
NOTES:
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------
GREEN LIGHTS
A Bright Investment in the
Environment

Green Lights is an exciting and innovative programs
sponsored by the US Environmental Protection Agen-
cy (EPA) that encourages major US corporations and
other organizations to install energy-efficient lighting
technologies.
Organizations that make the commitment to Green
Lights will profit by lowering their electricity bills,
improving lighting quality, and increasing worker
productivity. They will also reduce the air pollution
caused by electricity generation.

For more information contact:

Green Lights Program
US Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, SW (6202J)
Washington, DC 20460

Green Lights Information Hotline
(for program, technical, and software support)

ffl (202) 775-6650
Fax (202) 775-6680

Green Lights Ally Information

S (202)293-4527
Fax (202) 223-9534

Energy Star Fax-Line System

S (202) 233-9659
Green Lights for Federal Participants is an appendix
to the Lighting Upgrade Manual. Other documents in
the Manual are listed below.

Lighting Upgrade Manual

PLANNING

• Green Lights Program
• Implementation Planning Guidebook
• Financial Considerations
• Lighting Waste Disposal
• Progress Reporting
• Communicating Green Lights Success

TECHNICAL

• Lighting Fundamentals
• Lighting Upgrade Technologies
• Lighting Maintenance
• Lighting Evaluations
• The Lighting Survey
To order other
documents or appendices
in this series, contact the
Green Lights Hotline at
(202) 775-6650. Look in
the monthly Green Lights
Update newsletter for
announcements of new
and relevant publications.
nil oreen
Lights
Green Lights for Federal Participants • Lighting Upgrade Manual • EPA's Green Lights Program • December 1994
-------